JP7445197B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

An example of a gaming machine that rotates a plurality of reels and then stops them is a slot machine. In a slot machine, a plurality of symbols are provided on the outer periphery of each reel, and a portion of the symbols provided to each reel are visible through a display window. When the player inserts a medal, an active line is set, and then, when the player operates the start lever, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") role, small role, etc. At the same time as a lottery of winning combinations such as re-gaming is carried out, each reel starts rotating, and by operating a stop switch after each reel starts rotating, each reel sequentially stops and one game ends. When all the reels stop rotating and the combination of symbols that correspond to winning combinations on the active line stops, a prize is won, and the player is given the privilege of receiving medals, shifting the gaming state, etc. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

In recent years, in addition to the BB state, which is entered when a BB win is achieved, as a gaming state advantageous to the player, there is also an assist system that notifies the player of the order in which to operate the stop switch to achieve a predetermined win when a predetermined winning combination is won. Some devices are equipped with a time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2002-355364

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need to further improve gaming interest.

The above-mentioned problem is not limited to slot machines such as those exemplified above, but also applies to other gaming machines that cycle through a plurality of types of symbols and end the cycle display based on the subsequent operation of a stop operation means. That's a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The invention according to claim 1 provides a numerical information storage means for storing numerical information, a validity determination means for determining the winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, and a winning probability determining means for determining the winning probability in accordance with the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege based on a specific operation, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed when a specific operation is performed, and the specific operation is a first specific operation for changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means into a changeable state; a second specifying operation for selecting numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means; a third specific operation to be terminated; a switching means capable of switching between a first state in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and a second state in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation; and a first state notification means for notifying that the state is in the first state, and the first state notification means is configured to notify that the first state is in the first state, when the changeable state is not the state, and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. The present invention is characterized in that different notifications are performed depending on the case where the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

It becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is open. Rear view of the front door. Front view of the housing. A diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits provided. Block diagram of a slot machine. Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Flowchart showing normal processing. Flowchart showing lottery processing. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a three-card game. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a two-card game. Flowchart showing reel control processing. Flowchart showing pseudo game determination processing. Flowchart showing rotation start processing. 5 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 10 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. Flowchart showing migration preparation processing. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game sections. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in a normal section. A flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 5 is a flowchart showing termination determination processing. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. A diagram showing a sliding table used in a pseudo game. A diagram showing a sliding table used in a pseudo game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 7 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. The flowchart which shows the production|presentation determination process in a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the production execution process in a display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing additional notification processing in the display control device. (a) A diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo game flag storage area in the third embodiment, (b) A diagram showing the configuration of a header. 5 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 3 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 3; FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a fourth embodiment with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a block diagram regarding a display control device. Flowchart showing reel control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 5 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing. Flowchart showing menu processing. Flowchart showing standby processing. 5 is a flowchart showing start command waiting processing. Flowchart showing production decision processing. Flowchart showing press effect processing. Flowchart showing result display processing. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode in the fifth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing section command processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and a chance mode. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in a normal section. A flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. A flowchart showing all reel stop completion command processing in a normal section. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in chance mode. The figure which shows an example of the display mode displayed on an auxiliary display part. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel in the sixth embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits provided. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits provided. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits provided. The figure which shows an example of a lottery table. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in a normal section. A flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning combinations and navigation rates. Flowchart showing winning combination information creation processing. Flowchart showing operation navigation processing. Flowchart showing promotion determination processing. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. The figure which shows an example of a lottery table. 12 is a flowchart showing section lottery processing in chance mode in the seventh embodiment. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 10 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in chance mode. A flowchart showing lottery result command processing in chance mode. Flowchart showing confrontation performance processing. Flowchart showing performance determination processing. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. Flowchart showing the first performance determination process. Flowchart showing the second performance determination process. Flowchart showing pseudo game determination processing. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in notification mode. Flowchart showing lottery result command processing in notification mode. Explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game sections in the eighth embodiment. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 5 is a flowchart showing navigation counter update processing. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing navigation determination processing. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. FIG. 7 is a block diagram related to auxiliary performance in the ninth embodiment. (a) A diagram showing the channel configuration, (b) A diagram showing the configuration of the CH4 layer. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the volume of BGM and the volume of winning sound. Flowchart showing production control processing. Flowchart showing liquid crystal control processing. Flowchart showing winning sound instruction processing. An explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the output time of the winning sound and the BGM volume recovery time. Flowchart showing BGM output processing. 5 is a flowchart showing volume value setting processing. An explanatory diagram for explaining changes in volume values in each layer of the CH4 layer. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an ending movie in the tenth embodiment. Flowchart showing ED determination processing. Flowchart showing ED processing. Flowchart showing error confirmation processing. Flowchart showing restart processing. 12 is a flowchart showing a winning probability setting process in the eleventh embodiment. Flowchart showing setting change processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a first sensor buffer. 5 is a flowchart showing ON edge confirmation processing. 10 is a flowchart showing change completion processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting key OFF wait process. Flowchart showing front door command processing. 5 is a flowchart showing setting change command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing change end command processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a series of operations performed when setting a winning probability, a setting value, and a notification sound to be notified.

(First embodiment)

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 480-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=480 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

Symbols include "Cherry" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (for example, 17th on left reel 32L), " "Red 7" symbol (e.g. 16th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g. 15th on left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (e.g. 14th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol ( For example, there are 8 types of symbols: 11th on the left reel 32L) and "White 7" symbol (for example, 6th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three horizontally parallel lines and two diagonally crosswise lines, connecting each position where these nine symbols are visible. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the middle symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are used as horizontal combination lines. A connected middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. In addition, as a diagonal combination line, there is a line L4 that connects the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. Symbols and a line L5 rising to the right connecting the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R are set. If the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the active line, the prize is recognized as winning, and the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as gaming media is given, or the gaming state is changed. Benefits are now being granted.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as an active line. The four combination lines of the upper line L1, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are not set as valid lines.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include BB1 winning and BB2 winning.

When the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, a BB1 prize is awarded. When the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a BB2 prize is awarded. When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

A replay win is an example of a win that provides a replay benefit that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals.

When the "replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, a replay win occurs.

Minor prizes for which medals are paid out include watermelon prizes, cherry prizes, bell prizes, and supplementary prizes.

When the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a watermelon prize. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a cherry prize.

When the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on any combination line, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. More specifically, in addition to the case where the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the middle line L2, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. When a combination of different symbols stops on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. Examples of combinations of symbols that visually result in a bell prize include the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "star" symbol, and the "star" symbol, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol. be. Further, although the details of the symbol combinations that result in winnings are omitted, when a supplementary winning combination is established, one medal is paid out.

Note that hereinafter, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning symbol will also be referred to as a winning symbol combination. For example, the combination of BB2 symbols is a combination of symbols that results in a BB2 prize, that is, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols, and "white 7" symbols. In addition, the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to each winning symbol are also referred to as winning symbols. For example, the BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, on the left side of the first credit input switch 56, a second credit input switch 57 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting one virtual medal. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61, and a payout section that displays the number of medals paid out at the time of winning. A sheet number display section 62 is provided respectively. Furthermore, a section indicator 66 indicating a game section is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 62. Although these display sections 60 to 62 and the section display 66 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a credit insertion detection sensor 56a to 58a that individually detects the operation of each credit input switch 56 to 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, and a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset switch 72. Various sensors such as a sensor 72a and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are sent to the input/output port 104. It is designed to be output to the CPU 102 via the CPU 102.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card The input/output port 104 is connected to an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, a section display 66, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), etc. connected via.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, and includes a board in which a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these are integrated. After receiving the signal from the main controller 101, the display controller 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages games. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game status, the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status, the section information storage area 106d for storing the game period, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 10), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured so that a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b is inputted when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage process, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been restored, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stepping motor that is the respective reel drive motor is driven, and in order to stop the rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding stepping motor is Performs stepping motor control processing such as applying a brake to the motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 9) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S111, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S112, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S113, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 11.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not a re-game winning was achieved in the previous game. If the re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if a re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If a replay win has not been established, a sensor abnormality check process is performed to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, and if there is an abnormality. If an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality event processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do. After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined in step S206 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S207, a valid line setting process is performed to set the middle line L1 as a valid line, and in step S208, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S209, the rotation initialization process in step S210, the 4.1 second elapsed waiting process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the game section process in step S214, and the step S215 The BB status processing is executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S209 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 12.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance. , it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 13 is a lottery table selected in a 3-card game with "setting 3", and FIG. 14 is a lottery table selected in a 2-card game with "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process advances to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=5, in step S306, a middle right/left bell winning flag indicating that the bell, supplementary role 2, and supplementary role 4 have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. do.

By the way, if the set winning flag is neither the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 was won nor the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 was won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is set to the corresponding winning flag. It is reset after the end of the game (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid over multiple games. In addition, in step S306 when the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set. Don't set flags. Therefore, for example, if you win BB2 in a 2-coin game and play a 3-coin game with the BB2 winning flag carried over, you will not win BB1.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if you use the lottery table shown in Figure 13 to determine the validity of the winning combination in a 3-card game, the probability of winning in the replay is approximately 1 in 7.3. The probability of winning left and right bells, middle right left bell, right middle left bell, and right left middle bell is about 1 in 9.0, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is about 1 in 50, and the probability of winning BB1 is about 1 in 9.0. The probability of this happening is approximately 1/12. In the 3-card game, the event of winning the 1-card winning combination and the event of winning BB2 do not occur.

If you use the lottery table shown in Figure 14 to determine the correctness of the winning combination in a two-card game, the probability of winning in the replay is approximately 1/7.3, which is 1 in 7.3, left middle right bell, left middle right bell, middle left right bell. , The probability of winning the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/16,000 each, the probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50 each, and the probability of winning the 1-card hand. The probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1/4.0. In the two-coin game, no event occurs that results in BB1 being won.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a section lottery process related to the transition of the game section is performed. In step S310, a lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps various results performed in the main lottery process, specifically, the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not, and the lottery result in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command is transmitted, the lottery process ends.

When the lottery process is completed, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, a rotation initialization process is performed in step S210. The RAM 106 is provided with a motor control storage area that stores information used for drive control of the stepping motor, and in the rotation initialization process, processing is performed to initialize the motor control storage area. In step S211, a process of waiting for 4.1 seconds to elapse is performed. 4. In the 1 second elapsed wait process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (approximately 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reels started rotating in the previous game, and If not, wait until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the 4.1 second elapse waiting process is ended. Because the 4.1 second waiting process is performed, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game (hereinafter also referred to as "main game") in which benefits such as medal payouts are given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops in one game round, there are also pseudo-games. Games may be played. In the following, in order to make it easier to understand, the reel control process will be explained first when no pseudo game is played, that is, when only the main game is played.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo game determination process is performed to determine whether or not to perform a pseudo game. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not being played, the process advances to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started in accordance with the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. That is, in the process in step S607, only the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is acquired, and the stepping motor is not driven. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-gaming flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

As described above, in the rotation start process, acceleration is started in the order of left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. If the stop information has not been set, the process advances to step S404, and a stop information setting process for setting the stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of determining the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In addition, in step S404, stop information for reel stop control in the main game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is only set, and even if a pseudo game is performed, the reel stop in the pseudo game is Control stop information (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo game stop information") is not set. In step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo game rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotating in the pseudo game. In step S702, it is determined whether a pseudo game flag indicating that a pseudo game is to be played is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo game is not played, the pseudo game rotation start command is cleared in step S703, and the rotation start command is set in step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotating in this game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if the command transmission process 1 ends in step S406, the process advances to step S407, and it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process proceeds to step S408, and an instruction monitor display process is performed. . In the following step S409, command transmission processing 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S902, and a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 understands that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed in this game. Further, in step S902, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the player etc. are informed that it is now possible to issue a stop command in this game. Thereafter, the command transmission process 2 is ended.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process advances to step S410 and a stop control process is performed.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S1008, and it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a stop command is issued, the process advances to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S1106, and a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command and which reel is to be stopped. Further, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby notifying the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S1107, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S1108, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and if the pseudo game flag is not set, the stop position determination process is ended after performing the stop information change process in step S1110.

Here, the stop information changing process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information changing process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. This slot machine 10 issues a stop command when the left middle right bell, left right middle bell, middle left right bell, middle right left bell, right middle left bell, or right left middle bell is won (see Fig. 13). A stop information change process is performed to change the winning mode that is established depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been generated.

For example, if the left middle right bell is won, the bell can be stopped in any other order such that if the left stop switch 42 -> middle stop switch 43 -> right stop switch 44 is operated in the order of operation, the bell will be won. The stop information is changed so that if the switches 42 to 44 are operated, a supplementary combination 1 win or a supplementary combination 4 win is established. The same applies to the left and right middle bells, middle left and right bells, middle right and left bells, right middle left bells, and right and left middle bells, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation that corresponds to the name of the winning combination, the bell will be won. The stop information is changed so that if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, a supplementary winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is achieved. In addition, hereinafter, the left middle right bell, the left and right middle bell, the middle left and right bells, the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell are also collectively referred to as "push order combination" or "push order bell."

Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, if a replay win is achieved through the stop information setting process and the stop information changing process, the replay win is established regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the push order bell, if you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the correct operation order, you will win the bell regardless of the operation timing, and if you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the incorrect operation order, you will win the bell prize. Regardless of the situation, the supplementary role will be awarded. If a one-card winning combination is won, a supplementary winning combination is established regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. In the case of winning a watermelon, winning a cherry, winning BB1, and winning BB2, you must operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at a predetermined timing, aiming at the winning symbol. If so, the corresponding prize will be awarded.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S1010, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command has been generated is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S1008 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been generated has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing a brake process. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S1012, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not an instruction monitor, which will be described later, is being displayed. If the instruction monitor is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S1016 is to wait for the brake processing to be completed in the stepping motor control processing and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, first a payout determination process is performed. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning is established on the active line. judge. If a prize has not been won, the payout determination process is immediately terminated, and if a prize has been won, the winning condition device is further set in correspondence with the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. Determine whether or not there is. If the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the number of payouts corresponding to the condition device are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106, and the payout determination process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is transmitted to make the display control device 81 understand the winning condition device in the current game round.

When the winning result command is transmitted, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether or not a re-game win has been established based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. If a re-game win has not been established, the medal payout process is directly ended, and if a re-game win has been established, a re-game setting process is performed and the medal payout process is ended. In addition, in the start waiting process S204 described above, automatic input processing is performed when it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals.

Next, the game section process in step S214 will be described later, and the BB state process in step S215 will be explained.

In the BB state processing, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the BB state. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is set. If none of the BB winning flags are set, a status command is sent to the display control device 81, and the BB status processing is ended. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and is set in the status information storage area 106c. Send the configuration flags and corresponding status commands.

If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined whether or not the corresponding BB winning has been achieved based on the condition device set in the previous payout determination process. If the corresponding BB winning has not been achieved, a status command is transmitted and the BB status processing is ended. When the corresponding BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if the BB1 winning is established, a BB1 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game counter provided in the status information storage area 106c. If the BB2 winning is established, a BB2 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game counter provided in the status information storage area 106c. Thereafter, a status command is sent and the BB status processing is completed.

If the current gaming state is the BB state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining BB games counter, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining BB games counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the remaining BB game number counter is not 0, the BB status processing ends after transmitting the status command. When the value of the remaining BB game number counter becomes 0, it means that the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied, so the BB setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, a status command is sent and the BB status processing is completed.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the gaming state remains in the BB state until 30 games are played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only a 3-coin game is possible, and a supplementary prize winning in which a 1-coin prize is always won and 1 medal is paid out is established. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player will reduce the number of owned medals by 60 (=(3-1)×30) until the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only a two-coin game is possible, and a supplementary prize winning in which a one-coin prize is always won and one medal is paid out is established. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player will reduce the number of owned medals by 30 (=(2-1)×30) until the BB state ends.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages two types of gaming states, a normal state and a BB state, and also manages two types of gaming sections, a normal section and an advantageous section. There is.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the transition of game sections.

The normal section is a game section in which a transition lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transfer to an advantageous section. In the normal section, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. For this reason, in the normal period, if you are playing a 2-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.95 medals each time you play a game, and if you are playing a 3-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals each time you play a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected. If the player wins the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section, the game section shifts to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified if the push order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section in that the order of operations can be notified. The advantageous section is made up of two game modes: chance mode and notification mode. If you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section in the normal section, you will move to the chance mode for the advantageous section. When 1,500 games are played in the advantageous section and when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. More specifically, the case where the difference in the number of medals in an advantageous section reaches 2400 is a case where the increase in the number of medals owned by a player in the advantageous section reaches 2400 without becoming 0. In other words, the difference in the number of medals owned by a player in the advantageous section reaches 2400. This is a case where the difference in the number of medals from the base point when the number of owned medals decreased the most reaches 2400.

The chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the notification mode. The chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won or when a predetermined number of games are played under the chance mode. When the chance mode ends, the mode shifts to the notification mode. In the chance mode, as in the normal section, if the push order bell is won, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. Therefore, in chance mode, if you are playing a 2-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.95 medals each time you play a game, and if you are playing a 3-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals each time you play a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected.

The notification mode is a game mode in which, in a 3-coin game, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell winning prize when the push order bell is won is notified. Therefore, in the notification mode, if it is a 2-card game, it is expected that about 0.95 medals will be reduced each time one game is played, while if it is a 3-card game, it is expected that about 3.5 medals will be reduced every time one game is played. It is expected that the number of medals will increase. The notification mode ends when the net increase in the number of medals reaches a predetermined number under the notification mode. When the notification mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the normal section.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 has a gaming feature in which the number of owned medals is increased by playing a three-coin game under the notification mode.

Below, various processes performed by the main control device 101 when managing the game section will be explained with reference to the flowcharts from FIG. 25 onwards. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand, various processes performed by the main control device 101 in each game section will be explained individually.

First, processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-coin game, the process advances to step S1302, and it is determined whether a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether any winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1303, and it is determined whether the winning flag was set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the event of winning BB2 does not occur in the three-copy game. Therefore, if the only winning flag set is the BB2 winning flag, it is determined that the winning flag was not set in the current game, and if a winning flag other than the BB2 winning flag is set, , it is determined that the winning flag was set in the current game. If the winning flag is the one set in the current game, a transition flag is set in step S1304, and the section indicator 66 is turned on in step S1305, and the process ends. If the current game is a 2-coin game, if the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag is set but was not set in the current game, this process will end immediately. do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the normal section. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that you have won the transition lottery in this game. In such a case, advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. In step S1403, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S1404, the section game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the subsequent step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S1407, the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S1408, the difference sheet number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, a section command is sent in step S1409, and the process ends. . Here, the section command refers to various information regarding the game section at the end of the game (i.e., the game section and game mode of the next game, if it is an advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in the game mode) This is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it grasp the number of times, etc.), and in step S1409, it corresponds to the game section flag, game mode flag, and various counter values set in the section information storage area 106d. Send interval command.

As described above, when a winning combination is won in the 3-card game in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode in the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", if the BB1 winning flag and BB2 winning flag are not carried over, there is only about a 1/13 probability that a loss will occur, and the BB1 winning flag or BB2 winning flag will be lost. If the flag is carried over, there is only about a 1 in 6.4 probability that a miss will occur. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in several games. Note that when playing a two-coin game, the game does not shift to the advantageous section regardless of whether the winning combination is correct or not.

Next, the processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be explained.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed in the lottery process (step S309, see FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare combinations, so in step S1502, it is determined whether the watermelon winning flag or the cherry winning flag is set. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S1503 and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. In step S1504, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery is won, the transition flag is set in step S1505, and then the process is ended; if the transition lottery is not won, the process is ended without setting the transition flag. If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the transition lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1601, end determination processing is performed.

In the end determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, 1 is added to the value of the section game number counter in step S1701, and it is determined in step S1702 whether the value of the section game number counter has reached 1500. . If the value of the section game number counter is not 1500, the process advances to step S1706, and it is determined whether or not a replay win has been established. If the replay winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1707, and a difference number adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference number adjustment process, the number of medal bets (in this embodiment, 3 or 2) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of the subtraction is added to the difference number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more. If the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, the difference number adjustment process is ended after changing the value of the difference number counter to 0, and if the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more, the difference number is changed as is. Finish the adjustment process. In addition, the reason why the difference number adjustment process is not performed when a replay winning is established is because the result of subtracting the number of medal bets from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so it is necessary to perform the difference number adjustment process. That's because there isn't.

In the case where it is determined in step S1706 that a re-game winning has been established, and in the case where the difference number adjustment process is performed in step S1707, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400 in step S1708. judge. If the value of the difference number counter is less than or equal to 2400, the process is immediately terminated.

In the case where the value of the section game number counter is determined to be 1500 in step S1702 and the case where it is determined in step S1708 that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400, there are advantages shown in steps S1703 to S1705. Perform section end processing and end this processing. In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1703, and the section indicator 66 is turned off in step S1704. In step S1705, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Returning to the explanation of the game section process, in step S1602, it is determined whether the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S1601, so a section command is sent in step S1610. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a three-copy game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game counter in step S1604, and it is determined in step S1605 whether or not a transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S1606, and the information is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S1608. Change the current game mode flag to the notification flag. In step S1609, 120 is set in the net increase number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. After that, a section command is transmitted in step S1610, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process advances to step S1607, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S1610. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag in step S1608, and the process proceeds to step S1609. and set 120 in the net increase number counter. After that, a section command is transmitted in step S1610, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, a section command is sent in step S1610 without updating the mode game counter, etc., and the process ends. do.

As described above, even if the player does not win the transition lottery from the chance mode, if he plays three games corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter, the game shifts to the notification mode. The value set in the transition game number counter at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the section game number counter becomes 1500 in the end determination process of the game section process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) will not occur if the three-coin game is played. In addition, since the expected value of the increase or decrease in the number of medals in the chance mode is -0.91 (3 medal game) or -0.95 (2 medal game), the value of the difference number counter in the end determination process of the game section process. An event in which the value exceeds 2400 (step S1708, see FIG. 21) also does not occur. In other words, in the present slot machine 10, when a three-copy game is performed, an event in which the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section under the chance mode does not occur.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S1803, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, you have about a 1 in 5 chance of winning one of the 30, 50, 100, or 300 add-on tickets, and if you win a cherry, you have about a third chance. With a probability of 1, you will win one of 10, 20, 30, and 50 additional coins. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. When winning the add-on lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S1805, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it aware of the fact that it has won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on tickets to be added to the value of the net increase number counter. In step S1807, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the net increase number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the bonus lottery, the process ends without setting the bonus flag. If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the additional lottery.

Here, specific processing performed in the notification mode in the reel control processing will be explained.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S401, pseudo game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is directly ended. If the current gaming mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the add-on flag is set. When the add-on flag is set, that is, when the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, and a pseudo game flag is set in step S504, and the present process ends. When the add-on flag is not set, that is, when the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is performed to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game in step S505. In the pseudo-game lottery, the winning flag is set and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination is used to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended. If the pseudo game lottery is won, a pseudo game flag is set in step S504, and the process ends.

As described above, in the notification mode, a pseudo game flag is set in the case of winning the additional lottery and the case of winning the pseudo game lottery, and a pseudo game is performed in the corresponding game round.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In the notification mode, an image of the young character walking along the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is displayed on the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65. In FIG. 31(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 31(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. Then, when the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 31(c), it is announced that the current game is a pseudo game. In addition, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that 100 sheets will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), rotation starts from the left reel 32L. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, the notification that it is a pseudo game is finished, and the image of the young character walking on the road and the fact that the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184 are displayed. The player is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the real game.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In FIG. 32(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 32(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the current game is a pseudo-game. In addition to the notification, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the information will not be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 32(d), rotation starts from the left reel 32L. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, if the push order bell has been won, the notification that it is a pseudo game ends, and the order of operations that can make the bell win and the remaining payout until the end of the notification mode is displayed. It is displayed that the number remains 84, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the real game. When the middle left and right bells are won, the operation order "213" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 32(d).

As described above, in this slot machine 10, when playing a pseudo game, the game progresses in the order of pseudo game → main game in one game round. Therefore, below, the reel control processing in the pseudo game will be explained in order.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not being played, the process advances to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started in accordance with the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-gaming flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. In the first step S403, the stop information is not set, so the process proceeds to step S404, and a stop information setting process is performed to set the stop information. That is, in the present slot machine 10, the stop information for the present game is set after performing the rotation start process for the pseudo game, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. Thereafter, in step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S705, and a pseudo game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. After that, this process ends. The display control device 81 starts the auxiliary performance for the pseudo game shown in FIG. 31(b) etc. by receiving the pseudo game rotation start command.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if the command transmission process 1 ends in step S406, the process advances to step S407, and it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process advances to step S408 and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

Here, the instruction monitor is a display section that informs the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make a bell win, and is managed by the main control device 101. In this slot machine 10, the payout number display section 62 has a function as an instruction monitor, and when the left middle right bell is won, the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 must be operated in the order. When it is possible to make a winning prize, "1" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. If the center right/left bell is won, "2" is displayed in the payout number display section 62, and if the right, left, center bell is won, "3" is displayed in the payout number display section 62, If the left/right middle bell is won, "4" is displayed on the payout number display section 62; if the middle left/right bell is won, "5" is displayed on the payout number display section 62; If the right middle left bell is won, "6" is displayed on the payout number display section 62.

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process ends without displaying the instruction monitor. That is, in the pseudo game, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction monitor does not display the order of operations that can make the bell win. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S903, and a pseudo stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo-stoppable command, the display control device 81 grasps that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed in the pseudo game. Further, in step S903, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the player etc. are informed that it is now possible to generate a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. Thereafter, command transmission processing 2 is ended.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process advances to step S410 and a stop control process is performed.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S1008, and it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated in the pseudo game, that is, whether a pseudo stop command has been generated. If a pseudo-stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S1001. If a pseudo-stop command is generated, the process advances to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reels.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol is acquired. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1104, and the pseudo game stop information is referred to. In the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, a slip table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win and a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win are stored in advance. The slip table is stored, and in step S1104, the slip table corresponding to the trigger for executing the pseudo game is referred to. Here, the sliding table is a table that determines how far the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be slid (rotated) and then pseudo-stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the sliding table is capable of deriving the relationship between the reaching symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually causes the symbol to pseudo-stop at the base position. This is a group of outage data.

FIG. 33 is a slip table that is referred to in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win. A symbol with a number having a sliding number of 0 is a symbol that actually pseudo-stops at the lower stage. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated while the "Replay" symbol No. 15 on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will pseudo-stop without slipping, and the "Replay" symbol No. 16 will stop. ” The pattern pseudo-stops in the middle. Also, a symbol whose number of slides is not 0 means that the reel will slide by the number of symbols listed. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the 11th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the bottom row, the left reel 32L will slide by 4 symbols, and the 15th "Replay" symbol will move. It pseudo-stops in the lower row, and the 16th "red 7" symbol also pseudo-stops in the middle row. In this way, in the slip table, the number of slips when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the lower stage is set for each symbol number. In the sliding table shown in FIG. 33, the 16th "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R comes to a pseudo stop in the middle row, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44.

FIG. 34 is a slip table that is referred to in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win. In such a sliding table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M pseudo-stops in the middle row, while the 16th "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol will pseudo-stop at the bottom row instead of the middle row.

Returning to the description of the stop position determination process, in step S1105, a pseudo stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo-stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo-stop command and which reel is to be pseudo-stopped. Further, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the pseudo stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby informing the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. In step S1107, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is acquired based on the referenced pseudo game stop information. Thereafter, in step S1108, the acquired number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopping symbol that is actually caused to pseudo-stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and if the pseudo game flag is set, the process is directly ended.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S1010, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S1012, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is being operated, the process remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in the pseudo game, this process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S412, and a transition preparation process is performed to transition to the real game.

In the migration preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, an operation wait timer is set in step S1201 (approximately 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the value of the operation wait timer has become 0. Note that the value of the operation wait timer is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. If the value of the operation wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step S1202. When it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated in step S1202, and when it is determined that the value of the operation wait timer has become 0 in step S1203, a pseudo-game post flag is set in step S1204, and the main processing end.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the transition preparation process is completed, the process returns to step S402 and a rotation start process is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. As described above, when a pseudo game is performed, since the post-pseudo game flag is set in the transition preparation process, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S604, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make the bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor. Further, in step S604, an operation order command indicating the order of operations to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation order command, the display control device 81 displays on the auxiliary display section 65 the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make a bell win possible. Therefore, the operation order is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 a little later than the timing at which the operation order is displayed on the instruction monitor.

If the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604, or if it is determined in step S603 that the push order bell has not been won, the process proceeds to step S605 and the delay time is acquired. The RAM 106 of the main control device 101 is provided with a delay timer for determining the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R that has been pseudo-stopped, and in step S605, a random number is acquired and A value (ie, a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in a delay timer. Note that the value of the delay timer is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. In step S606, the process waits until the value of the delay timer becomes 0, and when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S607 and starts accelerating the reels according to the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S611, and the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S612, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information is set. In step S403 after performing the pseudo game, since the stop information has already been set, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. In step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed. In command transmission processing 1 after playing the pseudo game, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary presentation for the main game shown in FIG. 31(d) and the like.

In step S407, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process proceeds to step S408, and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, in step S804, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell prize is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process ends. Further, in step S804, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. However, after performing the pseudo game, the operation order has already been displayed on the instruction monitor in the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), so the display content on the instruction monitor changes by performing the process of step S804. There's nothing to do. In other words, it can be said that the process of step S804 is a process for displaying the instruction monitor in a game round in which a pseudo game is not performed.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 are the same as described in the reel control process in this game, so the explanation will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

This slot machine 10 has a configuration that allows the pseudo game to be canceled and transferred to the real game. Therefore, such a configuration will be specifically explained below based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether a cancel operation has been performed to end the pseudo game. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has been performed, the process advances to step S1003, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is 3, that is, whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the above-mentioned instruction monitor display process is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo game end command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that the pseudo game has been canceled by receiving the pseudo game end command. Thereafter, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007, and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 30 msec in step S1007 is to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary performance for the pseudo game to the auxiliary performance for the main game.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when the pseudo game is cancelled.

In the notification mode, an image of the young character walking along the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is displayed on the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65. In FIG. 35(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 35(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will remain as they are without pseudo-stopping, as shown in FIG. 35(c). Move on to the main game. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, the notification that the pseudo game is a pseudo game is finished without notifying the result of the pseudo game in detail, whether or not it has been added, and the young character is shown taking a walk on the road. , the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. However, if you have won the additional lottery, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184 and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35(c).

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 3, that is, if the cancel operation is performed in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, the cancel operation is performed. After setting the cancel operation flag indicating that the cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reels. Thereafter, in step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, it means that the remaining one reel is rotating, so the process returns to step S1001, makes an affirmative determination in step S1001, and proceeds to step S1002. . In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag is set. Thereafter, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and a stop position determination process is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter becomes 0, the cancel operation flag is cleared and then the processing from step S1011 onward is performed.

As mentioned above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, the main game will proceed without causing all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to pseudo-stop, If a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the main game is started after all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1901, the above-mentioned end determination process is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S1901, so a section command is sent in step S1908. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current gaming section is an advantageous section, in step S1903, a net increase number updating process is performed to update the value of the net increase number counter. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter, and the number of medal bets (in this embodiment, 3 or 2) is added to the subtraction result. In step S1904, it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the net increase number counter is not 0, the section command is sent in step S1908, and then the process ends. When the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S1905 to S1907 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S1908, and this processing is ended. In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1905, and the section indicator 66 is turned off in step S1906. In step S1907, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Here, the gameplay of this slot machine 10 will be explained.

This slot machine 10 allows two-coin games and three-coin games. However, if you play a two-card game in the normal section, even if you win some combination, you will not move to the advantageous section. In addition, when playing a two-coin game in an advantageous section, if the game mode at that time is the notification mode, even if the push order bell is won, the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated will not be notified. If the game mode is the chance mode, the transfer lottery will not be performed. In addition, in a two-card game, while the mode game number counter that triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, the section game number counter that triggers the transition to the normal zone is updated (end determination processing , see Figure 29). Furthermore, in a two-coin game, the probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1/4.0, and if the BB2 prize is achieved, it is necessary to reduce the number of owned medals by 30 over 30 games. Therefore, when comparing a 2-card game and a 3-card game, the 3-card game is more advantageous for the player.

In a 3-coin game, the probability of winning BB1 is approximately 1/12, and if the BB1 prize is achieved, it is necessary to reduce the number of owned medals by 60 medals over 30 games. However, if a 3-coin game is performed with the BB2 winning flag carried over, an event that results in a winning of BB1 does not occur, and an event that results in a BB2 winning does not occur. Therefore, playing a three-coin game while carrying over the BB2 winning flag is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, below, a description will be given of the gameplay when a three-coin game is performed with the BB2 winning flag carried over.

In the normal section, if you win any winning combination in the 3-card game, it means that you have won the lottery to move to the advantageous section. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/2 of winning some combination, and a probability of about 1/6.4 of winning a winning combination. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in approximately one game.

When shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game starts from the chance mode and 700 is set as the number of transition games (see FIG. 26).

In the chance mode, if you win a rare combination, a lottery will be held to switch to the notification mode. If you win the transition lottery, you will transition from the chance mode to the notification mode. Further, even if the transition lottery is not won, if the 3-coin game is played 700 times under the chance mode, the transition is made to the notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see FIG. 28). In other words, in this slot machine 10, when transitioning from the normal section to the chance mode, 700 times functions as a so-called ceiling number of times. The advantageous section ends when 1,500 games are played and when the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400 regardless of the game mode at that time. When shifting to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling 700 times, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 800 times. In the notification mode, the operation order is always notified when the push order bell is won, so it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 3.5 medals every time one game is played. If it is assumed that the game in the notification mode can be played 800 times, an increase of about 2,700 medals can be expected. Therefore, even if the mode is shifted to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling, it can be expected that the difference in the number of coins will reach 2400 coins and the advantageous period will end before playing the 1500th game.

When shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, 120 is set in the net increase number counter (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won under the notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of net additional coins (see FIG. 30). At this time, if you win the additional lottery based on winning a watermelon, either 30, 50, 100, or 300 will be added, and if you win the additional lottery based on winning a cherry, 10, 20, 30, 50 will be added. Either is added. Then, when the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the notification mode and the advantageous section end and the mode shifts to the normal section (see FIG. 36).

When winning the additional lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is performed in the game. In the pseudo game based on the additional lottery winning, the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, and the number of additional coins to be added to the net increase number counter is announced. Further, even if the player has not won the additional lottery, if the pseudo game lottery has been won, the pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is performed in the game. Pseudo game In a pseudo game based on lottery winning, the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M pseudo stops on the middle line L2, while the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R pseudo stops on the middle line L2. It is reported that the process does not stop and that no addition is made to the net increase number counter. These pseudo games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59. If you operate the settlement switch 59 while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will move directly to the main game without pseudo-stopping, and at least one If the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where the reels are pseudo-stopped, the main game begins after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that if the player wins the additional lottery, a pseudo game is executed. In the pseudo game, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the corresponding reel pseudo stops. Then, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a pseudo stop, the pseudo game ends. By having a configuration that allows execution of such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary performance using the reels, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a pseudo game. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to be able to end the pseudo game if the settlement switch 59 is operated during the execution of the pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players who find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a pseudo game from losing their desire to play when the pseudo game is started. Become.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When a settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the pseudo-stop result of the symbols in the pseudo game cannot be grasped unless the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game. It is possible to encourage them to do so.

When a pseudo game is executed, the main game is executed after the pseudo game ends. By adopting such a configuration, if the pseudo game can be ended as it is without each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo stopping, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will stop at the stage of starting the next game. This makes it possible to avoid occurrence of events that have not occurred. In addition, in such a configuration, when the payment switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is pseudo-stopped or restarted. It becomes possible to proceed to the determination of whether or not a stop command has occurred without causing any problems. Therefore, it is possible to quickly transition from a pseudo game to a real game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game is ended after all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo game without operating the stop switches 42 to 44 during the pseudo game can operate the stop switches 42 to 44 by operating the settlement switch 59. It becomes possible to end the pseudo game without having to do so.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of a pseudo game, the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the situation in which the settlement switch 59 is operated, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, when the payment switch 59 is operated, it is also possible to have a configuration in which all rotating reels are always pseudo-stopped. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that the significance of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo game will be lost. Such concerns become more pronounced in the case of a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the result of stopping symbols in a pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. However, if a configuration is adopted in which the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved.

The system is configured to play a pseudo game when winning the additional lottery. With this configuration, it becomes possible to use the pseudo game as a game to notify that the number of coins will increase, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the pseudo game, if the combination of "Red 7" symbols pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, it was announced that the net increase in number of coins would increase, and the combination of "Red 7" symbols did not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2. In this case, the configuration is such that the net increase in the number of sheets is not notified. With this configuration, players who wish to receive notification of an increase in the number of net added coins are urged to operate the stop switches 42 to 44, while allowing players who do not need to receive notification of an increase in the number of net added coins to operate the settlement switch 59. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the result of stopping the symbols in the pseudo game does not directly contribute to the increase in the number of coins. In the main game, you cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts unless you win a prize, but in the pseudo game, the net increase in the number of coins has already been determined by the additional lottery, so the combination of "Red 7" symbols Even if the player does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, the player will not be disadvantaged. If the combination of "Red 7" symbols does not come to a pseudo stop on the middle line L2, an increase in the net number of coins will not be notified. In this way, by making the simulated game unrelated to the player's direct profits, it becomes possible to position the simulated game as one of the productions in which the player can actively participate, and the operation of the settlement switch 59 This makes it possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, making it possible to improve the player's enjoyment of the game.

If the player wins the additional lottery, a pseudo game is played in the game. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a pseudo game is played in a game different from the game won in the additional lottery. However, with such a configuration, if the player forgets that he won a rare combination in a game before the pseudo-game starts, the player may recognize the pseudo-game as a so-called fake game. There is a concern that the stop switches 42 to 44 may not be operated while aiming for the "Red 7" symbol. In addition, if the player wins a rare combination in the final game of the notification mode and the notification mode ends without winning the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the player may suspect that the additional lottery itself was not performed. There are also concerns. On the other hand, if the game is configured to perform a pseudo game in which the player wins the supplementary lottery, the flow of the game will be from the pseudo game to the real game, and the above concerns can be appropriately resolved. be.

Even if the player does not win the additional lottery, the pseudo game is played if he wins the pseudo game lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the net increase in the number of coins and an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the net increase in the number of coins in the pseudo game, and it is possible to improve gaming interest. .

When playing a pseudo game, the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the player from erroneously assuming that one game has ended when the pseudo game ends. In addition, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R transition from a pseudo game to a real game without stopping, the player will not be able to tell whether it is a pseudo game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

When performing a pseudo game in a game in which a push order bell is won, the system is configured to notify the operation order that can establish a bell prize after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the above-mentioned order of operation in a pseudo game. Further, the above-mentioned operation order is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are brought to a pseudo-stop, but before acceleration of the reels that have been pseudo-stopped is started. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the situation where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the above-mentioned operation order in this game, and it becomes impossible to establish a bell win.

In a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the system is configured such that the operation sequence that can make a bell win is announced after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach a constant speed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the above-mentioned operation order in the main game different between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, the configuration ensures that the above-mentioned operation order is notified before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective, and the notification timing of the above-mentioned operation order in the main game is varied depending on whether or not a pseudo game is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo game ends, a delay time is set based on random numbers obtained for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and after waiting for the delay time, acceleration of the reels is started. With this configuration, it is possible to shift the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when transitioning to the main game, and in the pseudo game, the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is on the middle line L2. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, it is possible to create a state in which the "red 7" symbols are not lined up even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the stop result of the pseudo-game from becoming an aid to the subsequent actual game.

A configuration in which, when notifying the order of operations that can make a bell win, in addition to notifying on the auxiliary display section 65 controlled by the display control device 81, the notification is made on the instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101. And so. Since the main controller 101 determines whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, with this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated before notifying the above operation order. It is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event that determines whether the

The configuration is such that when the settlement switch 59 is operated, it is determined that a pseudo game cancellation operation has been performed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will unintentionally perform a cancel operation. For example, if the start lever 41 is operated after the start of the pseudo game, it may be determined that a cancel operation has been performed. However, with such a configuration, if the player repeatedly presses the start lever 41 when generating a start command, the second and subsequent operations of the start lever 41 are determined to be cancel operations, and the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo game. This is because an event may occur in which the pseudo game ends despite this.

When a pseudo game is executed, the stop information for the main game is set after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which stop information for the main game is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the main game.

The pseudo game stop information is configured to be set after a pseudo stop command is generated. With this configuration, even if the stop information is set during the execution of a pseudo game, the time required to determine whether a pseudo stop command has occurred in a pseudo game can be shortened. It becomes possible to aim for.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the pseudo-gaming stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, there is a possibility that the period from when the pseudo-stop command is generated to when the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped may be extended. is possible. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win, the "Red 7" symbol of number 16 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed in the middle row, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. In the case of a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win, the "Red 7" symbol number 16 on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M pseudo stops in the middle row, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. The 16th "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R is configured to pseudo-stop at the bottom row instead of the middle row. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the stop result of the symbols in the pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to set the stop information for the pseudo game after the pseudo stop command is generated. However, it is possible to prevent the period from when a pseudo-stop command is generated until the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped from being prolonged.

In the pseudo-game, a pseudo-stop is made after the player slides a maximum of 19 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. With this configuration, it is possible to secure the time to set the pseudo game stop information after the pseudo stop command is generated, the time to determine the reel stop position based on the pseudo game stop information, etc. Become. Furthermore, in this game, the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after a stop command is issued, so it is difficult to set stop information after a stop command is issued, and It is necessary to set stop information before determining whether a command has occurred. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, since the above-mentioned restrictions are not provided, it is possible to secure each of the above-mentioned times by configuring a pseudo-stop after sliding for a maximum of 19 symbols.

(Second embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the number of additional coins is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of additional coins may be notified in the main game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S2001, a repetition counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that the driving control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S2002. When the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S2005, and a stop information setting process for setting stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of the determination of the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S2007, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S2008, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process advances to step S2009 and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2101 whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, in step S2103 the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process is ended. Further, in step S2103, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S2010, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, stop control processing is performed in step S2011, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S2201, it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been issued, the system waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command is issued, the process advances to step 2202, and a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, in step S2301, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S2303, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. Further, in step S2303, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby notifying the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S2304, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S2304, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S2305, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S2306, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been issued to at least one reel, the stop position determination process is ended after the stop information change process is performed in step S2307. When the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, when a stop command is issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is ended without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S2203, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S2201. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command has been generated is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been generated has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing a brake process. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S2205, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S2206, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S2207, and an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing an additional notification effect to notify the number of additional sheets will be explained.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed at the start stage of a game round.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if it has not been received, the process is immediately terminated. If the lottery result command is received, the process advances to step S2402, and it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this process is immediately terminated, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, the process is immediately ended, and if the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S2404 and a performance execution lottery is performed. In the performance execution lottery, a success or failure determination is made based on the type of the winning rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the production execution lottery, if you win a watermelon, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/10, and if you win a cherry, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/2. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the performance execution lottery has been won. If the performance execution lottery is won, the performance flag is set in step S2406, and the present process ends. If the performance execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S2407, and it is determined whether the add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when winning the add-on lottery, and is sent before the lottery result command when winning the add-on lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the player has won the add-on lottery in the current game round. In such a case, the effect flag is set in step S2406, and the present process is ended. If no additional command has been received, this process is immediately terminated. Note that, when the display control device 81 receives the top-up command, it stores the number of top-up sheets indicated by the top-up command in the top-up sheet number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the performance execution process performed during the execution of the present game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated. If the effect flag is set, it means that an additional notification effect is to be executed, so the process advances to step S2502 and it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If the stop command is not received, the system waits until the stop command is received, and if the stop command is received, the value of the stop operation counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set in step S2503. Add 1. In step S2504, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3. If it has not become 3, in step S2505, a notification sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Then, the process returns to step S2502. When the value of the stop operation number counter becomes 3, additional notification processing is performed in step S2506, and then this processing ends.

In the add-on notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, it is determined in step S2601 whether the add-on command has been received, that is, whether or not the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. If it is the game time in which the bonus lottery is won, the process waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2602. When the all reel stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2603, and a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2604, the process waits until an operation end command is received. If the operation end command is received, the process advances to step S2605, and the number of additional tickets won in the additional lottery is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and the present process ends.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the add-on command has not been received, that is, if the player has not won the add-on lottery in the current game round, the process advances to step S2608, and a notification is sent to determine whether or not to output a notification sound. A sound execution lottery will be held. In the notification sound execution lottery, the display control device 81 performs a determination of success or failure based on the acquired random numbers. Incidentally, the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is approximately one-third. In step S2609, it is determined whether the notification sound execution lottery has been won. If the notification sound execution lottery is won, the process waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2610. When the all reel stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2611, and a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and the present process ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, and the production flag is cleared in step S2607. This process ends.

Here, the effect of the additional notification effect will be explained.

The additional notification performance is performed when the additional lottery is won and when the performance execution lottery is won.

If the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs a first notification sound (for example, a "do" sound), and outputs two notification sounds. When receiving a stop command based on generation of an eye stop command, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. When a stop command based on the third stop command is received, a third notification is sent after receiving an all reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position. After receiving an operation end command that outputs a sound (for example, the sound of "mi") and indicates that all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the number of additional tickets won in the additional lottery is subsidized. It is displayed on the display section 65.

If the display control device 81 has not won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs a first notification sound (for example, a "do" sound), and outputs two notification sounds. When receiving a stop command based on generation of an eye stop command, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. When a stop command based on the third stop command is received, if the notification sound execution lottery is won, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are at the stop position, indicating that all reels have stopped. After receiving the command, a third notification sound (e.g. "mi" sound) is output, and if you do not win the notification sound execution lottery, after receiving the all reel stop completion command, the third notification sound (e.g. "mi" sound) is output. Do not output the “mi” sound).

As mentioned above, in the additional notification performance, if you win the additional lottery, the flow is the first notification sound output → second notification sound output → third notification sound output → notification of the number of additional tickets, and you win the additional lottery. If not, the flow will be first notification sound output → second notification sound output → third notification sound output, or first notification sound output → second notification sound output. Here, for example, in the case of setting 3, the probability of winning the additional lottery is about 1/5 if a watermelon is won, and about 1/3 if a cherry is won. The probability of winning the performance execution lottery is about 1/10 if the watermelon is a winner, and about 1/2 if the cherry is a winner. Therefore, in the case of winning a watermelon, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification effect is started, the expectation level of being notified of the number of additional pieces becomes an effect exceeding 66%. In the case of a cherry win, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification effect is started, the expectation level of being notified of the number of additional tickets becomes an effect exceeding 40%. Since the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is approximately 1/3, when the third notification sound output is output, the expectation level of being notified of the additional number of tickets increases even more than the above percentage. becomes. Since the third notification sound is output after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, the player must continue to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command to his or her heart's content. It can be terminated after

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the stop control process, when the stop symbol number of the reel where the stop command has occurred is determined, regardless of whether the reel where the stop command has occurred has actually stopped, it is determined whether the next stop command has occurred in step S2201. The configuration is configured to determine whether or not the With this configuration, the player can operate other stop switches without waiting for the reels corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, by increasing the operability of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, for example, the next game round can be started even when the reels have not stopped. New problems such as storage may arise. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol numbers of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined, a standby process is performed in which the player waits for 100 msec. With this configuration, it is possible to stop the swinging of the reel while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration is configured to perform the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Indeed, when it is determined that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, before determining whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has become the stop symbol number, that is, step S2203. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed during step S2204. However, in the case of such a configuration, the waiting time in the standby process is not only the time for the swinging of the reels to converge, but also the time required for the symbol number of the symbol reached by the reel to become the stopped symbol number (i.e. It is also necessary to consider reel slippage time. In this slot machine 10, since it is possible to slide a maximum of four symbols, it is necessary to secure about 179 msec (=1.49 x 24 x 5) as a standby time in addition to the time for the swinging of the reels to converge. If the reels stop when the number of slides is less than 3 symbols instead of 4 symbols, the waiting time of approximately 36 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 1) or more becomes wasted time, and the game is delayed. This may lead to On the other hand, if the standby process is performed after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, each of the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved. Become.

The configuration is such that the standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after it is determined that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. By adopting such a configuration, even if the configuration performs standby processing, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started, and the next game round can be started. It becomes possible to improve the operability when For example, if the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number without providing the process S2206 for determining whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed after the determination. However, in such a configuration, the timing at which the player finishes operating all the stop switches 42 to 44 may be after the end of the standby process or during the standby process. This is because the time required until it becomes possible to start the next game round will change. If the time required to start the next game round changes, an event may occur in which, for example, even if the player performs a medal insertion operation to start the next game round, the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability when starting the next game round is reduced.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec was configured to be performed before the medal payout process. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which a bonus such as a medal payout is given in a situation where the swinging of the reels has not stopped. Furthermore, by configuring the standby process to be performed before the payout determination process performed in the medal payout process, the processing configuration is prevented from becoming complicated, and the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process is increased. becomes possible. For example, if it is determined in the payout determination process that a minor win has been achieved, the standby process is not performed or a standby process is performed in which the player waits for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, and the minor win is established in the payout determination process. If it is determined that there is not, it is also possible to perform a standby process of waiting for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, the waiting time changes depending on whether medals are paid out or not, so it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being extended. However, in such a configuration, the processing configuration becomes complicated, and when the above processing program is applied to another slot machine that has a different number of medals paid out when winning a small prize, it is necessary to change the processing time appropriately. This is because, as a result, versatility is reduced.

In a configuration in which a push order bell is provided as a lottery winning combination, and the player is advantageous when operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, stop commands can be issued continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. The structure is as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will unintentionally make a mistake in the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, in a configuration in which it is advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the player may unintentionally make a mistake in the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Such an event may occur even though the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, for example, when the reel corresponding to the first stop command is not stopped, the stop switch that should be operated second is This is because the stop switch that was operated third was judged to be the operation of the second stop command, and the operation was not recognized as valid.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is configured to be performed after the operation order is hidden if it is being displayed on the instruction monitor. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly finish the notification of the operation order by the instruction monitor, and to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. This is because the waiting time in the standby process can be shortened by the time required for the processes in step S2208 and step S2209.

If the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, for example, when the operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, for example, the second stop command is New problems may arise, such as the reel corresponding to the command not stopping, or the operation of at least one stop switch not being completed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If the above-mentioned problem occurs, a problem will arise in the control performed on the display control device 81 side. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the main controller 101 side determines the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. Then, when the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop symbol number, an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81, and all the stop switches 42 to 44 are The display controller 81 is configured to send an operation end command to the display control device 81 when the display controller 81 is in an unoperated state. With this configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control according to the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all reel stop completion command, and the display control device 81 can perform control according to the stoppage of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by receiving the all reel stop completion command. By receiving the information, it becomes possible to perform control in accordance with the completion of operations of all the stop switches 42 to 44. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

The main control device 101 is configured to transmit an operation end command after transmitting an all reel stop completion command. With this configuration, the display control device 81 performs control in response to the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and then performs control in response to the completion of the operations of all the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to perform control. Furthermore, the maximum time required from determining the stop position of the reel where a stop command has been issued until the reel actually reaches the stop position is approximately 179 msec in order to slide a maximum of 4 symbols, which is determined by the main controller 101 side. I can understand it. On the other hand, the time required until all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated depends on the player's operations, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main control device 101. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the operation end command is sent after the all reel stop completion command is sent, for example, the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and the display control device 81 is It becomes possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing at which control is performed based on reception.

If it is determined that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number, all stop switches 42 to 44 are reset before determining whether or not they are in an unoperated state. It was configured to send a reel stop completion command. With this configuration, the gap that occurs between the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and the timing at which the display control device 81 performs control based on reception of the all reel stop completion command is reduced. becomes possible. Further, when it is determined that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, an operation end command is sent before determining whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the gap between the timing when all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on reception of the operation termination command. becomes possible.

The additional notification effect is configured to proceed when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and when all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, and the additional notification effect is displayed by the display control device. 81 is controlled. In this configuration, depending on which occurs first: all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, or all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. There is a concern that one may not be able to execute one. In order to eliminate such concerns, for example, when one of the following occurs: all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, or all stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, a third notification sound is emitted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one outputs one and performs an additional notification when the other occurs. However, in such a configuration, the command type received from the main control device 101 and the processing content to be executed no longer correspond, so the processing configuration related to the additional notification effect becomes complicated and the storage capacity increases. A new problem may arise.

On the other hand, the main controller 101 transmits an all reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, and also indicates that the operations of all stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed. By having a configuration that transmits the operation end command, the display control device 81 can grasp that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all reel stop completion command, and can recognize that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the operation end command. Through this, it can be known that the operations of all stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed. Furthermore, since the main control device 101 transmits the operation end command after transmitting the all reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 controls to output the third notification sound based on reception of the all reel stop completion command. control to execute the additional notification based on the subsequent reception of the operation end command. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

In the additional notification performance, the third notification sound is output from the speaker 64 based on the reception of the all reel stop completion command, and the additional notification is executed on the auxiliary display part 65 based on the reception of the operation end command. In this way, by configuring the device that executes the effect based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command and the device that executes the effect based on the reception of the operation end command to be different, the all reels stop completion command Even if the interval between receiving the command and receiving the operation end command is short, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound.

(Third embodiment)

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, for example, a command for a pseudo game and a command for a real game are prepared separately, and commands are sent to the display control device 81 according to the presence or absence of the pseudo game flag. However, this configuration will be changed. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo game flag storage area provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. The pseudo game flag storage area consists of 1 byte. In each bit of the pseudo game flag storage area, the most significant 7th bit and the 5th to 0th bits are blank, and the 6th bit functions as a pseudo game flag storage bit. . The main control device 101 sets the 6th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "1" when setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), and when clearing the pseudo game flag (step S611, (see FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0". Therefore, when the bits in the pseudo game flag storage area are arranged from the high-order side and the numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number is converted into hexadecimal, it becomes 40H (01000000) when the pseudo game flag is set, When the pseudo game flag is not set, it becomes 00H (00000000).

Next, command transmission processing 1 in this embodiment will be explained. The command transmission process 1 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S406, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a rotation start command or a pseudo game rotation start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701.

Here, the configuration of the command will be briefly explained. A command is composed of a header indicating the command type, a body indicating specific contents, and a footer indicating that the information is the last information of the command. The header consists of 1 byte, as shown in FIG. 44(b). The function of each bit of the header is as follows. The seventh bit, which is the most significant bit, has a function as a header identification bit, and "1" is always stored therein. The 6th bit has a function as a pseudo game identification bit indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game, the 5th bit is blank, and the 4th to 0th bits indicate the command type. It functions as a command type storage bit. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, that is, 10000110, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 in advance.

When the rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701, the process advances to step S2702, and the pseudo game determination information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area also has a function as pseudo game determination information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 becomes C6H (11000110), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S2702 is 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2705, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and the process ends. In addition, in command transmission process 1, since body information is not set in the rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command), the header and footer indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command) are It is transmitted to the display control device 81.

Next, command transmission processing 2 in this embodiment will be explained. The command transmission process 2 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S409, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a stoppable command or a pseudo-stoppable command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, stoppable header information is acquired in step S2801. The stoppable header information is 87H, that is, 10000111, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 in advance. In step S2802, pseudo game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to 87H, which is the stoppable header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 becomes C7H (11000111), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2805, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is sent to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and the process ends. In addition, in command sending process 2, since body information is not set for the stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command), display control is performed to display a header and footer indicating that the stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command) is a stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command). It is transmitted to the device 81.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop position determination process. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and a pseudo stop command or a stop command is sent to the display control device 81 according to the determination result. It was sent (see Figure 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, but regardless of the determination result, the pseudo stop command or the stop command is not executed in step S2905. In order to send the command, command sending processing 3 is performed.

In command transmission processing 3, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, stop header information is acquired in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, that is, 10001000, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 in advance. In step S3002, pseudo game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to 88H, which is the stop header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 becomes C8H (11001000), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and the process ends. In the command transmission process 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel where the stop command or pseudo-stop command has been generated is transmitted as body information. More specifically, when the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as body information, and when the reel is the middle reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as the body information, and when the reel is the right reel 32R. In this case, 03H is transmitted as body information. This body information is stored in advance in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101. As a result of the above, in command transmission processing 3, the stop command (pseudo stop command) includes a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating a stop reel (pseudo stop reel), and a footer. It is transmitted to the display control device 81.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that different commands are sent in the case of a pseudo game and the case of a real game. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the display control device 81 to grasp whether the game is a pseudo game or a real game.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the display control device 81 to control auxiliary effects, etc. according to the pseudo game and the main game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the commands to be sent in the case of a pseudo game and the commands to be sent in the case of the real game are stored in the ROM 105 in advance, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. It will be done. In addition, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a pseudo game when sending a command, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase due to the addition of the aforementioned determination process, and that the processing configuration will become more complex. That will happen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in command transmission processing 1, etc., header information such as rotation start header information and information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area are added, and the information is sent to the display control device 81. The configuration is such that a header is created. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance the header to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. Further, in such a configuration, since the created header includes information on whether or not it is a pseudo game, there is no need for a process to determine whether or not it is a pseudo game. Therefore, by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data.

The header includes information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. That is, as a configuration for making the display control device 81 understand whether or not it is a pseudo game, it is possible to transmit 00H or 40H in the body instead of the header, for example, instead of performing calculations as in this embodiment. It is. However, in such a configuration, the number of commands to be transmitted increases by one byte, resulting in redundant commands.

The header is provided with a header identification bit, a pseudo game identification bit, and a command type storage bit, and the header is configured to fit in one byte. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header while suppressing commands from becoming redundant.

In the header, the pseudo game identification bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game in a bit that would not be used in the past, and the command sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 becomes possible. This makes it possible to suitably suppress redundancy. In addition, by creating header information by adding pseudo game determination information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game in the header without changing the conventional header configuration. becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of steps required to develop the slot machine 10.

The pseudo game flag storage area is composed of 1 byte, which is the same byte as the header, and the bits other than the 6th bit are blank. With this configuration, when adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, it is possible to avoid changes in the values of other bits such as the command type storage bit.

The header is created using information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area. With this configuration, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area has the function of information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and the function of information used when creating a header. It becomes possible to give . As a result, there is no need to provide a storage area in the RAM 106 for storing the pseudo game determination information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that a pseudo game is performed, but a configuration may be adopted in which only the main game is performed without performing a pseudo game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and to the left of the medal input slot 45, a production switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided. The effect switch 67 is operated when a press effect to be described later is executed and when a menu screen is called up in a situation where no game is being played, and the word "PUSH" is displayed on the top surface of the effect switch 67. ing. The selection switch 68 is made up of four switches: an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch that specify the up, down, left, and right directions, and is used to select desired information from various information displayed on the menu screen. Be manipulated. The production switch 67 (more specifically, the production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are as shown in FIG. , and is connected to a display control device 81 .

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S3101, a repetition counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that the driving control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S3102. When the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S3105, and a stop information setting process for setting stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of determining the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S3107, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S3108, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process advances to step S3109 and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, it is determined in step S3201 whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, in step S3203, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process ends. Further, in step S3203, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S3110, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, stop control processing is performed in step S3111, and the present processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, in step S3301, it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been issued, the system waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command is issued, the process advances to step 3302, and a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S3403, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. Furthermore, in step S3403, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby informing the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S3404, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S3404, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S3405, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S3406, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been issued to at least one reel, stop information change processing is performed in step S3407, and then stop position determination processing is ended. When the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, when a stop command is issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is ended without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S3303, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel on which the stop command has occurred is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S3301 regardless of whether the reel on which the stop command has occurred has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing a brake process. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S3305, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S3306, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S3307, and an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Next, among the various processes performed by the display control device 81, processes related to the present invention will be described. To briefly explain the processing configuration of the display control device 81, the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. Timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is performed approximately every 10 msec. Further, the display control device 81 receives various commands such as a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 to understand the progress of the game, etc., and starts corresponding processing.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not an operation end command has been received, and if the operation end command has not been received, the process is directly ended. On the other hand, when the operation end command is received, it means that all the stop switches 42 to 44 have not been operated, that is, the operation that generates the stop command for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed. do. In such a case, the process advances to step S3502, and a standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 18,000. Note that the value of the standby timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. The start waiting process is a process performed in the main process, and is executed based on receiving the operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S3603, and it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the production switch 67 has not been operated, the process advances to step S3604, and it is determined whether the value of the standby timer has become 0 or not. If the value of the standby timer is not 0, the process advances to step S3605, and it is determined whether the number of bets is 0 or not. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the main controller 101 sends a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control device 81 in the medal insertion process performed when medals are inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 are operated. Send to. The display control device 81 determines whether the bet number is 0 based on the bet number indicated by the received bet number command or the fact that the bet number command is not received. If the bet number is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, selection menu execution processing is performed. In this slot machine 10, the following selection menus are displayed on the menu screen: game history, payout table, volume adjustment, clear game history, and menu exit. In the selection menu execution process, when the selection switch 68 is operated, the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68 is highlighted, and when the production switch 67 is operated, the highlighted selection menu is displayed. Perform the processing to be performed. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 was operated in a situation where menu termination was selected, that is, whether or not the menu termination operation was performed. If the menu termination operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S3704, and it is determined whether the number of bets is 0 or not. If the number of bets is 0, the process returns to step S3702 and continues the selection menu execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that a menu termination operation has been performed, menu termination processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and the like displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 are hidden, and the normal screen is displayed. In the following step S3706, the standby timer is set to 18000. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. Further, if it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, this means that the player performed an operation to start the next game round (bet of medals or virtual medals) while the menu screen, etc. was displayed. . In such a case, the process advances to step S3707, and the above-described menu termination process is performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3901 of start command waiting processing, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the standby timer has become 0, the standby process is performed in step S3607.

In the waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, a customer waiting effect is started in step S3801. In the customer waiting performance, a predetermined demo movie (attract performance) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, instead of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, it may be configured to shift to the power saving mode and display on the auxiliary display section 65 that power is being saved. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65 is lowered and the mode is shifted to the power saving mode without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the production switch 67 is not operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether the number of bets is 0 or not, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is ended in step S3804, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3805. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3701 of menu processing. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect is ended in step S3806, and 18000 is set in the waiting timer in step S3807. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3901 of start command waiting processing, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, a start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start command waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, it is determined in step S3901 whether a start command has been received. Note that the start command is a command sent from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81, and is sent when it is determined that a start command has occurred in step S206 of the normal process (see FIG. 11). be done. If the start command has not been received, it is determined in step S3902 whether the number of bets is 0 or not, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, the standby timer is set to 18000 in step S3903, and the process moves to step S3603 of start waiting processing. Note that a typical example of a situation where the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when the player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that a start instruction command has been received, this means that the game round has started, so the process moves to in-game processing in step S3904. A detailed explanation of the in-game process will be omitted, but in the in-game process, for example, if the push order bell is won in the notification mode, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the order of operations that can make the bell win. etc.

As described above, the display control device 81 displays the menu screen on the auxiliary display section 65 when the production switch 67 is operated in a situation where no game is being played, and when the value of the standby timer becomes 0, Start waiting for customers.

In this slot machine 10, when winning the top-up lottery under the notification mode, after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, a press performance is performed to make the player operate the performance switch 67, and the number of top-up coins is notified. Therefore, below, a process performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a press effect will be explained.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed in the above-described in-game process. The performance determination process is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if it has not been received, the process is immediately terminated. If the lottery result command is received, the process advances to step S4002, and it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this process is immediately terminated, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, this process is immediately ended, and if the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S4004 and a performance execution lottery is performed. In the performance execution lottery, a success or failure determination is made based on the type of the winning rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the production execution lottery, if you win a watermelon, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/10, and if you win a cherry, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/2. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not the performance execution lottery has been won. When winning the performance execution lottery, a performance flag is set in step S4006, and the present process is ended. If the performance execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S4007, and it is determined whether the add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when winning the add-on lottery, and is sent before the lottery result command when winning the add-on lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the player has won the add-on lottery in the current game round. In such a case, the effect flag is set in step S4006, and the present process is ended. If no additional command has been received, this process is immediately terminated. Note that, when the display control device 81 receives the top-up command, it stores the number of top-up sheets indicated by the top-up command in the top-up sheet number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

When all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 sends an operation end command to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives the operation end command, it determines that the effect flag is set in step S3303 of the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the production switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and a push-down display for prompting the player to operate the production switch 67 is started. In the following step S3305, a first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1000. Note that the value of the first timer is subtracted by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. When the first timer is set to 1000, the operation end command processing is ended.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, if the effect flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 and a press effect process is performed in step S3602.

In the press effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated, and if the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process remains on standby. If the effect switch 67 is operated, the process advances to step S4102 and a result flag is set. Here, the result flag is a flag to start displaying the result, which notifies you of the number of additional coins if you have won the additional lottery, and informs you that no additional coins will be awarded if you have not won the additional lottery.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the result display process performed in the timer interrupt process of the display control device 81.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, the result flag is cleared in step S4202, and the displaying flag is set in step S4203. In step S4204, a display counter provided in the RAM of display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on auxiliary display section 65. Note that the ROM of the display control device 81 stores in advance result display image data to be executed when the player has won the additional lottery, and result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery has not been won. There is. The result display image data is composed of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200, and in step S4205, the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is acquired, and the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is acquired. The associated image data is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. When the image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag is not set, the process advances to step S4206, and it is determined whether the displaying flag is set. If both the result flag and the displaying flag are not set, this means that the result is not being displayed, and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the displaying flag is set, it means that the result display is being executed, so 1 is added to the value of the display counter in step S4207, and the value of the display counter is added in step S4208. An image corresponding to the image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether the value of the display counter has reached 200 or not, and if the value of the display counter has not reached 200, this process is directly terminated. When the value of the display counter reaches 200, it means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, that is, the result display has been executed to the end, so in step S4210, the displaying flag is cleared and , a completion flag is set in step S4211. In step S4212, a second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 300. Note that the value of the second timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer becomes 0 after approximately 3 seconds. When the second timer is set to 300, the result display process ends.

As described above, when the result flag is set in the press effect processing, the result display processing is started in the timer interrupt processing approximately every 10 msec, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. Note that when the result display is executed to the end, the final image data of the result display image data continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the transition is made to any of the above-mentioned menu processing, standby processing, and start command waiting processing. (See Figure 56).

Returning to the explanation of the press effect processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer has become 0, and if the value of the first timer has not become 0, the value of the first timer is 0. Wait until . When the value of the first timer becomes 0, it means that about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the press display. In this case, the process advances to step S4104, and it is determined whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is set, it means that the result display has been executed to the end, so the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and the main processing is continued. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag is not set, this means that the result display is in progress, so the process advances to step S4107 and waits until the value of the second timer becomes 0. More specifically, in step S4107, the process waits until the value of the display counter becomes 20 and the value of the second timer becomes 0. If the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and the process ends.

Here, the subsequent flow when the press-down display is performed will be specifically explained.

When the press-down display is performed, the press-down display continues on the auxiliary display section 65 until the production switch 67 is operated. Then, when the effect switch 67 is operated in a situation where the press-down display is being performed, the result display is started. It takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end.

Here, if the production switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the press display, the result display will be finished until approximately 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the press display. can be executed up to. Therefore, in such a case, since the completion flag is also set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, it is necessary to immediately end the press effect process and move to step S3603 of the start waiting process. Become. At this time, the value of the second timer is not referenced. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the press-down display, the menu screen will be displayed approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press-down display. The operation of the production switch 67 (hereinafter also referred to as "menu start operation") becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated between about 8 seconds and about 10 seconds after starting the press-down display, the timing will be about 10 seconds after the start of the press-down display in the middle of the result display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the value of the second timer becomes 0. I will do it. In other words, if the production switch 67 is operated between about 8 seconds and about 10 seconds after the start of the press display, the production switch 67 will be operated after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display was executed to the end. The menu start operation becomes effective approximately 5 seconds after the operation.

If the production switch 67 is operated after approximately 10 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the press display, the completion flag will not be set at the timing when the first timer value becomes 0 (result display). (has not yet started), the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the result display is executed to the end and the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated after approximately 10 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the press-down display, the effect switch 67 is operated after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display has been executed to the end. After approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, the menu start operation becomes effective.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In conventional slot machines, menu processing is not executed after a game in which an auxiliary effect that proceeds in response to the operation of a effect switch, such as the press effect described above, is executed, that is, the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. There was something. In such a configuration, if a menu screen is to be displayed, it is necessary to continue playing the game until a game in which the press effect is not executed occurs, which is a source of frustration for the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which menu processing is executed even after the game in which the press effect has been executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying the menu screen at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When the press display is started, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the menu starts when the value of the second timer becomes 0 instead of the first timer. The configuration is such that there are cases in which the operation is valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective depending on the start timing of result display, that is, the operation timing of the production switch 67. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will feel frustrated that the menu screen is not displayed even if the player operates the effect switch 67.

Certainly, a configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after the game in which the press effect is executed is also possible, for example, a configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after a certain period of time, such as 3 seconds, has elapsed after the result display has been executed to the end. It is. However, with such a configuration, it is conceivable that the player may feel irritated by having to wait for three seconds. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the menu start operation becomes effective immediately when the result display is executed to the end. However, in such a configuration, the menu may be activated at a timing that the player does not intend. A new problem arises in that there is an opportunity to display the screen. When the result display has been executed to the end, if the player operates the performance switch 67 again in the expectation of further development of a so-called reversal performance, the display content on the auxiliary display section 65 switches from the press performance to the menu screen. This is because

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10 where the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, unless the production switch 67 is operated approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the result will be A grace period can be provided between when the display is executed to the end and when the menu start operation becomes effective. The existence of such a grace period makes it possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a timing not intended by the player. This may lead to irritation of the player who has to wait for the grace period, but the length of the grace period changes depending on the timing of operation of the production switch 67. Therefore, it is possible to have the player operate the production switch 67 while making the player feel inquisitive, wondering if the menu start operation is already valid this time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce player's irritation.

As a result of the above, the present slot machine 10 can suitably eliminate each of the above-mentioned concerns, and reduce the chance that the player will feel frustrated that the menu screen is not displayed even after operating the production switch 67. It becomes possible to do so.

When the value of the first timer becomes 0 and a completion flag indicating that the result display has been executed to the end is set, the menu start operation is enabled. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the menu start operation becoming valid during the display of results.

The configuration is such that the value of the first timer is set to 1000. When the press-down display is started, the time required from the time the player recognizes the press-down display until the player actually operates the production switch 67 is 5 seconds, even if the player operates it after praying that the number of additional coins will be announced. It is assumed that it is generally within the following range. Since it takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end, by setting the first timer value to 1000, there is a chance that the menu screen will be displayed at a timing that the player did not intend. This makes it possible to reduce the In addition, in such a configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the press-down display has started, the menu start operation will become effective after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed. It is possible to encourage users to operate the button while reducing the chance of a delay between the press display and the result display.

The configuration is such that the value of the second timer is set to 300. If the result display has not been executed to the end after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the push-down display, it is possible that the player has not operated the production switch 67 due to, for example, leaving the player's seat. In such a case, by configuring the menu start operation to become effective after approximately 3 seconds have elapsed after the results have been displayed to the end, there is no chance of the menu screen being displayed at a timing that the player did not intend. It becomes possible to reduce the amount.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the notification mode ends based on the number of net additions, but the notification mode may end based on the number of games. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

First, the processing performed by the main control device 101 will be explained.

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the normal section is the same as in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the normal section, if you win any winning combination in the 3-card game, it means that you have won the lottery to move to the advantageous section. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/2 of winning some combination, and a probability of about 1/6.4 of winning. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in approximately one game. When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the game starts from the chance mode and 700 is set as the number of transition games (see FIG. 26).

The processing performed by the main control device 101 in the chance mode is different from the first embodiment in the game section processing.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S4301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S4301, so a section command is sent in step S4311. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a three-copy game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game counter in step S4304, and it is determined in step S4305 whether or not a transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S4306, and the transition flag is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S4308. Change the current game mode flag to the notification flag. In the following step S4309, a transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In such a case, the process advances to step S4307, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S4311. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, a transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S4303 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, a section command is sent in step S4311 without updating the mode game counter, etc., and the process ends. do.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be explained.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S4403, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, the probability is about 1 in 5 that you will win one of the 50, 100, or 300 add-on games, and if you win a cherry, the probability is about 1 in 3. The probability is that you will win 50 additional games. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If the bonus lottery is won, the process advances to step S4405, and a post-notification lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the number of bonus games in a game subsequent to the game. In the post-notification lottery, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. If the post-notification lottery is not won, an add-on flag is set in step S4407, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S4408. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the add-on lottery has been won and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if the post-notification lottery is won, the post-notification command is transmitted in step S4410 without setting the additional flag. Here, the post-notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the post-notification lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. . In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the additional lottery, the process ends immediately. Furthermore, if the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the additional lottery.

As described above, when winning the add-on lottery, the add-on command or the post-notification command is transmitted to the display control device 81. When the add-on flag is set and the add-on command is transmitted, the number of add-on games is notified in the pseudo game as described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). Furthermore, if a post-notification command is sent without setting an additional command, the number of additional games will be notified in a revival performance to be described later. Note that if the pseudo-game lottery is won in a situation where the post-notification command is transmitted (see FIG. 16), the number of additional games will be notified not as a pseudo-game but as a revival effect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S4501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S4501, so a section command is sent in step S4508. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4503, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S4504. Determine whether or not. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S4508, and this processing ends. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S4505, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S4506. In step S4507, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S4509, and it is determined whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is not set, it is determined in step S4510 whether the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50. The remaining number of games in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the remaining number of games in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process advances to step S4511, and it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. If the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, a completion flag is set in step S4512, and 1500 is set in the transition game number counter in step S4513. When 1,500 games are played in the advantageous section and when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. Therefore, if the transition game number counter is set to 1500 in a situation where the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous section and notification mode will end when the difference number of medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400. That will happen. In step S4514, a completion command is sent to the display control device 81, indicating that it has been determined that the process will end with a difference of 2400 sheets. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4508, and the process ends.

When it is determined that the completion flag is set in step S4509, when it is determined that the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 50 or less in step S4510, and when the value of the difference number counter is determined to be 2200 or less in step S4511. If it is determined that this is the case, the section command is sent in step S4508, and then the process ends.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 when the mode is changed from the notification mode (advantageous section) to the chance mode (advantageous section) via the normal section. Therefore, various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be explained below in accordance with the flow of the game.

The process performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the chance mode to the notification mode will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing section command processing in the notification mode. The section command process is a process that is started when a section command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is started after the game ends.

In step S4601, it is determined whether the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game section storage area that stores information about the game section indicated by the section command. The game section storage area is composed of a first area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the current game, and a second area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the previous game. In step S4601, if information indicating chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game is a transition game to notification mode. do. In step S4602, a start flag is set. In step S4603, a display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and in step S4604, a post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Thereafter, transition notification processing is performed in step S4605, and the present processing ends. By performing the transition notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode will start from the next game and that the number of games that can be played under the notification mode is 50 games, as shown in FIG. 73(a). It will be displayed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing start command processing in notification mode. If the main control device 101 determines that a start command has been generated (step S206, see FIG. 11), it transmits the start command to the display control device 81. The start command process is a process that is started when a start command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is started when the game starts.

In step S4701, it is determined whether the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, it means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode, so the start flag is cleared in step S4702, and the value of the display game number counter is cleared in step S4703. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By performing this process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a scene where the young character is taking a walk on the road and that there are 50 games remaining in the notification mode, as shown in FIG. 73(b). be done. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the control for notifying the order of operations when the push order bell is won is performed in the lottery result command process that is activated when the lottery result command is received (step S310, FIG. 12 reference).

Next, a description will be given of the processing that the display control device 81 performs when the completion command is not received in the notification mode.

In the section command processing that is started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 and a completion command is received. Determine whether or not. If the completion command has not been received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the displayed game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined in step S4611 whether the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1. If the value of the displayed game number counter is not 1, it is determined in step S4613 whether the value of the displayed game number counter has become 0, and if the value of the displayed game number counter is not 0, In this case, the process ends immediately.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1, this means that the next game will be the last game in the notification mode, at least for the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, an end flag is set in step S4612, and the process ends.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the displayed game number counter has become 0, it means that the player has won the post-notification lottery in any of the games until the value of the displayed game number counter becomes 0. do. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode is finished, the main control device 101 transmits a section command indicating that the mode is a normal section instead of a section command indicating that the mode is a notification mode (see FIG. 65). In such a case, a revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the post-notification game number counter is set in the display game number counter in step S4615. Note that, when a post-notification command indicating that the post-notification lottery has been won is received, the number of additional games indicated by the post-notification command is added to the post-notification game number counter. Thereafter, in step S4616, the post-notification game number counter is set to 0, and the process ends.

In the start command processing that is activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the end flag is set. Determine. If the end flag is not set, the process advances to step S4707, and it is determined whether the restoration flag is set. If the revival flag is not set, the process advances to step S4710, and it is determined whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the display game counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4712, and the process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of remaining games subtracted by 1 each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game is the last game in the notification mode, at least for the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, and an end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4706, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the notification mode has ended and that the number of medals acquired at the present time (e.g., 800), that is, the difference from the end of the previous game. The number of sheets and is displayed. Note that the lottery result command will be received after receiving the start command, but if a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won is received, in addition to displaying the end screen, the bell prize will be established. The order of possible operations is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. For example, when receiving a lottery result command indicating that the middle left and right bells have been won, as shown in FIG. 73(d), in addition to ending the notification mode and the current number of medals acquired The operation order “213” is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag is set, it means that the player has won the post-notification lottery, that is, there is an unannounced number of additional games. In such a case, the resurrection flag is cleared in step S4708, and a resurrection effect process is performed in step S4709, and this process ends. By performing the revival effect processing, the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the notification mode continues without ending and the number of additional games won in the later notification lottery (for example, 50 games), as shown in FIG. 73(e). ) are displayed, and then the normal screen under the notification mode shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, if a completion command is not received under the notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of the game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display section 65 becomes 0. If the player wins the post-notification lottery, a revival effect is performed at the start of the next game after displaying the end screen to notify the continuation of the notification mode.

Next, a process performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command processing that is started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 and a completion command is received. Determine whether or not. When a completion command is received, it means that it has been determined that the process will end with a difference of 2400 sheets. In such a case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and 1500 is set in the display game counter in step S4608. Thereafter, ending notification processing is performed in step S4609, and the present processing ends. By performing the ending notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the ending video will start from the next game.

In the section command processing in the game after receiving the completion command, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined in step S4611 whether the value of the display game number counter has become 1. do. As described above, in the section command processing when the completion command is received, the display game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4608. Therefore, in the section command processing in the game after receiving the completion command, it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the display game number counter is not 1. For the same reason, in step S4613 proceeding from step S4611, it is determined that the value of the displayed game number counter is not 0, and this processing is ended.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, it is determined in step S4710 whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, the process is ended after the ending execution process is performed in step S4711. In the ending execution process, a process of displaying a predetermined ending video on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed.

As described above, when it is determined that the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets is 2400, a predetermined ending video is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the next game until the notification mode and advantageous section end.

The process performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the notification mode to the normal section will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether the current game is a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it is determined whether information indicating the notification mode is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and information indicating the normal section is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the normal section, the process advances to step S4802, and a continuous game counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. After that, this process ends. If the current game is not a transition game to the normal section, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in step S4803, and the process ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, it is determined in step S4901 whether the ending flag is set. When the ending flag is set, it means that a predetermined ending video is displayed in the notification mode. In such a case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and a process of displaying an end screen on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed in step S4903. Thereafter, a continuation flag is set in step S4904, and the process ends. By performing the above processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode ends and the number of medals acquired at the time of ending the notification mode.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag is not set, the process advances to step S4905, and it is determined whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is not set, the continuation flag is set in step S4906, and then the process advances to step S4907; if the continuation flag is set, the process directly advances to step S4907. In step S4907, processing is performed to continue displaying the end screen. After that, this process ends. Note that in step S4907, the process of changing and displaying the number of acquired medals is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends when the number of sheets differs by 2400, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the first game of the normal section until the end of the normal section. When the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is used up, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the last game in the notification mode until the end of the normal section.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the normal section. The lottery result command process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not any winning combination has been won in the current game. If you win any winning combination in the current game, this means that you have won the lottery to shift to chance mode, that is, you will shift to chance mode from the next game, so this process ends as is. On the other hand, if no winning combination has been won in the current game, that is, if the normal section continues in the next game, the process advances to step S5002, and it is determined whether the value of the number of continued games counter is smaller than 6. . If the value of the continuous game number counter is smaller than 6, a suggested gem selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggested jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting state of the slot machine 10 and the random numbers acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the suggestion jewel selection lottery, in the case of setting 1 or setting 2, blue jewels are selected 40% of the time, yellow jewels are selected 30% of the time, green jewels are selected 20% of the time, and 10% of the time the blue jewels are selected. Select red jewels at a rate of %. For setting 3 or setting 4, 20% of the time blue jewels are selected, 30% of the time yellow jewels are selected, 30% of the time green jewels are selected, and 20% of the time red jewels are selected. do. For setting 5 or setting 6, 10% of the time blue jewels are selected, 20% of the time yellow jewels are selected, 30% of the time green jewels are selected, and 40% of the time red jewels are selected. do. Note that the selection rate may be configured to be different for each setting of settings 1 to 6. In step S5004, processing is performed to display the selection results of the suggested jewel selection lottery on the auxiliary display section 65. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the number of consecutive games counter is 6 or more, the process advances to step S5005, and a process of displaying the confirmed jewel in which the setting state of the slot machine 10 is written on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed. conduct. After that, this process ends. For example, when processing is performed to display confirmed orbs in the slot machine 10 with setting 6, the end screen and the orb marked 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 73(f). Is displayed.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the all reel stop completion command processing in the normal section. The all reel stop completion command process is a process that is activated when an all reel stop completion command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the end stage of the game.

In the all reel stop completion command process, the suggested or confirmed jewel displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5101, and the process ends.

As mentioned above, in the normal section, if you do not shift to chance mode, the suggestion gem will be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop in the 1st to 5th games, and from the 6th game onwards. If so, the confirmed jewel is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. Here, the probability of not shifting to chance mode, that is, the probability of failure occurring, is approximately 1/6.4. Therefore, a player who wants to guess the setting based on the appearance status of suggested gems or a player who wants to understand the setting status from the confirmed gem needs to play games so that the number of games played in the normal section increases.

Next, a description will be given of the processing that the display control device 81 performs when transitioning from the normal section to the chance mode.

In the section command processing started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a transition game to chance mode. More specifically, it is determined whether information indicating the normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and information indicating the chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the chance mode, the process advances to step S4802, and a continuous game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. After that, this process ends. If the current game is not a transition game to the chance mode, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in step S4803, and the process ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, it is determined in step S5201 whether a continuation flag is set. When the continuation flag is set, it means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5203. Thereafter, in step S5204, the value of the continuous game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the young character walking in the distance on the road and the number of games in the chance mode, as shown in FIG. 73(g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, a process is performed to display the value of the continuation game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S5205, and this process ends. By performing such processing, the number of games is displayed incremented by 1 each time a game is played on the auxiliary display section 65.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game after the game in which the difference number reaches 2400, that is, the first game of the normal section, and the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is exhausted. In this case, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. In this way, by varying the games in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. becomes.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends when the difference in number of sheets reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in number of sheets reaches 2400. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games in a situation where the notification mode has not ended. It is certainly possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the next game when the difference in number of sheets is 2394 or more. However, in the case of such a configuration, in the case where the push order bell is not won, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated in the notified operation order despite winning the push order bell, etc. Even though the end screen is displayed, an event occurs in which the difference number of sheets does not reach 2400 and the notification mode does not end. If the above event occurs, the end screen will continue to be displayed until the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends.

When the remaining number of games is greater than 50 and the difference number is greater than 2200, the value of the transition game number counter is changed so that the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game from various viewpoints.

First, if the advantageous section is simply configured to end when the differential number of sheets reaches 2400, some players may think that if the advantageous section (notification mode) actually reaches the differential number of 2400 sheets and ends, the upper limit Some players think that they could have won even more medals if there was no limit on the number of medals, and this reduces their desire to play. This is because it is rare for the difference in the number of coins to reach 2400 at the timing when the number of remaining games reaches 0. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference number of coins is greater than 2200, the player is instructed to play games in the notification mode with the aim of reaching the difference number of coins 2200. It becomes possible to perform the following. In addition, the expected increase in medals per game in notification mode is approximately 3.5 medals, so if the number of remaining games is 57 or less and the difference in number of medals is greater than 2200, you can win the additional lottery. It becomes equal to that. This is because the expected value of the number of games required to increase the number of medals by 200 is 58. As a result of the above, even in the case of a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of differential coins in advantageous sections, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's desire to play, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing. It becomes possible.

Next, when ending the notification mode with the difference in the number of sheets as a condition, the end time of the notification mode will vary depending on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., as described above. For this reason, in a configuration in which the condition for ending the notification mode is defined by the number of games, it is difficult to execute the ending effect over a plurality of games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference number of coins is greater than 2200, it is possible to notify in advance that the notification mode will end when the difference number reaches 2400. It can be confirmed. Therefore, the number of games from when the value of the transition game number counter is changed until the difference number reaches 2400 can be secured as the number of games for displaying the ending video. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the ending effect in a suitable manner. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous section can be completed through the ending performance, and it is also possible to make the player play the game while feeling a sense of superiority until the difference in number of sheets actually reaches 2400. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the ending effect is executed, the end screen is displayed in the first game of the normal section, so the player can enjoy the ending effect until the next game starts, and can also enjoy the ending effect while immersing himself in the afterglow. You can play the next game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends after the number of transition games is exhausted, the configuration is such that an end screen is displayed in the last game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is exhausted, the final game in the notification mode will not be shifted due to the lottery result of the winning combination or the like. Therefore, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games even though the notification mode has not ended.

In the case of winning the post-notification lottery, a revival effect is performed in the next game after displaying the end screen, and the number of additional games is notified. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start lever 41 in order to generate a command to start the next game while expecting the notification mode to continue, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to aim for.

Here, let us consider a case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the end of the informing mode, similar to the case where the informing mode ends when the number of sheets differs by 2400. In such a configuration, since the game section of the game that displayed the end screen is already the normal section, even if a rare combination is won in the game, an additional lottery will not be held, and the event that the notification mode will be restored is prevented. (See FIGS. 25 and 26). On the other hand, in this slot machine 10 where the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, since the game is in the notification mode, if you win a rare combination, you can carry out an additional lottery and a post-notification lottery to perform a revival effect. . Therefore, it becomes possible to carry out a revival effect in a suitable manner, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends after the number of transition games is exhausted, the configuration is such that an end screen is displayed at the start of the last game in the notification mode. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. Then, after the end screen is displayed to the player in the final game of the notification mode, it is possible to notify that the notification mode will continue by means of a revival effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction that the notification mode continues. It is certainly possible to display the end screen after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to perform a revival effect. However, it is common for players to play games continuously, and in the notification mode where virtual medals are stored and stored, there is no need to directly insert medals, so the game interval is generally shorter. It is true. For this reason, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, there is a possibility that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen, and the revival effect may cause the player to start the next game without checking the end screen. Events such as realizing that the previous game was the last game in the notification mode may occur. This not only leads to the end screen that has been prepared so painstakingly rendered useless, but also leads to a loss of satisfaction with the continuation of the notification mode. On the other hand, the present slot machine 10 that displays the end screen at the start of the final game can suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

In the first game of the normal section, the end screen was displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to let the player play the first game in the normal section while immersing himself in the afterglow of the notification mode. In addition, in such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed across two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous period and that a revival effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide new gameplay using the conventionally prepared end screen, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which a lottery for transition to the notification mode is not performed in the normal section, a player may decide to play in the chance mode rather than in the normal section, and enter the normal section. There were concerns that people would avoid playing the slot machines they were staying at. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous period and that no revival effect will be performed. In such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, the player who played the game under the notification mode issues a command to start the next game in the hope that a revival effect will occur. That will happen. Therefore, if the advantageous period has ended, it becomes possible for the player who played the game under the notification mode to play the first game of the normal period. Even if the player ends the game at such timing, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, it is possible to make another player different from the above-mentioned player start playing the second game in the normal section while expecting that a revival effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from avoiding playing a game at the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

The end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects performed in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the game shifts from the normal section to the chance mode, and the system is configured so that the chance of winning is only about 1 in 6.4. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the probability of shifting to chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting, it is possible to reduce the number of games that stay in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is displayed continuously for a long period of time, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player ends the game while the end screen is displayed.

As described above, even if the configuration is such that the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, an event may occur in which the vehicle stays in the normal zone without transitioning from the normal zone to chance mode. If the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is a concern that the game in the normal section will become monotonous. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to display the suggested jewel or the confirmed jewel if the mode does not shift from the normal section to the chance mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the user think of making a setting guess based on the appearance status of the suggested gem, or to make the user think that the normal section should continue until the confirmed gem is displayed. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the slot machine 10 while staying in the normal section, but also to prevent the games in the normal section from becoming monotonous. becomes possible.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, the displayed suggested or confirmed jewels are hidden. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to configure the suggested orbs and confirmed orbs to be confirmed only by actually playing the game, and it is possible to have a player who wants to guess the settings play the game in the normal section. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine 10 from decreasing due to the normal section.

From the 6th game onwards in the normal section, a confirmed jewel in which the setting status of the slot machine 10 is written is displayed. With this configuration, even if the game does not shift from the normal section to the chance mode, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play. This is because if the setting status can be ascertained through the confirmed jewels, it will be a major factor in determining whether or not to continue playing the game.

When the game shifts to chance mode, the number of games played in chance mode is displayed. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the maximum number of games required before transitioning to the notification mode, the number of remaining games that can be played in the advantageous section, etc., and it becomes possible to increase the player's desire to play. . On the other hand, since the number of games played in the normal section is unrelated to the number of games played in the advantageous section and chance mode, if the above number of games is displayed after the end of the advantageous section, for example, the number of games played in the "-G" As such, you will have to display the number of games that will not be updated until you switch to chance mode. This leads to the player thinking that playing in the normal section is meaningless and reducing his or her desire to play. However, in a configuration such as this slot machine 10 that continuously displays the end screen for each game in the normal section, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the display of the number of games in the chance mode, which reduces the visual discomfort. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

When displaying the end screen, it is configured to display the fact that the notification mode ends and the current number of medals acquired. When the end screen is continuously displayed, that is, when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the number of acquired medals being displayed is not changed. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed in the normal section, it is possible to accurately notify the number of medals won by the player in the advantageous section. Further, since there is no need for processing to update the number of acquired medals displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Sixth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, a bell prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Although the winning probabilities of the bells in the order of pressing are set so that the probabilities are equal, the winning probabilities of the bells in the order of pushing may be set so that the probability of winning a bell differs depending on the stop switch 42 to 44 operated first. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R.

Symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, the 17th on the left reel 32L), " "White Star" symbol (for example, 16th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), "Blue Star" symbol (for example, 12th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol ( For example, the 11th symbol on the left reel 32L), the "White 7" symbol (for example, the 7th symbol on the left reel 32L), the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L), the "Red Star" symbol (for example, the left There are 10 types of reels (2nd reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 74, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three horizontally parallel lines and two diagonally crosswise lines, connecting each position where these nine symbols are visible. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the middle symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are used as horizontal combination lines. A connected middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. In addition, as a diagonal combination line, there is a line L4 that connects the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. Symbols and a line L5 rising to the right connecting the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R are set. If the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the active line, the prize is recognized as winning, and the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as gaming media is given, or the gaming state is changed. Benefits are now being granted.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 75(b), only the upward-sloping line L5 is set as a valid line. The four combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, lower line L3, and right-down line L4 are not set as valid lines.

FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams showing the correspondence between the names of conditional devices, combinations of symbols that result in winnings, and benefits that are awarded when winnings occur.

There is a BB as a conditional device that provides a privilege to move to a gaming state when a winning is achieved.

When the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a BB win is achieved. If a BB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

There are re-gaming 1 to re-gaming 11 as conditional devices that provide re-gaming benefits when a winning is achieved.

To explain some winning modes, for example, the "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Red Star" symbol, or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, When the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, a replay 1 prize is awarded. When the replay 1 winning is established, the "replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R become stopped on the middle line L2.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the replay will result in a 7-win, and the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right If any of the "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Red Star" symbol, or "Blue Star" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line, the replay will result in an 8-win prize. If a re-game 8 win is established, the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be stopped on the line L4 descending to the right. That is, in this embodiment, when the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on any combination line, a replay benefit is awarded instead of a medal payout benefit.

Either the "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Red Star" symbol, or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R have stopped on the active line. , the "White 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "Red Star" symbol, or "Blue Star" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R are on the active line. If the game stops at , the player will replay the game and win 9 prizes. If the “Replay” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “White 7” symbol or “Cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, replay 10 It will be a prize. When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, a replay 11 prize is obtained. In this embodiment, the stop rolls when re-game 9 winnings to re-gaming 11 winnings are established become chance rolls.

There are small winnings 1 to 32 as conditional devices that give the privilege of paying out medals when a winning is achieved.

Small winning combination 1 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the upper line L1 when a winning is achieved. The small winning combination 2 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the line L4 descending to the right when a winning is achieved. The small winning combination 3 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the middle line L2 when a winning is achieved. The small winning combination 4 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R move upward to the right and stop on the line L4 when a winning is achieved. The small winning combination 5 is a conditional device in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the lower line L3 when a winning is achieved. The small winning combination 6 is a conditional device that causes the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop in a hill shape (lower row, middle row, lower row) when a winning is achieved. If a small winning combination of 1 to 6 is achieved, eight medals are paid out.

Small winnings 7 to 27, small winnings 31, and small winnings 32 function as supplementary winnings in this embodiment, and one medal is paid out when a winning is established.

Small winning combinations 28 to 30 function as cherry winnings in this embodiment, and when a winning is established, three medals are paid out.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a lottery table selected among BB non-internals who have not carried over the BB winning flag of "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. In addition, in addition to the correspondence between the winning combination, the index value IV, and the point value PV, FIG. The winning combination number and the group number, which will be described later, are also listed.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is possible to start the game only with a three-card game, and when the lottery table shown in FIG. 79 is used to determine the validity of the winning combination, the winning probability of each winning combination is The results are as follows. The probability of winning the first replay is approximately 1/9.1, the probability of winning the second replay is approximately 1/94, and the probability of winning the third replay is approximately 1/6600. The probability of winning the first watermelon is approximately 1/160, the probability of winning the second watermelon is approximately 1/200, the probability of winning the first chance is approximately 1/410, and the probability of winning the second chance is approximately 1/200. The probability of winning on the third chance is approximately 1/820. Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle bell The probability of winning left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2 is about 1/33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is about 1/16, respectively. The probability of winning a common bell is approximately 1/54, the probability of winning a strong bell is approximately 1/2200, the probability of winning a 1-card winning combination is approximately 1/260, and the probability of winning a weak cherry. is approximately 1/82, the probability of winning a strong cherry is approximately 1/300, the probability of winning a duplicate BB is approximately 1/4.8, and the probability of winning a single BB is approximately 1/16,000. It is. During the BB non-internal period, no event occurs that results in a win in the internal replay, and no event occurs that results in a loss in which no winning combination occurs.

Although illustration is omitted, the lottery table selected within the BB that carries over the BB winning flag is the lottery table for non-BB inside, the point value PV of the internal replay (IV = 4), and the The point value PV of BB (IV=32) is different. Specifically, 4 is set as the point value PV for internal replay, and 0 is set as the point value PV for single BB. Therefore, within the BB, there is a probability of about 1/16000 of winning in a duplicate replay, and there is no chance of winning in a single BB. Since the winning probabilities of other winning combinations are the same as those during BB non-inside, no winning event occurs even during BB inside.

Here, the relationship between the winning combination result and the reel stop result will be explained.

In this embodiment, a conditional device that constitutes the winning combination and the symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set so that if a winning combination other than single BB is won, some kind of winning will definitely occur. . For example, if the second watermelon is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning of either replay 7 or 8 is established, and the replay benefit is awarded. Similarly, if a strong cherry is won, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the small winning combinations 28 to 30 will be won, and three medals will be paid out. If you win a single BB, the BB symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, the "white star" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red star" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. If you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at a timing that allows you to stop on the upward-rightward line L5, a BB win will be established, and if you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at any other timing, a BB win will be established. The BB winning flag will be carried over without doing so.

In addition, if the main control device 101 has won the BB and the minor prize, the main control device 101 sets and changes the stop information so that the minor prize is established with priority, and if the prize has been won for the BB and the replay, Stop information is set and changed so that replay winnings are established with priority. Therefore, for example, if you win a duplicate BB, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will win any of the small winning combinations 7 to 27, 31, and 32, and you will receive one medal. A payout is made. If you win in the first replay under the conditions inside the BB, regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will win in either replay 1, 2, or 4, and you will not be able to win again. Game benefits will be given. The same applies to the case where you win another prize under the situation inside the BB, and regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the prize of the condition device other than the BB is established and the corresponding benefit is awarded. Granted. As described above, since events that result in a loss do not occur within the BB, in this embodiment, it is not possible to establish a BB win in a game other than the one in which the individual BB is won. In other words, in the first embodiment, the establishment of a BB prize was avoided by playing a 2-card game and making it inside BB2, and then playing a 3-card game, but in this embodiment, the above procedure is It is possible to avoid the establishment of a BB prize without stepping on it.

If you win the left middle right bell 1, if you operate in the order of left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44, you will win 1 small role and pay out 8 medals. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, any of the small winning combinations 7, 10, 15, and 18 will be established and one medal will be paid out. Left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle The same applies to the case where Bell 1, Right Left, Middle Bell 2 is won, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation corresponding to the name of the winning combination, one of the minor winning combinations 1 to 6 is won. If a winning condition device is established and 8 medals are paid out, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, the conditions other than the minor winnings 1 to 6 of the winning condition devices are When the device wins, one medal is paid out. If you win the first special bell, if you operate the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 in the order of operation, you will win 3 small winnings and pay out 8 medals. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation, any of the small winning combinations 7 to 14 and 27 will be established and one medal will be paid out. If you win the second special bell, if you operate the middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 in the order of operation, a small win of 4 will be established and 8 medals will be paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation, any of the small winning combinations 7 to 14 and 27 will be established and one medal will be paid out. If you win the third special bell, if you operate the right stop switch 44 → left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 in the order of operation, a small win of 5 will be established and 8 medals will be paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation, any of the small winning combinations 7 to 10 and 23 to 27 will be established and one medal will be paid out. If you win the 4th special bell, if you operate the right stop switch 44 → middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 in the order of operation, 6 small prizes will be established and 8 medals will be paid out. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation, any of the small winning combinations 7 to 10 and 23 to 27 will be established and one medal will be paid out. In addition, below, left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1. The right middle left bell 2, the right left middle bell 1, the right left middle bell 2, and the first to fourth special bells are collectively referred to as the "push order role" or "push order bell." In addition, small winnings 1 to 6 will result in a stop result in which the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on any combination line or hill shape. For this reason, in the following, the small roles 1 to 6 prizes are collectively referred to as "Bell Prizes."

The game section in this embodiment will be explained.

The game section in this embodiment is comprised of two types of game sections, a normal section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section consists of two types of game modes, a chance mode and a notification mode. (See FIG. 24). However, in this embodiment, the game can only be played with 3 coins, the notification mode ends based on the number of games played under the notification mode rather than the net increase in the number of coins, and the player who wins the push order bell in the notification mode This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the navigation rate for notifying the order of operations that can result in a winning of the bell can be changed. Therefore, various processes performed by the main control device 101 when managing the game section will be explained below with reference to the flowcharts from FIG. 80 onwards. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand, various processes performed by the main control device 101 in each game section will be explained individually.

First, processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5301, it is determined whether a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether any winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S5302, and it is determined whether the winning flag indicates winning a small winning combination or a replay. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the winning combination numbers 1 to 31 (see FIG. 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning flag indicates winning a small winning combination or a replay, a transition flag is set in step S5303, and the section indicator 66 is turned on in step S5304, and this process ends. . If the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag indicates that the player has not won the small winning combination or the replay, that is, if the individual BB is won, the process is immediately terminated.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the normal section. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S5401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that you have won the transition lottery in this game. In such a case, advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S5402 to S5410 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, in step S5402, it is determined whether the first stop command has been issued to the left reel 32L, that is, whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated first. If the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the process advances to step S5403 and the transition flag is cleared. In step S5404, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S5405, the section game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the following step S5406, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S5407, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S5408, the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S5409, the difference sheet number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S5410, and the process ends. Here, the section command refers to various information regarding the game section at the end of the game (i.e., the game section and game mode of the next game, if it is an advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in the game mode) This is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it grasp the number of times, etc.), and in step S5410, it corresponds to the game section flag, the game mode flag, and the values of various counters set in the section information storage area 106d. Send interval command.

If it is determined in step S5402 that not the left stop switch 42 but the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 was operated first, the transition flag is cleared in step S5411. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S5410, and the process ends. That is, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time in the normal section, even if the player wins the transition lottery, the result is invalidated and the game does not shift to the chance mode.

If it is determined in step S5401 that the transition flag is not set, a section command is transmitted in step S5410, and the process ends.

As described above, if a winning combination other than single BB is won in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 79, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", the probability of winning a solo BB while the BB is not inside is about 1/16000. Therefore, the normal section can be completed in approximately one game if the left stop switch 42 is operated first. In addition, if the player is inside the BB, he/she will definitely win a winning combination other than the single BB, so if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the normal section will end in one game.

Next, processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be explained.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5501, it is determined whether the rare combination has been won. In this embodiment, since the first watermelon, second watermelon, first chance, second chance, third chance, strong bell, weak cherry, and strong cherry are set as rare winning combinations, in step S5501, the winning combination It is determined whether any of the numbers 5 to 9, 27, 29, and 30 (see FIG. 79) is stored in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S5502 and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. In step S5503, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery is won, the transition flag is set in step S5504, and then the process is ended; if the transition lottery is not won, the process is ended without setting the transition flag. If the rare combination is not won, the process ends without performing the transition lottery described above.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S5601, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S5602, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S5601, so a section command is sent in step S5611. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S5603, and it is determined whether the left stop switch 42 has been operated first. If the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, 1 is added to the value of the mode game counter in step S5604, and it is determined in step S5605 whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S5606, and the transition flag is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S5608. Change the current game mode flag to notification flag A. In the following step S5609, a transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S5611, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S5605 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process advances to step S5607, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S5611. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag A in step S5608. In the subsequent step S5609, a transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S5610, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S5611, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S5603 that the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 was operated first instead of the left stop switch 42, the transition flag is cleared in step S5612, and then a section command is sent in step S5611. , this process ends.

As described above, from the chance mode, there are three cases: when the left stop switch 42 is operated first to play a game, when the transition lottery is won, and when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter. , shifts to notification mode A. When the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first to play a game, even if the player wins the transfer lottery, the result is invalidated and the notification mode A is not entered. Furthermore, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first to play a game, the value of the mode game number counter is not updated, so the number of games corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter is played. Even if it does, it will not shift to notification mode A.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be explained.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the process advances to step S5702, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S5703, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. In the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if the first watermelon is won, there is a probability of approximately 1/8 that the player will win one of the 10, 30, and 50 add-on games. In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. When winning the add-on lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S5705, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S5706. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the add-on lottery has been won and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S5707, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transfer game number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the bonus lottery, the process ends without setting the bonus flag. If the rare combination has not been won, the process ends without performing the additional lottery.

If it is determined in step S5701 that the push order bell has been won, the process advances to step S5708, and a navigation determination process is performed to determine whether or not to navigate the order of operations that can make the winning of the bell possible. In the navigation determination process, it is determined whether or not navigation is to be executed based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the winning combination. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 85, left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, If you win any of the middle right left bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2, it will be determined that you will navigate at a rate of 33% in notification mode A. do. To be more specific, there are 1980 random numbers that will win each of the above roles (see Figure 79), so 660 random numbers are set as the random numbers that will be determined when navigating, and the remaining 1320. The random number is set as the random number that is determined not to navigate. If any of the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is won, it is determined that navigation will be performed at a rate of 100% in notification mode A. In step S5709, it is determined whether or not to navigate the order of operations that can make a bell win. When navigating, the navigation flag is set in step S5710, and then the process ends. If navigation is not to be performed, a prediction flag is set in step S5711, a prediction command is transmitted in step S5711, and the process ends. Here, the prediction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the order of operations that can make the winning of the bell is not to be navigated.

As described above, in the notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, there are cases in which the order of operations that can make the winning of the bell are navigated and cases in which the order of operations is not navigated. Therefore, the following describes the processing performed by the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 when actually navigating the operation order.

In the rotation start process (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display process (see FIG. 19), the main control device 101 performs a process of displaying on the instruction monitor the order of operations that can make a bell win. At this time, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won (S603, S802) and the instruction monitor is displayed. However, in this embodiment, whether or not the push order bell has been won Instead, it is determined whether or not the navigation flag is set, and if the navigation flag is set, processing is performed to display the instruction monitor.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the winning combination information creation process. The winning combination information creation process is a process for creating winning combination information that indicates the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not, out of the various information that constitutes the lottery result command. The winning combination information creation process is performed after the section lottery process is completed and before the lottery result command is transmitted (see FIG. 12).

In step S5801, it is determined whether the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, the winning combination number is set as winning combination information in step S5802, and the process ends. If the push order bell has been won, the process advances to step S5803, and it is determined whether the navigation flag is set. When the navigation flag is set, it means that the current game mode is the notification mode and it has been decided to navigate the order of operations that will allow the winning of the bell to occur. In such a case, the winning combination number is set as the winning combination information in step S5802, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the navigation flag is not set, the current gaming mode is the normal section or chance mode, or the current gaming mode is the notification mode, but you must navigate the order of operations that will allow you to win the bell. It means that it has been decided. In such a case, the group number is set as winning combination information in step S5804, and the process ends. Specifically, left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left If you have won either Bell 1, Right Middle Left Bell 2, Right Left Middle Bell 1, or Right Left Middle Bell 2, set the group number "1" as the winning combination information, and select the 1st special bell, the 2nd special bell, etc. If any one of the special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell is won, group number "2" is set as winning combination information. When setting a group number, the winning combination number is not set as winning combination information. Therefore, when the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including a group number, it can understand that one of the push order bells corresponding to the group number has been won, but it cannot know which push order bell has been won. I can't figure it out. In addition, in the following, left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right middle left Bell 1, right middle left bell 2, right left middle bell 1, and right left middle bell 2 are also collectively referred to as "push order group 1." Further, the first special bell, the second special bell, the third special bell, and the fourth special bell are also collectively referred to as "push order group 2."

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the operation navigation process performed by the display control device 81. The operation navigation process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S5901, it is determined whether a winning combination number has been received. When the winning combination number is received, it is determined in step S5903 whether or not the winning combination is the push order bell, and if it is not the push order bell, the process is directly terminated. When the winning combination number indicating that the winning combination is the push order bell is received, it means that the main control device 101 side has decided to navigate the order of operations that can make the winning of the bell possible. In such a case, in step S5903, a process is performed to display on the auxiliary display section 65 the order of operations that can establish a bell win, and this process ends.

If it is determined in step S5901 that the winning combination number has not been received, it means that the group number has been received. In such a case, the process advances to step S5904, and it is determined whether the expected command has been received. If the predicted command has not been received, this means that the current game section is the normal section or the chance mode, so the process is immediately terminated. If the predicted command has been received, in step S5905, a process is performed to display "???" on the auxiliary display section 65, and the process ends. By displaying "???" on the auxiliary display section 65, it is possible to notify that the player has won the push order bell, although the order of operations that can make the winning bell possible is not navigated. Moreover, the display of "???" in this embodiment has a function as a promotion suggestion that increases the navigation rate in subsequent games.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a game round in which a pseudo game is performed, the display of the operation order and the display of "???" are performed when the pseudo game ends and the main game starts.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing promotion determination processing performed by the main controller 101. The promotion determination process is a process performed after the reel control process (S212, see FIG. 11) ends, that is, after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

In step S6001, it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode or not, and if the current gaming mode is not the notification mode, the process is directly ended. If the current gaming mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S6002 whether the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6004 after clearing the navigation flag in step S6003, and if the navigation flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step S6004. In step S6004, it is determined whether or not the prediction flag is set, and if the prediction flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

If the prediction flag is set, the prediction flag is cleared in step S6005, and it is determined in step S6006 whether or not a bell win has been established. If a bell win has not been achieved, this process is immediately terminated, and if a bell win has been achieved, a promotion lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the navigation rate in step S6007. In the promotion lottery, the promotion lottery is performed based on the set game mode flag, the set winning flag, and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the winning combination. In step S6008, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery has been won, and if the promotion lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended. If the promotion lottery is won, the process advances to step S6009, and it is determined whether or not the set gaming mode flag is the notification flag A. If the notification flag A is set, the process advances to step S6010, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag B.

By changing the game mode flag to notification flag B, in the subsequent game rounds, as shown in FIG. If you win Group 2, the navigation will be determined 100% of the time.

If it is determined in step S6009 that the notification flag A is not set, the process advances to step S6011, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag C.

By changing the game mode flag to the notification flag C, in the subsequent game rounds, as shown in FIG. 85, if the push order bell is won, navigation will be determined 100% of the time.

If the gaming mode flag is changed in step S6010 or step S6011, a promotion command is sent in step S6012, and the process ends. Here, the promotion command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make the player understand that he or she has won the promotion lottery. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, it executes an effect suggesting that the player has won the promotion lottery. In this embodiment, when notification mode A is used, a daytime image is displayed as a background image, when notification mode B is used, an evening image is displayed as a background image, and when notification mode C is used, a nighttime image is displayed as a background image. is now displayed. When the display control device 81 receives the promotion command, it executes a process of switching to a background image corresponding to the notification mode for the next game and subsequent games.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S6101, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S6102, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that the advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S6101, so a section command is sent in step S6108. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S6103, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S6104. Determine whether or not. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S6108, and then the process ends.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S6105 to S6107 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S6108, and this processing ends. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S6105, and the section indicator 66 is turned off in step S6106. In step S6107, initialization processing is performed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Here, the gameplay of this slot machine 10 will be explained.

Forming press order group 1 Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right The probability of winning the middle left bell 1, the right middle left bell 2, the right left middle bell 1, and the right left middle bell 2 is about 1/33. The probability of winning the first special bell, second special bell, third special bell, and fourth special bell forming press order group 2 is about 1/16, respectively.

Based on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the probability of winning a bell based on the order of pressing the bell is as follows. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right operation order, the winning combinations for winning a bell are left-center-right Bell 1 and left-center-right Bell 2, so the probability of achieving a bell win is approximately 17. It becomes 1/1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left/right middle operation order, the winning combinations that will result in a bell winning are the left/right middle bell 1 and the left/right middle bell 2, so the probability of winning a bell is approximately 1/17. becomes. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle left and right, the winning combinations for winning a bell are middle left and right bells 1, middle left and right bells 2, and the first special bell, so the probability of winning a bell is It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle right and left, the winning combinations for winning a bell are middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, and the second special bell, so the probability of winning a bell is It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operating order of right and left middle, the winning combinations for which a bell prize is established are the right left middle bell 1, the right left middle bell 2, and the third special bell, so the probability of winning a bell is It becomes about 1/8.1. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of right-center-left, the winning combinations for winning a bell are the right-center-left bell 1, the right-center-left bell 2, and the 4th special bell. The probability of establishment is approximately 1/8.1.

As described above, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right middle operation order, that is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the center stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The probability of winning a bell is lower than if you operate it. As a result, the expected value of medal payout per game in the normal section and chance mode is approximately 1.9 medals when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the left-center-right or left-right middle operation order; If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in this order, the number of sheets will be approximately 2.3.

In this configuration, when considering only the expected value of medal payouts per game, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first. However, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time in the normal section, even if the transition lottery is won, the result will be invalidated, and therefore the normal section will not shift to the advantageous section. Further, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time in the chance mode, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated, so the transition from the chance mode to the notification mode does not occur. In addition, when the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated for the first time in the chance mode, the mode game number counter that triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, but the trigger for transition to the normal section is not updated. The interval game number counter is updated. Therefore, when considering the transition between game sections, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first. Therefore, below, the gameplay when the left stop switch 42 is operated first will be explained.

In the normal section, if a winning combination other than single BB is won, the game shifts to the chance mode of the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 79, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", the probability of winning a solo BB while the BB is not inside is about 1/16000. Therefore, the normal section ends in approximately one game. Furthermore, if the winning is within the BB, the winning combination other than the single BB is sure to be won, so the normal section ends in one game.

When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the game starts from the chance mode and 700 is set as the number of transition games (see FIG. 81).

In the chance mode, if you win a rare combination, a lottery will be held to switch to the notification mode. If you win the transition lottery, you will transition from the chance mode to the notification mode. Furthermore, even if the player does not win the transition lottery, if the game is played 700 times under the chance mode, the game transitions to the notification mode (see FIG. 83).

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, 100 is set in the transition game counter (see FIG. 83). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, the game can be played 100 times under the notification mode. Furthermore, when a rare combination is won under the notification mode, an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter (see FIG. 84). Then, when the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the notification mode and the advantageous section end, and the mode shifts to the normal section (see FIG. 89).

The notification mode starts from notification mode A. In notification mode A, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the order of operations that will allow you to win the bell at a rate of 33% if you are in push order group 1, and 100% if you are in push order group 2. The order of operations that can make a bell win is announced (see FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of medal payout per game in notification mode A is approximately 4.4 medals, and in notification mode A, it is possible to expect an increase of approximately 1.4 medals for each game played.

If the operation order is not notified even though the user has won the push order bell under notification mode A, "???" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to notify that the user has won the push order bell (hereinafter referred to as "???"). , also called ``promotion performance''). If it is possible to establish a bell prize in such a game round, a promotion lottery is held. If the player wins the promotion lottery, the notification mode A shifts to the notification mode B (see FIG. 88).

In notification mode B, if you win the push order bell, you will be notified of the order of operations that will allow you to win the bell 66% of the time if you are in push order group 1, and 100% if you are in push order group 2. The order of operations that can make a bell win is announced (see FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of medal payout per game in notification mode B is approximately 5.1 medals, and in notification mode B, an increase of approximately 2.1 medals can be expected for each game played.

If the operating order is not notified even though the push order bell is won under notification mode B, a promotion effect is performed in the same way as notification mode A. If it is possible to establish a bell prize in such a game round, a promotion lottery is held. If the promotion lottery is won, the notification mode B shifts to the notification mode C (see FIG. 88).

In the notification mode C, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that can make the bell win 100% of the time is notified (see FIG. 85). As a result, the expected value of medals paid out per game in notification mode C is approximately 5.8 medals, and in notification mode C, it can be expected that an increase of approximately 2.8 medals will be obtained each time one game is played.

As described above, in the notification mode, the expected value of medal payout per game changes depending on which of the notification modes A to C the player is staying in. Therefore, when a player who expects to win more medals enters the notification mode, he or she must win a rare role to increase the number of games played, and at the same time win a bell in a game with a promotion effect. be.

Here, as mentioned above, the winning probability of the push-order bell that can make a bell win with the left-center-right or left-center operation order is the same as the probability of winning the push-order bell that can make a bell win with other operation orders. lower than the probability of winning. Therefore, in a game where a promotion effect is performed, it is possible that the probability of winning a bell will be higher if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, as shown in FIG. 79, in push order group 1, the same point value PV is set for the six operation orders, so the probability of winning for each operation order is equal. The reason why the winning probability of the push order bell that can be achieved with a left-center-right or left-center operation order is low is due to the push order group 2, which can achieve a bell win with other operation orders. be. In the notification mode A and the notification mode B, if the push order group 2 is won, the order of operations that can make a bell win 100% of the time is notified. Therefore, in a game in which a promotion effect is performed, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A configuration in which the winning probability of a push-order bell that can establish a bell prize with the left-center-right or left-center operation order is lower than the winning probability of a press-order bell that can establish a bell win with other operation orders. And so. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the probability of winning a bell depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in a configuration where the probability of winning a bell differs depending on the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, there is a concern that there may be a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10. In a situation where the operation order is not notified, a player who knows the above fact operates the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 first, and a player who does not know the above fact operates the left stop switch 42 first. This is because it is assumed that there will be a difference in the probability of winning a bell prize.

Therefore, in this slot machine 10, in notification mode A and notification mode B, if a bell is won in the order of pressing that allows a bell to be won in the operating order of middle left/right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left, The system is configured to notify the order of operations more frequently than when winning the push-order bell that allows you to win a bell prize with the right, left, or middle operation order. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the bell in the order of pressing in the former case and the winning probability of the bell in the latter order of pushing in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, and the probability of winning the bell in the order of pressing can be reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the difference in establishment frequency. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10, and it is possible to allow players to enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In notification mode A and notification mode B, when a push order bell is won, whether or not to notify the operation order is determined so that the frequency of winning a bell does not differ depending on the operation order in a situation where the operation order is not notified. did. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference in profits between players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10, and it is possible to allow players to enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

In addition to the center and left bells, a first special bell is provided as a winning combination that can establish a bell prize by operating the center and left bells in the order of operations. Similarly, a second special bell was provided in addition to the center right, left and right bells, a third special bell was provided in addition to the right, left and center bells, and a fourth special bell was provided in addition to the right, center and left bells. With this configuration, the frequency of winning a bell in the case where the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the case where the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first is determined by the first to fourth special This can be changed depending on the winning probability of Bell. As a result, it is possible to relatively easily realize a configuration in which the frequency of winning a bell differs depending on the order of operations.

Among the bells in order of pressing, left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left middle bell 1, left right middle bell 2, middle left and right bell 1, middle left and right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2, right left middle Bell 1, right left middle bell 2, right middle left bell 1, right middle left bell 2 form push order group 1, and the first special bell, middle right left bell, which can make a bell winning in the middle left and right operation order. 2nd special bell that can make a bell win with the order of operations, 3rd special bell that can make a bell win with the order of right, middle left operations, and a bell win with the order of right middle left operations. Push order group 2 was formed by the fourth special bell. In the notification mode, the frequency at which it is decided to notify the operation order is different depending on whether the push order group 1 is selected or the push order group 2 is selected. With this configuration, in the notification mode, it is possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether to notify the operation order. As a result, it is possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, a notification mode in which the operation order is notified and the operation order is not notified when the push order bell is won.

Indeed, there are six types of bells to press in order: left middle right bell, left right middle bell, middle left and right bell, middle right left bell, right left middle bell, right middle left bell, and the winning probability of left middle right bell and left right middle bell. is configured to be lower than the middle left and right bells, middle right left bell, right left middle bell, and right middle left bell, and even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in any order in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the bell will not be activated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which navigation determination processing is performed so that the probability of winning a prize is equal. However, in such a configuration, the lower limit of the navigation rate is restricted by the point value PV of the left middle right bell and the left middle bell. A detailed example will be explained later in (78), but if we take the point value in group 1 in Figure 79 as an example, the upper limit of the number of values to be determined as not navigating is set at 3960 (=1980 x 2). It is. Therefore, in the above configuration, it is necessary to set the actual navigation rate and point value PV after considering both the navigation rate that you want to set and the winning probability of each role mentioned above, which requires a large amount of development man-hours through trial and error. There are concerns that it may become a thing. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in which control is performed according to the group when deciding whether or not to notify the operation order, if the winning probability of each winning combination belonging to group 1 is set to be equal or almost equal, the navigation rate can be set arbitrarily. Can be set to . Therefore, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved, and a notification mode in which the operation order is notified and the operation order is not notified when the push order bell is won can be implemented with a relatively simple configuration. It becomes possible to realize this.

In the notification mode, the operation order is notified with a predetermined probability when the push order group 1 is selected, and the operation order is always notified when the push order group 2 is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparity among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the present slot machine 10, and also to notify the operation order when the push order bell is won, and to notify the operation order in some cases and not to inform the operation order. It becomes possible to provide a certain notification mode depending on the case.

The winning probabilities of winning combinations belonging to push order group 1 were made equal. With such a configuration, the push order group 2 is responsible for increasing the winning probability of the push order bell that allows you to win a bell in the order of operations of middle left/right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. be able to. By configuring the configuration to always notify the operation order when the push order group 2 is selected, if the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in any operation order, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning a bell is the same.

In notification mode A, notification mode B, and notification mode C having different navigation rates, the navigation rates are different when the push order group 1 is won, but the navigation rates when the push order group 2 is won are the same. With this configuration, it is possible to change the navigation rate while avoiding a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10.

When the operation order is not announced under the notification mode, a promotion effect is performed. With this configuration, even if the order of operations is not notified in the notification mode, it is possible to let the player play the game while expecting the transition to notification mode B or notification mode C, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

The system is configured such that a promotion lottery is performed when a bell prize is achieved in a game round in which a promotion performance is performed. In such a configuration, there will be a difference in the frequency of execution of the promotion lottery and the probability of winning the promotion lottery between a player who knows that the frequency of winning a bell differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the above fact. becomes. This may lead not only to a difference in profits among the players, but also to a decrease in the latter player's desire to play. However, in this slot machine 10, the probability of winning a bell is the same regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, so that the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved.

In the normal section, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the transition will not be made to the advantageous section; in the chance mode, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the transition will be made to the notification mode. The configuration was such that no migration was performed. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the left stop switch 42 first, and to differentiate the increase and decrease of medals between the notification mode and the non-information mode. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When the main control device 101 transmits a lottery result command in a situation where the push order bell is won, if the operation order is to be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as the winning combination information, and if the operation order is not to be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted. Send the group number as role information. If the operation order is not notified in a situation where the push order bell has been won, it is possible to configure the display control device 81 not to know which of the push order bells has been won. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to acquire winning combinations from the display control device 81 side.

A first special bell that can make a bell win with the middle left and right operation order, a second special bell that can make a bell win with the middle right and left operation order, and a bell win with the middle right and left operation order. Push order group 2 was formed by the third special bell that can be used to win the bell, and the fourth special bell that can be used to win a bell in the right-center-left operation order. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress fraudulent attempts to acquire winning combinations from the display control device 81 side. For example, even if only the first special bell is set as push order group 2 and the point value PV of the first special bell is 16720 (=4180 x 2), the left The frequency of winning a bell is different between when the stop switch 42 is operated first and when the middle stop switch 43 or right stop switch 44 is operated first, but the operation order is not notified under the notification mode. In this case, it is possible to equalize the frequency of winning a bell depending on the order of operations. However, in such a configuration, since being in push order group 2 uniquely corresponds to winning the first special bell, the group number rather than the winning combination number is sent to the display control device 81. Even if a person transmits the following message, the fraudulent person will be able to detect that the first special bell has been won. On the other hand, in this embodiment in which push order group 2 is formed by four types of special bells, it is not possible to know which special bell has been won, which reduces the frequency at which fraudsters win bells. It becomes possible to do so. Also, by configuring the winning probabilities of the first to fourth special bells to be equal, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which a fraudster wins a bell.

(Seventh embodiment)

In the first embodiment described above, when a player wins a top-up lottery in the notification mode, the player is notified that he/she has won the top-up lottery in that game. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the winning of the additional lottery is notified after the execution. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S6201, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-coin game, the process advances to step S6202, and it is determined whether a confrontation flag, which will be described later, is set. If the confrontation flag is not set, the process advances to step S6203, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S6204, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. In step S6205, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transfer lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended, and if the transfer lottery has been won, the process advances to step S6206 and a competition game number lottery is performed. In the competition game number lottery, a value of 3 to 5 is obtained based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the winning combination. In step S6207, the transition game number counter is set to the value obtained by the confrontation game number lottery, and in step S6208, the mode game number counter is set to 0. In step S6209, a confrontation flag is set. Thereafter, a confrontation command is transmitted in step S6210, and the process ends. Here, the confrontation command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to execute a confrontation effect, and in step S6210, information including the number of confrontation games obtained in the competition for the number of confrontation games is transmitted.

If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the transition lottery. Furthermore, even if it is determined in step S6202 that the confrontation flag is set, this means that the confrontation game number lottery has been conducted, that is, the transfer lottery has been won, and the process ends immediately. do.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S6301, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S6302, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that the advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S6301, so a section command is sent in step S6310. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S6303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a 3-card game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S6304, and it is determined in step S6305 whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. judge. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S6310. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the confrontation flag is cleared in step S6306, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is cleared in step S6307. Change to notification flag. In the subsequent step S6308, a transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S6309, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S6310, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S6303 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, a section command is sent in step S6310 without updating the mode game number counter, and the process ends. do.

As described above, if the transition lottery is won in the chance mode, the game shifts to the notification mode after three games have been played the number of times (any of 3 to 5) obtained in the confrontation game number lottery. In addition, if you do not win the transition lottery in chance mode, the transition game number counter is set to 700 when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section (S1406, see Figure 26), so 700 times 3 When a game is played, the mode shifts to the notification mode.

In this embodiment, if you win the transition lottery in the chance mode, the confrontation effect will be performed while the 3-card game is played for the number of times acquired in the confrontation game number lottery (hereinafter also referred to as the "number of confrontation games"). It is becoming more and more popular. The confrontation performance is a performance in which the main character of the present slot machine 10 and an enemy character have a predetermined confrontation, and is a performance in which the main character wins and is notified of benefits such as transition to notification mode. . Below, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the confrontation effect under the chance mode will be explained.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in chance mode. The confrontation command process is a process activated when a confrontation command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S6401, it is determined whether a defeat flag, which will be described later, is set. If the defeat flag is set, the process advances to step S6403 after clearing the defeat flag in step S6402, and if the defeat flag is not set, the process directly advances to step S6403. In step S6403, a victory flag is set. In step S6404, the number of showdown games indicated by the showdown command is set in the announced game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S6405, a production game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. After that, this process ends.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in chance mode. The lottery result command process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game. In a game round in which both the confrontation command and the lottery result command are received, the confrontation command is received before the lottery result command is received, so the lottery result command processing is started after the confrontation command processing is completed. Become.

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game, and if it is not a 3-coin game but a 2-coin game, the process is directly ended. If it is a 3-coin game, it is determined in step S6502 whether or not a win flag is set. If the victory flag is set, it means that the confrontation command has been received, so the process ends after the confrontation effect processing is performed in step S6503.

In the showdown performance process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, 1 is added to the value of the performance game number counter in step S6601. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the production game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announced game number counter, the process advances to step S6603, starts a corresponding effect according to the value of the effect game number counter, and ends this process. The ROM of the display control device 81 contains video data for the start of the showdown for the first game, video data for the middle of the showdown for when the second game and subsequent games cannot be resolved, and video data for the victory performance in which the main character wins. and video data for rendering a defeat in which the main character is defeated are stored in advance. In step S6603, if the value of the production game number counter is 1, control is started to output the confrontation production start video data to the auxiliary display section 65, and if the value of the production game number counter is one of 2 to 4. , starts control to output video data during the confrontation performance to the auxiliary display section 65. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the production game number counter matches the value of the announced game number counter, the process advances to step S6604, and it is determined whether a victory flag is set. If the victory flag is set, the process advances to step S6605, and control for outputting video data for victory effect to the auxiliary display section 65 is started, thereby starting the victory effect. Thereafter, the victory flag is cleared in step S6606, and the process ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result command process, if it is determined in step S6502 that the victory flag is not set, it is determined in step S6504 whether or not the defeat flag is set. If the defeat flag is not set, effect determination processing is performed in step S6505, and the present processing ends.

In the performance determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 96, it is determined in step S6701 whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, the present process is immediately terminated, and if the rare combination has been won, a confrontation performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the confrontation performance in step S6702. In the showdown performance lottery, a win/fail determination is made based on the winning combination and random numbers acquired by the display control device 81. In step S6703, it is determined whether or not the competition effect lottery has been won. If the competition effect lottery is not won, the present process is immediately terminated, and if the competition performance lottery is won, the process advances to step S6704 and the competition game number lottery is performed. In the competition game number lottery, a value of 3 to 5 is obtained based on the winning combination and the random number obtained by the display control device 81. In step S6705, the announced game number counter is set to the value obtained from the competition game number lottery, and in step S6706, the effect game number counter is set to 0. In step S6707, a defeat flag is set. Thereafter, in step S6708, the above-described confrontation effect processing is performed, and the present processing ends. In the showdown performance process in step S6708, the value of the performance game number counter is updated to 1, so control is performed to output the showdown performance start video data to the auxiliary display section 65.

As described above, the display control device 81 independently determines whether or not to execute the confrontation effect in a situation where the victory flag is not set, that is, a situation where the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not won. Then, when it is determined to execute a confrontation performance, a defeat flag is set.

If the defeat flag is set, in the lottery result command process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 94, an affirmative determination is made in step S6504, and a confrontation effect process is performed in step S6503.

In the showdown performance process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, 1 is added to the value of the performance game number counter in step S6601. In step S6602, it is determined whether the value of the production game number counter matches the value of the announcement game number counter. If the value of the effect game number counter does not match the value of the announced game number counter, the process advances to step S6603, starts a corresponding effect according to the value of the effect game number counter, and ends this process. If it is determined in step S6602 that the value of the production game number counter matches the value of the announced game number counter, the process advances to step S6604, and it is determined whether a victory flag is set. If the defeat flag is set, the process advances to step S6607, and control is started to output the video data for defeat effect to the auxiliary display section 65, thereby starting the defeat effect. Thereafter, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6608, and the process ends.

When a confrontation command is received in a situation where the defeat flag is set, that is, when a lottery for shifting to the notification mode is won in the middle of the defeat confrontation performance, the confrontation command process shown in FIG. 93 is activated. In the confrontation command process, the defeat flag is cleared in step S6402, and the victory flag is set in step S6403. Then, in step S6404, the number of showdown games indicated by the showdown command is set in the announced game number counter, and in step S6405, 0 is set in the effect game number counter. As a result, on the auxiliary display section 65, the defeat showdown performance ends midway, and the victory showdown performance starts from the beginning.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S6801, it is determined whether the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S6802, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S6803, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, there is a probability of about 1 in 5 that you will win one of the additional games of 30, 50, 100, or 300, and if you win a cherry, it will take about 3 minutes. With a probability of 1, the number of additional games will be 10, 20, 30, or 50. In step S6804, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If the player does not win the additional lottery, it is determined in step S6805 whether or not the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the first effect determination process is performed in step S6806, and then the process ends.

In the first effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, in step S6901, a confrontation effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a confrontation effect. In the showdown performance lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. In step S6902, it is determined whether the competition effect lottery has been won. If the competition effect lottery is not won, the present process is immediately terminated, and if the competition performance lottery is won, the process advances to step S6903 and a competition game number lottery is performed. In this competition game number lottery, as in the case of chance mode, one of 3 to 5 will be selected based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the winning combination. Get the value. In step S6904, the value obtained by the number of confrontation games lottery is set in the number of confrontation games counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S6905, it is determined whether the number of missing games is greater than zero. More specifically, the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the mode game number counter is subtracted from the value of the transition game number counter to derive the number of remaining games in the notification mode. The reason why the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the mode game number counter is subtracted is because the mode game number counter is updated in the game section processing after the end of the game. This is because the counter is not updated. When the remaining number of games in the notification mode is derived, the remaining number of games in the notification mode is subtracted from the value obtained in the competition game number lottery to derive the insufficient number of games. Therefore, when the number of missing games becomes greater than 0, it means that if the confrontation performance is performed as it is, the notification mode will end in the middle of the confrontation performance. Therefore, in such a case, the missing number of games is added to the value of the transfer game number counter in step S6906, and the process proceeds to step S6907. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, this means that the showdown effect can be executed to the end under the notification mode, so the process proceeds to step S6907 without changing the value of the transition game number counter. In step S6907, a production flag is set in the section information storage area 106d. Thereafter, a confrontation command is sent in step S6908, and the process ends. In the notification mode, as a confrontation command, information including the number of confrontation games obtained in the confrontation game number lottery and the number of additional games acquired in the additional lottery is transmitted. Note that since the first performance determination process is a process performed when the bonus lottery is not won, in step S6908, the number of confrontation games includes any value from 3 to 5, and the number of bonus games includes 0. Submit information.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, if it is determined in step S6805 that the effect flag is set, this means that a confrontation effect is being executed, so the main effect is directly executed without performing the first effect determination process. Finish the process.

If it is determined in step S6804 that the bonus lottery has been won, the process ends after performing a second effect determination process that determines a method for notifying the number of bonus games.

In the second effect determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99, it is determined in step S7001 whether or not the effect flag is set. If the performance flag is not set, a confrontation performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute a confrontation performance in step S7002. In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the competition effect lottery has been won.

If the competition performance lottery is won, the process advances to step S7004 and a competition game number lottery is performed. In this competition game number lottery, as in the case of the first performance determination process, one of 3 to 5 is selected based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the role. Get the value of More specifically, in the chance mode, the first performance determination process, and the second performance determination process, the same lottery table is used to determine the number of confrontation games. In step S7005, the value obtained in the confrontation game number lottery is set in the confrontation game number counter. In step S7006, it is determined whether the number of missing games is greater than zero. If the number of missing games is greater than 0, it means that if the showdown effect is performed as is, a part of the additional number of games will be used up under the showdown effect. Therefore, in such a case, the missing number of games is added to the value of the transfer game number counter in step S7007, and the process advances to step S7008. On the other hand, if the number of missing games is 0 or less, it means that it is possible to execute the showdown to the end without using up a part of the number of additional games, so the value of the transition game number counter should be changed. The process proceeds to step S7008 instead. In step S7008, a production flag is set in the section information storage area 106d, and in step S7009, a confrontation command is transmitted. Since the second performance determination process is a process to be performed when the bonus lottery is won, in step S7009, the number of confrontation games is any value from 3 to 5, and the number of bonus games is 10, 20, 30, 50, 100. , 300. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S7003 that the competition effect lottery has not been won, an additional flag is set in step S7011 in order to execute the pseudo game described in the first embodiment, and in step S7012 Send an additional command. Then, in step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transfer game number counter. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S7001 that the production flag is set, this means that a confrontation production is being executed, and therefore a confrontation command is transmitted in step S7013. At this time, while the additional lottery was won, the number of confrontation games was not drawn, so the number of confrontation games was 0, and the number of additional games was 10, 20, 30, 50, 100, or 300. Send information containing. In step S7010, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transfer game number counter. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the section lottery process, when the current game is a 2-card game instead of a 3-card game, and when the rare role is not won, the above-mentioned first performance determination process and second performance determination process are performed. This process ends without further processing.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game determination process.

In the pseudo game determination process, it is determined in step S7101 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is directly ended. If the current gaming mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S7102, and it is determined whether the add-on flag is set. If the add-on flag is set, the add-on flag is cleared in step S7103, and the pseudo game flag is set in step S7104, and the process ends. If the add-on flag is not set, it is determined in step S7105 whether or not the effect flag is set. If the performance flag is set, it means that a confrontation performance is being executed, so the process is immediately terminated. If the effect flag is not set, a pseudo game lottery is performed in step S7106 to determine whether or not to perform a pseudo game. In the pseudo game lottery, the winning flag is set and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination is used to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not. In step S7107, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended. If the pseudo game lottery is won, a pseudo game flag is set in step S7104, and the process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, an event in which a pseudo game is performed during a confrontation performance does not occur.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S7201, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S7202, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S7201, so a section command is sent in step S7208. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S7203, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S7204. Determine whether or not. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S7205 to S7207 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S7208, and this processing ends. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S7205, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S7206. In step S7207, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. The initialization process includes a process of initializing information related to the instruction function stored in the section information storage area 106d (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.), and a process of clearing the production flag if it is set. etc.

If it is determined in step S7204 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the value of the confrontation game number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7209, and the value of the confrontation game number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7210. Determine whether the counter value has become 0 or not. When the value of the confrontation game number counter becomes 0, it means that the confrontation performance has ended, so the performance flag is cleared in step S7211. If the performance flag is cleared, or if it is determined in step S7210 that the value of the confrontation game counter is not 0, a section command is transmitted in step S7208, and the process ends.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing the confrontation effect in the notification mode will be explained. As explained in the section lottery process in the notification mode, in the notification mode, whether a winning showdown effect or a losing showdown effect is performed, the main control device 101 determines whether or not to perform the showdown effect. Sending a confrontation command.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing confrontation command processing in the notification mode.

In step S7301, it is determined whether the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is 0. If the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is not 0, it means that the number of confrontation games was drawn in the first performance determination process or the second performance determination process, that is, it has been decided to start the confrontation performance from the current game. means. In such a case, the process advances to step S7302, and the number of showdown games indicated by the showdown command is set in the announced game number counter. In step S7303, it is determined whether the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is 0. If the number of add-on games indicated by the showdown command is not 0, it means that you have won the add-on lottery, so the process advances to step S7304, and the number of add-on games indicated by the showdown command is stored in the notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. Set the number of additional games shown. Thereafter, in step S7305, a victory flag is set, and in step S7306, the effect game number counter is set to 0, and the present process ends.

If it is determined in step S7303 that the number of add-on games indicated by the showdown command is 0, this means that the main control device 101 has decided to start the showdown performance in a situation where no player has won the add-on lottery. In such a case, a defeat flag is set in step S7307, and the effect game number counter is set to 0 in step S7306, and the present process ends.

If it is determined in step S7301 that the number of confrontation games indicated by the confrontation command is 0, this means that the additional lottery was won during the confrontation performance. In such a case, the process advances to step S7308, and the number of additional games indicated by the confrontation command is added to the value of the notification game counter. In the following step S7309, it is determined whether the defeat flag is set. If the defeat flag is set, the defeat flag is cleared in step S7310, the victory flag is set in step S7311, and the process ends. If the victory flag is set instead of the defeat flag, the process ends immediately.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in notification mode.

In step S7401, it is determined whether the victory flag is set. If the victory flag is not set, it is determined in step S7402 whether or not the defeat flag is set. If the victory flag or defeat flag is set, the process advances to step S7403, and the above-described confrontation effect processing is performed. Note that when a victory effect is started in the confrontation effect processing (step S6605, see FIG. 95), after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the value stored in the notification game number counter, that is, the number of additional games, is assisted. Processing to display on the display section 65 is performed. If the confrontation effect processing is performed or if it is determined in step S7402 that the defeat flag is not set, the process advances to step S7404, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, this process is immediately terminated, and if the push order bell has been won, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the order of operations that will allow the bell to be won in step S7405. Control is performed to display the screen, and this process ends. At this time, if a confrontation performance is being performed on the auxiliary display section 65, both the confrontation performance and the order of operations that can establish a bell prize will be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Some recent slot machines notify the user of whether or not they have won an additional lottery through continuous performances that are performed over a plurality of games. In such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to have won the additional lottery over multiple games, but it is also possible to make the player expect to win the additional lottery in a situation where the number of games required to execute the continuous effect cannot be secured. There are concerns that this may not be possible and the game may become monotonous.

Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to derive the missing number of games when it is decided to execute the showdown performance under the notification mode. When the number of missing games is one or more, the number of missing games is added to the value of the transition game number counter, that is, the number of missing games is added to the remaining number of games in the notification mode. With this configuration, it becomes possible to configure the notification mode to not end until the confrontation performance ends, and it becomes possible to execute the confrontation performance even in a situation where the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small. . As a result, even if the number of remaining games in the notification mode is small, it is possible to avoid the game from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Here, in a configuration in which a showdown performance can be executed in a situation where there are only a few remaining games in the notification mode, if the notification mode ends at the same time as the defeat showdown performance ends, for example, there is a possibility that the player will be greatly disappointed. is possible. Some players think that if they had not won the additional lottery, they should have ended the notification mode without performing a confrontation effect, or that they had lost out because they had hoped that they had won the additional lottery. Because there are people who think. However, in the configuration in which the number of missing games is added to the remaining number of games in the notification mode, the number of games that can be played in the notification mode increases by the number of missing games even if the additional lottery is not won. Therefore, it is possible to alleviate player's disappointment.

In addition, by adding the missing number of games to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, it is possible to simplify the processing structure related to the confrontation performance and improve the game's interest. For example, if the number of remaining games in the notification mode is less than the maximum number of confrontation games (hereinafter also referred to as "maximum number of confrontation games"), it is possible to configure the configuration in which the confrontation effect is not performed. . However, in such a configuration, although it is necessary to have a processing configuration to check the number of remaining games, there is a possibility that the game becomes monotonous after the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of confrontation games. There are concerns. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, in subsequent games when the number of remaining games becomes less than the maximum number of confrontation games, another auxiliary effect that can be completed in one game is executed. However, with such a configuration, it becomes necessary to store the other auxiliary effects mentioned above in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also limits the executable effects depending on the number of remaining games. There is also the issue of receiving. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the insufficient number of games is added to the remaining number of games in the notification mode, each of the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

In the second effect determination process performed when the player has won the additional lottery, if it is determined to perform a confrontation effect, the number of additional games is added to the value of the transfer game number counter after deriving the number of missing games. And so. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid using up a part of the number of additional games during the confrontation performance.

When the number of missing games is 0 or less, the value of the transition game number counter is not changed, that is, the number of remaining games in the notification mode is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase due to execution of the confrontation performance to a situation where the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation where the end of the notification mode is near. As a result, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay in a situation where the end of the notification mode is near, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. The smaller the number of remaining games at the start of the showdown performance, the greater the increase in the number of remaining games due to execution of the showdown performance, making it possible to have the player play the game while expecting the start of the showdown performance itself. It is.

In the case of winning the confrontation effect lottery, a value from 3 to 5 is obtained as the number of confrontation games, regardless of whether or not the player wins the additional lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest in a situation where the end of the notification mode is near. For example, if a showdown is started when the number of remaining games in notification mode is 4, if 5 is obtained as the number of showdown games, the number of remaining games in notification mode will be increased by 1, and the number of showdown games will be 4 or 3. If it has been acquired, the number of remaining games in the notification mode will not change. Therefore, when the confrontation performance is started, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting not only that he has won the additional lottery, but also that the confrontation performance will continue for a long time.

The number of remaining games in the notification mode is not checked when conducting the showdown lottery. As described above, in the configuration in which the insufficient number of games is added to the number of remaining games in the notification mode, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform the effect without being constrained by the number of remaining games in the notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the confrontation performance.

If the player wins the showdown effect lottery under the notification mode, the effect flag is set. When the performance flag is set, the competition performance lottery and the competition game number lottery are not performed. With this configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed is not changed midway through. As a result, even in a configuration where the number of missing games is added to the remaining number of games in the notification mode, an event occurs in which the notification mode does not end as a result of the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed being changed midway through. It is possible to avoid this.

If an additional lottery is won during the defeat confrontation performance, the system is configured to switch to the victory confrontation performance without changing the length of execution of the confrontation performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and to prevent the confrontation performance from becoming unnecessarily long.

When winning an additional lottery during the winning showdown performance, the number of add-on games is notified all at once without changing the length of the showdown performance. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and to prevent the confrontation performance from becoming unnecessarily long.

As described above, when a confrontation performance is started in the notification mode, the length of the confrontation performance is not changed in the middle of the confrontation performance, so that the confrontation performance that notifies you of whether or not you have won the additional lottery. This makes it possible to avoid loss of intent. In this slot machine 10 that adds the number of missing games to the remaining number of games in the notification mode, if the length of the confrontation performance can be changed during the confrontation performance, the player's interest may increase as a result of the lottery. This is because there is a possibility that the situation will be more suited to continuing the confrontation performance.

In the notification mode, the main control device 101 side is configured to determine whether or not to execute the confrontation performance in both cases of winning the additional lottery and not winning the additional lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to perform a confrontation performance even when there are only a few remaining games in the notification mode, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous as the notification mode approaches its end. Become. For example, in the case where the display control device 81 side determines whether or not to execute a confrontation effect, if there are only a few remaining games in the notification mode, it cannot be determined that the confrontation effect will be executed unless the player has won the additional lottery. be.

In the chance mode, the display control device 81 side determines whether or not to execute the showdown performance in a situation where the transition lottery has not been won. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control device 101, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. That is, in the notification mode, if the player has not won the additional lottery, the notification mode may end depending on the number of remaining games in the notification mode. On the other hand, in the chance mode, if the transition lottery is not won, the chance mode will continue. There is no possibility that the processing configuration related to determining whether or not to execute will become complicated or that there will be restrictions on executable effects. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control device 101, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

The main control device 101 is configured to set the value obtained in the confrontation game number lottery in the transition game number counter and send a confrontation command to the display control device 81 when the transition lottery is won under the chance mode. did. Then, the display control device 81 is configured to perform control to execute the showdown effect over the number of games indicated by the showdown command, and the main control device 101 is configured to perform control to execute the showdown effect for the number of games indicated by the showdown command, and the main control device 101 is configured to control the display control device 81 to execute the showdown effect for the number of games indicated by the showdown command, and the main control device 101 is configured to control the display control device 81 to execute the showdown effect over the number of games indicated by the showdown command, and the main control device 101 is configured to perform control to execute the showdown effect over the number of games indicated by the showdown command. The system is configured to shift to notification mode when the situation arises. With this configuration, it becomes possible to actually shift the game mode after notifying the shift from the chance mode to the notification mode by a confrontation effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In chance mode, if you win the transition lottery in the middle of a losing showdown, the losing showdown ends midway and the winning showdown starts from the beginning, that is, the number of games in which the showdown is executed is changed midway through. The configuration is as follows. With this configuration, even if the display control device 81 side decides to perform the confrontation effect, it is possible to perform the victory confrontation effect and notify that the transition to the notification mode will occur. Furthermore, in this configuration, if the confrontation performance is restarted from the beginning in the middle of the confrontation performance, the transition to the notification mode is confirmed, so it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(Eighth embodiment)

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the push order bell is won in the notification mode, the operation order that can make the bell win is always notified. Good too. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the transition of game sections.

In this embodiment, the notification mode includes notification mode A and notification mode B, and when the chance mode ends, the notification mode A is entered.

Notification mode A ends when a promotion lottery to notification mode B is won and when games are played a predetermined number of times under notification mode. When the notification mode A ends, if the termination is based on a promotion lottery win, the notification mode B shifts to the notification mode B, and if the termination is based on the number of games played, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the normal section. In the notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that can make the bell win at a rate of 50% is notified. Therefore, in the notification mode A, if it is a three-coin game, it is expected that about 1.3 medals will increase each time one game is played.

Notification mode B ends when a predetermined number of games have been played under the notification mode. When the notification mode B ends, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the normal section. In notification mode B, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that can make the bell win 100% of the time is notified. Therefore, in notification mode B, if it is a three-coin game, it is expected that about 3.5 medals will increase each time one game is played.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S80101, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment is performed.

In step S80102, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S80101, so a section command is sent in step S80112. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S80103, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a three-copy game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S80104, and a navigation counter update process is performed in step S80105.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode or not, and if the current gaming mode is the chance mode, the process is directly ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game section process, in step S80106, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S80107, and the information is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S80109. Change the current game mode flag to notification flag A. In step S80110, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S80111, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S80112, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S80106 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In this case, the process advances to step S80108, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S80112, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S80109, and the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag A. In step S80110, the transition game number counter is set to 100, and in step S80111, the mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S80112, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S80103 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, the section command is sent in step S80112 without updating the mode game counter, and the process ends. do.

As described above, the chance mode shifts to the notification mode A when the transition lottery is won or when the 3-card game is played 700 times under the chance mode.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S80301, it is determined whether the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a 2-card game instead of a 3-card game, the process is immediately terminated, and if it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S80302, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S80303, and it is determined whether the current gaming mode is notification mode A or not. If the notification mode is A, the process advances to step S80304, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter is smaller than 51 or not. If the value of the mode game number counter is smaller than 51, that is, if a rare combination is won in the 1st to 50th games in notification mode A, the process advances to step S80305, and a promotion lottery is held to determine whether to promote to notification mode B. I do. In the promotion lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. In the promotion lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, you will win with a probability of about 1/2, and if you win a cherry, you will win with a probability of about 1/3. In step S80306, it is determined whether the promotion lottery has been won or not, and if the promotion lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended. If the promotion lottery is won, the gaming mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag B in step S80307, and the present process ends.

If it is determined in step S80303 that the notification mode is B instead of notification mode A, or if it is determined in step S80304 that the value of the mode game number counter is 51 or more, the process advances to step S80308 and the transition is made. An additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the game number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, there is a probability of about 1 in 5 that you will win one of the additional games of 30, 50, 100, or 300, and if you win a cherry, it will take about 3 minutes. With a probability of 1, the number of additional games will be 10, 20, 30, or 50. In step S80309, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. When winning the add-on lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S80310, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S80311. In step S80312, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transition game number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the bonus lottery, the process ends without setting the bonus flag.

If it is determined in step S80302 that the rare combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S80313, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has not been won, this process is immediately terminated, and if the push order bell has been won, in step S80314, whether or not to navigate the order of operations that can establish the bell winning prize. After performing navigation determination processing to determine whether the

In the navigation determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, it is determined in step S80401 whether or not the current gaming mode is notification mode B. If the notification mode is A rather than notification mode B, a navigation lottery is performed in step S80402. In the Navi lottery, it is determined whether or not the Navi is to be executed based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the validity of the winning combination. In step S80403, it is determined whether or not the navigation lottery has been won. If the navigation lottery has been won, the navigation flag is set in step S80405, and the process ends. Note that the probability of winning the navigation lottery is 1/2. If the navigation lottery is not won, the process advances to step S80404, and it is determined whether the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. If the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, a navigation flag is set in step S80405, and the process ends. If the value of the navigation counter is 7 or less, the process is ended without setting the navigation flag. Further, if it is determined in step S80401 that the current gaming mode is notification mode B, the navigation flag is set in step S80405 without performing the navigation lottery, and the process ends.

Here, the main control device 101 performs a process of displaying on the instruction monitor the operation order that can establish a bell prize in the rotation start process (see FIG. 17) and the instruction monitor display process (see FIG. 19). conduct. At this time, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won (S603, S802) and the instruction monitor is displayed. However, in this embodiment, whether or not the push order bell has been won Instead, it is determined whether or not the navigation flag is set, and if the navigation flag is set, processing is performed to display the instruction monitor. Further, the main control device 101 transmits a lottery result command including information indicating whether or not a navigation flag is set to the display control device 81. When the display control device 81 receives a lottery result command including information indicating that the navigation flag has been set, the display control device 81 performs a process of displaying on the auxiliary display section 65 the order of operations that can establish a bell prize.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S80501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S80502, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S80501, so a section command is sent in step S80509. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S80503, and navigation counter updating processing is performed in step S80504.

In the navigation counter update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 106, in step S80201, 1 is added to the value of the navigation counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S80202, it is determined whether the current game mode is the notification mode, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S80203 whether or not the navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is not set, this process is terminated, and if the navigation flag is set, the navigation flag is cleared in step S80204, the value of the navigation counter is set to 0 in step S80205, and the current process is completed. Finish the process.

Returning to the explanation of the game section processing, in step S80505, it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S80509, and then the process ends.

If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S80506 to S80508 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S80509, and this processing ends. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a normal flag in step S80506, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S80507. In step S80508, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Here, the gameplay of the notification mode in this embodiment will be explained.

When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, notification mode A is started. In notification mode A, when the push order bell is won, the navigation lottery is won and the operation order is notified 50% of the time. Furthermore, in notification mode A, even if the player does not win the navigation lottery, if the value of the navigation counter is 8 or more, the operation order is notified (step S80404, see FIG. 108). The value of the navigation counter is updated by 1 each time a game is played in the notification mode, and is changed to 0 when the navigation flag is set, that is, when the operation order is notified (see FIG. 106). Therefore, in notification mode A, if the push order bell is won, the operation order will be notified at a rate higher than 50%. In addition, the value of the navigation counter is updated not only in the notification mode but also in the chance mode (see FIG. 105). Therefore, in the first push-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the probability of being notified of the operation order is higher than in the second and subsequent push-order bell winning games. This is because if the game shifts to the notification mode after playing a 3-card game seven times or more under the chance mode, the operation order will always be notified even if the push order bell is won in the first game in the notification mode. Note that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode is approximately 1/250 even at setting 6, which has the highest probability of winning. Therefore, in the first push order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, the value will be higher when the navigation counter value is 8 or more than when the navigation counter value is 7 or less.

If you win a rare role between the time you enter notification mode and the 50th game, a promotion lottery will be held, and if you win a promotion lottery, you will always be notified of the operation order when you win the push order bell. Shift to notification mode B. When transitioning to notification mode B, notification mode B continues until the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the promotion lottery is not won during the 50th game after shifting to the notification mode, the notification mode A continues until the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If you win a rare combination in notification mode B, or if you win a rare combination after the 51st game in notification mode A, an additional lottery will be held, and if you win the additional lottery, the number of games to be transferred will be The value of the counter increases. Therefore, in the notification mode of the present embodiment, the number of medals that a player can acquire by the end of the notification mode will vary greatly depending on whether or not the player wins the promotion lottery and the timing of winning the promotion lottery.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Some recent slot machines are equipped with a game mode in which the operating order is announced at a rate of less than 100%, such as 50%, when a push order bell is won. In such a configuration, even though the game mode has been shifted to, the medals owned by the player may run out in the game mode, which has led to a significant loss of the player's desire to play.

Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, in the first push order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the frequency of notification of the operation order is higher than the frequency of not notification. With such a configuration, even if a configuration is adopted in which the operation order may not be notified when the push order bell is won under the notification mode, the medals owned by the player will run out under the notification mode. It becomes possible to reduce the number of opportunities to play, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the first push-order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, the probability of being notified of the operation order is higher than in the second and subsequent push-order bell winning games. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from when the mode shifts to the notification mode until the operation order is first notified.

The configuration is such that when the push order bell is won under notification mode A, the operation order is notified when the navigation lottery is won. With this configuration, it is possible to make the intervals at which the operation order is notified at random when the push order bell is won. On the other hand, in a configuration in which whether or not to notify the operation order is determined by a lottery, an event may occur in which the operation order is not notified at all due to bias in the lottery results. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to notify the operation order not only when the player wins the navigation lottery but also when the value of the navigation counter is 8 or more. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the interval at which the operation order is notified from becoming unnecessarily wide. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated regardless of whether a two-coin game or a three-coin game is played. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the operation order in the next push order bell winning game, not only when you repeatedly fail the navigation lottery, but also when you do not win the push order bell itself. It is possible to reduce the chance that the player's medals will run out under the mode. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated when the push order bell is won, but in such a structure, if the push order bell itself does not win in a row, the notification mode will be changed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player's medals will run out.

When the push order bell is won under notification mode A, the operation order is notified if the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player's medals run out in the notification mode, and to suppress the expected value of medal payouts per game in the notification mode A from becoming larger than necessary. It becomes possible to do so. That is, if the set value of the navigation counter at the time of determining that the operation order is to be notified is set to a value of 6 or less, the smaller the set value is, the higher the navigation rate in notification mode A becomes. This means that the difference between notification mode A and notification mode B becomes smaller, which may lead to the game becoming monotonous. On the other hand, if the navigation counter setting value when determining that the operation order is to be notified is set to a value of 8 or more, the difference between notification mode A and notification mode B becomes large; This is because it leads to an increased chance of running out of medals. The set value "7" of the navigation counter in this embodiment is based on a simulation result using the winning probability of the winning combination and the winning probability of the navigation lottery.

When the operation order is notified in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is returned to 0, that is, the navigation counter is initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the navigation counter, and also to prevent the interval for notifying the operation order from becoming unnecessarily wide due to the relatively simple processing configuration. Become. This is because if the configuration is such that the navigation counter is not initialized when the operation order is notified in the notification mode, it is necessary to secure the capacity of the navigation counter so that it can count 1500, which is the upper limit number of advantageous sections. In addition, the value of the navigation counter when the operation order is notified is separately stored, and in step S80404 in the navigation determination process, the current navigation counter value and the value of the navigation counter when the operation order is notified are stored separately. This is because it becomes necessary to determine whether the difference between , is 8 or more.

The value of the navigation counter is updated not only in the notification mode but also in the chance mode. With this configuration, while suppressing an increase in the amount of data stored in advance in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, the frequency of notifying the operation order in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode can be reduced. It is possible to configure the frequency to be higher than the frequency of not reporting.

Indeed, the configuration is such that the first flag is set when transitioning to notification mode A, and if the first flag is set and the push order bell is won, the first flag is cleared at the same time as the operation order is announced. It is also possible. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the frequency of notifying the operation order is higher than the frequency of not informing in the first press order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode. However, in such a configuration, since the notification of the operation order in the second and subsequent press order bell winning games depends on the result of the navigation lottery, if the player continues to miss the navigation lottery, the player's owned medal will be displayed under the notification mode. There is a possibility that it will run out. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is possible to provide a navigation counter that is updated only in notification mode and to notify the operation order even if the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7. In this case, it becomes necessary to store the processing configuration related to the initial flag and the processing configuration related to the navigation counter in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 in advance, resulting in a new problem of an increase in the amount of data. That will happen. On the other hand, if the value of the navigation counter is updated in the chance mode as well as in the notification mode as in this embodiment, the above-mentioned concerns can be addressed while eliminating the need for the processing configuration related to the initial flag. can be suitably resolved.

Furthermore, it is generally said that the soundness of the game is ensured if the ball payout rate after 1600 games is 1.5 or less. The upper limit for the number of times in an advantageous section is 1500, so for example, if the advantageous section ends when the upper limit is reached and you win the transfer lottery in the first game of the next advantageous section, you can play 1600 times. There is a possibility that the ball payout rate when playing the game will exceed 1.5, and there is a possibility that the soundness of the game cannot be ensured. Here, if the configuration is such that the first time flag is set, the operation order will be changed in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to notification mode, regardless of the number of games played under chance mode when winning the transition lottery. This will be announced. For this reason, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate when playing the game 1600 times will exceed 1.5, and there is a possibility that the soundness of the game cannot be ensured. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in chance mode as well as notification mode, the number of games played under chance mode and the number of games played from the time the transition to notification mode to when the first press order bell is won are calculated. When the sum of the number and the number is 7 or less, the ratio of notifying the operation order is 50%. Therefore, in a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated in the chance mode as well as in the notification mode, it is possible to increase the possibility of ensuring the soundness of the game compared to a configuration in which the initial flag is set. .

In the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated when a three-copy game is played. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the value of the navigation counter is larger than 7 in the first press order bell winning game after transition to the notification mode. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the navigation counter is updated when the push order bell is won under the chance mode. However, in such a configuration, for example, an event may occur in which the push order bell is won before the push order bell is won. This is because the frequency with which the counter value is greater than 7 becomes low. On the other hand, in a configuration where the value of the navigation counter is updated when a 3-card game is played, even if you win the lottery to enter the notification mode in the first game of chance mode, the value of the navigation counter will be updated in that game. Can be updated. Therefore, in the first press order bell winning game after shifting to the notification mode, it is possible to increase the frequency in which the value of the navigation counter is larger than 7.

If you win a rare role between the time you enter notification mode and the 50th game, a promotion lottery will be held, and if you win a promotion lottery, you will always be notified of the operation order when you win the push order bell. The system is configured to shift to notification mode B. With this configuration, it becomes possible to make the player play the game under the notification mode A while expecting the player to shift to the notification mode B, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, 100 games are set as the number of games that can be played under the notification mode. Then, the period from the transition to the notification mode until the 50th game is set as the period during which the transition to the notification mode B can be made. With this configuration, it is possible to greatly change the number of medals that the player can acquire by the end of the notification mode depending on the timing of transition to notification mode B, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

(Ninth embodiment)

The present embodiment is characterized by a processing configuration when outputting sound effects and the like from the speaker 64. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the feature points will be described below.

In the first embodiment, the display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, but in this embodiment, the production control device 201 and the liquid crystal control device 251 The upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled.

As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 110, a production control device 201 is connected to the main control device 101, and a liquid crystal control device 251 is connected to the production control device 201. The performance control device 201 is equipped with a board in which a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. are integrated, and determines and determines the contents of the performance to be executed based on commands such as lottery result commands received from the main control device 101. A command according to the result is sent to the liquid crystal control device 251. The liquid crystal control device 251 includes a board in which a CPU 252, a VDP 253, an image ROM 255, and the like are integrated. The CPU 252 transmits an internal command to the VDP 253 in order to execute a performance according to a command input from the performance control device 201. The VDP 253 reads image data and sound data from the image ROM 255 in accordance with internal commands input from the CPU 252, and drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65.

As shown in FIG. 111(a), the liquid crystal control device 251 is provided with 32 channels so as to be able to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds. CH0 to CH3 are channels responsible for operation sounds. More specifically, CH0 and CH1 output a bet sound when a medal is bet, a start sound when the start lever 41 is operated to generate a start command, and a stop switch 42 to generate a stop command. When 44 is operated, a stop sound, etc. is output. From CH2 and CH3, a wait sound when a wait occurs, a winning sound when a winning is established, a payout sound when medals are paid out, etc. are output. CH4 to CH7 are channels in charge of BGM and jingles. From CH4 and CH5, there are BGM for performances when performing auxiliary performances such as continuous performances, normal BGM for game times when no auxiliary performances are executed, and customer waiting performances for when the game is not played for a predetermined time. Waiting BGM etc. are output. From CH6 and CH7, jingles corresponding to the BGM output from CH4 and CH5 are output. CH8 to CH13 are channels in charge of sound effects such as preview sounds. CH26 is a channel in charge of press order notification sound effects. When announcing the operation order in the push order bell winning game, a sound effect is output from CH26 before the operation order is announced. CH27 is a channel in charge of press order notification audio. When announcing the operation order in the push order bell winning game, a sound indicating the stop switch 42 to 44 to be operated, such as "left", is output from CH27. CH28 and CH29 are channels in charge of general-purpose sounds other than the press order notification sound. CH30 is a channel in charge of monaural backup, and CH31 is a channel in charge of error sound when an abnormality occurs and test sound during inspection.

The RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with seven layers. The layer is a storage area for storing the sound volume (volume value) when outputting sound data, and is configured to store the sound volume according to the purpose for each layer. For example, in the CH4 layer responsible for BGM, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the 0th layer is an area for storing the volume at the time of error notification, and the 1st layer is an area for initializing the slot machine 10. The second layer is an area for storing the volume in the power saving mode. It should be noted that the power saving mode is a mode to which the game shifts if no game is played for a predetermined period of time, more specifically after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting performance. In the power saving mode, processing is performed to reduce the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65, and processing to reduce the output volume from the speaker 64 is performed. Returning to the explanation of the layers, the third layer of the CH4 layer is an area for storing the volume normally used, and the fourth layer is an area for storing the volume when muting BGM. The fifth layer is an area for storing the volume when multiple effects are executed simultaneously, and the sixth layer is for the volume when outputting winning sounds, that is, when outputting both BGM and winning sounds. This is an area for storing BGM volume.

This slot machine 10 is characterized by a change in the volume of BGM when a rare winning combination is achieved. Therefore, first, the relationship between the BGM and the winning sound when a rare winning combination is achieved will be explained in detail by taking as an example a case where a watermelon winning prize, which is one of the rare winning combinations, is achieved.

In FIG. 112(a), BGM is output at 0.0 dB before the watermelon winning is achieved, that is, at the stage when at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating. 0.0 dB is the maximum volume corresponding to the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the administrator of the gaming hall. If a watermelon winning sound is achieved when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, the output of the watermelon winning sound starts at 0.0 dB at this timing, and the BGM output changes from 0.0 dB to -6. It is changed to 0dB. -6.0 dB is a volume that is approximately one-half of the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the administrator of the gaming hall. The watermelon winning sound is output until 2000 msec elapses after the watermelon winning is established, and then becomes non-output. While the watermelon winning sound is being output, the BGM is continuously output at -6.0 dB. When the output of the watermelon winning sound is finished, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over a period of 800 msec. BGM is output at 0.0 dB after 2800 msec has passed since the watermelon winning was established.

If a command to start the next game occurs while the BGM output is being changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, the BGM output will change at the timing when the start command occurs, as shown in Figure 112(b). The output is changed to 0.0dB. In addition, if the start command occurs before 2000 msec has passed after the watermelon winning is established, that is, if the start command occurs while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the watermelon winning sound will be output at such timing. When the output ends and becomes non-output, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB.

FIG. 112(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between BGM and winning sound when a watermelon winning is achieved in a game in which the sound is muted. The mute performance is a performance that can be performed when winning a lottery for transition to notification mode or an additional lottery, and is performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, when the first stop command is generated, and when the second stop command is generated. This is an effect where the BGM becomes inaudible at some point in time. If the mute effect is started before the watermelon winning is established, the BGM output is changed from 0.0 dB to the mute state. Note that in the muted state, the BGM data itself is being output. If a watermelon winning sound is established when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, output of the watermelon winning sound is started at 0.0 dB at this timing. At this time, the BGM remains muted. The BGM output is changed from a muted state to 0.0 dB at the timing when a command to start the next game is issued. In addition, if a start command occurs while the watermelon winning sound is being output, the output of the watermelon winning sound ends at that timing and becomes non-output, and the BGM output is reduced by 0.0 dB from the muted state. will be changed to

Below, the processing performed by the production control device 201 and the liquid crystal control device 251 in controlling the volume of the BGM described above will be specifically explained.

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the production control process performed by the production control device 201.

In step S90101, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main control device 101. When the lottery result command is received, the process advances to step S90102, and performance content determination processing is performed. In the performance content determination process, based on the lottery result of the role, the current game state including the game mode, and the random number acquired by the performance control device 201, it is determined whether or not to perform the auxiliary performance, and when to execute the auxiliary performance. determines the specific content of the auxiliary performance. If the performance content determination process has been performed, the process advances to step S90103, and a performance content command indicating the processing result of the performance content determination process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control device 251. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S90101 that the lottery result command has not been received, the process advances to step S90104, and it is determined whether or not a prize winning result command has been received from the main control device 101. If the winning result command is received, it is determined in step S90105 whether or not any winning has been achieved. If any winning combination has not been achieved, this process is immediately terminated, and if any winning combination has been achieved, a winning sound command indicating a winning combination is transmitted to the liquid crystal control device 251 in step S90106. , this process ends.

If it is determined in step S90104 that the winning result command has not been received, the process advances to step S90107, and it is determined whether or not a start command command has been received from the main control device 101. The start command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when a start command for starting the game is generated. If a start command has not been received, this process is terminated, and if a start command has been received, a start command indicating that a start command has been generated is sent to the liquid crystal control device 251 in step S90108. and send it to end this process.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing liquid crystal control processing performed by the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251.

In step S90201, production instruction processing is performed. In the performance instruction process, when a performance content command is received from the performance control device 201, an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to cause the performance to be executed according to the performance content command. For example, when receiving a production content command indicating that a mute production is to be performed, an internal command instructing to mute the BGM is transmitted at the timing of muting the BGM. The internal command transmitted when issuing an instruction regarding sound includes information indicating the type of sound, such as BGM for performance, and information indicating the channel to be controlled.

In step S90202, winning sound instruction processing is performed.

In the winning sound instruction process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 115, it is determined in step S90301 whether or not a winning sound command has been received from the production control device 201. When the winning sound command is received, it is determined in step S90302 whether or not a watermelon winning is established. If the watermelon winning is established, the process advances to step S90303, and an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to output the watermelon winning sound. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the watermelon winning sound and information indicating the channel to output the watermelon winning sound. If it is determined in step S90302 that a watermelon prize has not been achieved, it is determined in step S90306 whether or not a cherry prize has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare roles. If a cherry winning is established, the process advances to step S90307, and an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to output a cherry winning sound. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the cherry winning sound and information indicating the channel to output the cherry winning sound.

When the internal command for outputting the watermelon winning sound or the cherry winning sound is transmitted, a timer is set in step S90304, and a fade time is set in step S90305, and this process ends. In steps S90304 and S90305, when an internal command to output the watermelon winning sound (hereinafter also referred to as "watermelon winning sound output instruction") is sent, the timer is set to 2000 msec, and the fade time is set to 800 msec. do. In addition, when an internal command to output the cherry winning sound (hereinafter also referred to as "cherry winning sound output instruction"), in steps S90304 and S90305, the timer is set to 1000 msec, and the fade time is 500msec is set as 500msec.

If it is determined in step S90306 that a cherry winning has not been achieved, this means that a winning other than a rare winning combination has been achieved, so the process advances to step S90308, and an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to output a general winning sound. Send. The internal command transmitted at such timing includes information indicating the general winning sound and information indicating the channel to output the general winning sound. When an internal command for outputting the general winning sound (hereinafter also referred to as "general winning sound output instruction") is sent, this process is immediately terminated. That is, when the general winning sound output instruction is given, the timer and fade time are not set.

If it is determined in step S90301 that the winning sound command has not been received from the production control device 201, the process advances to step S90309, and it is determined whether or not a timer is set. As described above, when the timer is set, it means that a watermelon winning sound output instruction or a cherry winning sound output instruction has been issued. In such a case, it is determined in step S90310 whether or not the time set in the timer has elapsed, and if the time has not elapsed, the process is immediately terminated. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the timer is set in step S90304, the timer is decremented in the timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the liquid crystal control device 251. In step S90310, if the timer reaches 0, it is determined that the set time has elapsed. If the time set in the timer has elapsed, the process advances to step S90311, and an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 to perform fade-in control to gradually increase the volume of BGM. The internal command sent at such timing includes information indicating the channel on which fade-in control is to be performed. If an internal command for performing fade-in control has been transmitted (hereinafter also referred to as a "fade-in instruction"), the process ends immediately.

If it is determined in step S90309 that the timer is not set, that is, if it is determined that the timer is 0, the process advances to step S90312, and it is determined whether a fade time has been set. If the fade time has not been set, this process is immediately terminated; if a fade time has been set, a fade-in instruction is given in step S90313, and then this process is terminated. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the fade time is set in step S90305, the fade time is subtracted after the timer reaches 0 in the timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the liquid crystal control device 251. go. In step S90312, if the fade time is not 0, it is determined that the fade time is set, and if the fade time is 0, it is determined that the fade time is not set.

By performing the winning sound instruction process, as shown in FIG. 116, if a watermelon winning is established, the watermelon winning sound is output for 2000 msec by the watermelon winning sound output instruction. When 2000 msec has elapsed, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over 800 msec by issuing a fade-in instruction over 800 msec. When a cherry winning is established, the cherry winning sound is output for 1000 msec according to the cherry winning sound output instruction. When 1000 msec has elapsed, the BGM output is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB over 500 msec by issuing a fade-in instruction over 500 msec.

Returning to the explanation of the liquid crystal control process, if winning sound instruction processing is performed in step S90202, initialization instruction processing is performed in step S90203, and the process returns to step S90201. In the initialization instruction process, when a start command is received from the production control device 201, an internal command is sent to the VDP 253 in order to return the data stored in the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 (for example, the volume value stored in each layer) to the initial value. Send commands. In addition, in the initialization instruction process, a timer and fade time are set in the winning sound instruction process, and if a start command is received from the production control device 201 in a situation where at least one of the timer and fade time is not 0, the timer and fade time are set. Perform processing to return the fade time to 0.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing BGM output processing performed by the VDP 253 of the liquid crystal control device 251 when outputting BGM such as normal BGM. As described above, the channels responsible for outputting BGM are CH4 and CH5. Therefore, it can be said that the BGM output process is a process performed when outputting sound from at least one of CH4 and CH5. However, in order to make it easier to understand, in the following description, a case where BGM is output from CH4 will be explained as an example.

In step S90401, BGM data is read from the image ROM 255. Note that the BGM data to be read is specified in an internal command sent by the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 in the performance instruction process. In step S90402, volume value setting processing is performed to set a volume value for the layer.

In the volume value setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 118, it is determined in step S90501 whether there is a mute instruction. Specifically, it is determined whether an internal command instructing to mute the BGM from the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 is received. If there is a mute instruction, the process advances to step S90502, and the volume value is set to "0" in the fourth layer of the CH4 layer. After that, or if it is determined in step S90501 that there was no mute instruction, the process advances to step S90503, and it is determined whether there was a rare winning winning sound output instruction, that is, whether there was a watermelon winning sound output instruction or a cherry winning sound output instruction. Determine. If there is an instruction to output the rare winning combination sound, the process advances to step S90504, and "64" is set as the volume value in the sixth layer of the CH4 layer. After that, or if it is determined in step S90503 that there is no rare combination winning sound output instruction, the process proceeds to step S90505, and it is determined whether or not there is a fade-in instruction. If there is a fade-in instruction, the process advances to step S90506, and 1 is added to the volume value set in the 6th layer of the CH4 layer. After that, or if it is determined in step S90505 that there is no fade-in instruction, the process advances to step S90507, and it is determined whether or not there is an initialization instruction. If there is no initialization instruction, this process ends, and if there is an initialization instruction, the process advances to step S90508, and the initial value is set as the volume value in the 0th to 6th layers of the CH4 layer. "128" is set. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the BGM output process, if the volume value setting process is completed, the process advances to step S90403, and the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers of the CH4 layer are compared. In step S90404, BGM data is output using the minimum volume value among the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers of the CH4 layer. After that, this process ends.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing the volume value of the CH4 layer when the volume value setting process is performed.

If there is an initialization instruction, "128" is set in the 0th to 6th layers in step S90508. Under such a situation, since the volume values set in the 0th to 6th layers are all the same "128", BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "128". When outputting at a volume value of "128", the maximum volume (0.0 dB) corresponds to the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the administrator of the gaming hall.

If there is a rare combination winning sound output instruction, "64" is set in the sixth layer in step S90504. The volume values of the 0th to 5th layers remain "128". Under such a situation, the volume value "64" set in the sixth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "64". When outputting with a volume value of "64", the volume will be approximately one half (-6.0 dB) of the volume of the slot machine 10 set by the player or the administrator of the gaming hall.

If there is a fade-in instruction, 1 is added to the volume value of the sixth layer in step S90506. The volume values of the 0th to 5th layers remain "128". Under such a situation, the volume value set in the sixth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 at the volume value of the sixth layer. The CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 periodically issues fade-in instructions 64 times until the fade time reaches 0. Therefore, when the watermelon winning sound is output, the volume value of the 6th layer changes periodically from "65" to "128" within 800 msec, and it takes 800 msec to output the BGM. is changed from -6.0dB to 0.0dB. When the cherry winning sound is output, the volume value of the 6th layer will change periodically from "65" to "128" within 500 msec, and the BGM output will change over a period of 500 msec. It is changed from 6.0dB to 0.0dB.

If there is a mute instruction, "0" is set in the fourth layer in step S90502. The volume values of the 0th layer to the 3rd layer, the 5th layer, and the 6th layer remain at "128". Under such a situation, the volume value "0" set in the fourth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". When outputting with a volume value of "0", the BGM data is outputted but the sound is muted and no sound is heard.

If there is an instruction to output the rare winning sound after the muting instruction, "0" is set in the fourth layer when the muting instruction is issued, and "64" is set in the sixth layer when the rare winning winning sound is instructed to be output. " is set. The volume values of the 0th to 3rd layers and the 5th layer remain at "128". Under such a situation, the volume value "0" set in the fourth layer is the minimum value, so BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". That is, when there is a mute instruction, even if a rare combination winning sound output instruction comes afterwards, the process of outputting BGM from CH4 with a volume value of "64" is not performed.

Although illustration is omitted, if there is a fade-in instruction after a mute instruction, the volume set in the fourth layer is the same as when a rare winning sound output instruction is issued after a mute instruction Since the value "0" is the minimum value, BGM is output from CH4 with a volume value of "0". In other words, if a mute instruction is given, even if a fade-in instruction comes later, the BGM will not be faded in. The BGM output returns to 0.0 dB when there is an initialization instruction, that is, at the timing when a start instruction to start the next game is generated.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When a rare prize winning is achieved, the rare prize winning sound is output at 0.0 dB, and if the BGM is output at 0.0 dB, the volume of the BGM is controlled to be lowered to -6.0 dB. It was configured to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to switch the sound output at 0.0 dB from BGM to the rare winning combination sound, and it is also possible to make the rare winning winning sound easier to hear than the BGM. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player misses hearing the rare combination winning sound, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

When a rare winning combination is achieved, a rare winning winning sound is output. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of accomplishment of winning a rare winning combination, the expectation of receiving benefits based on winning a rare winning combination, etc. by outputting the winning sound of a rare winning combination, and increase the interest in the game. This makes it possible to improve the Whether or not a rare winning combination is achieved is based not only on winning the corresponding rare winning combination, but also on whether or not the player himself operated the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at a winning symbol. This is because, if a rare winning combination is established, it is confirmed that the transition lottery to the notification mode or the additional lottery has been carried out.

When the output of the rare combination winning sound is finished, control is performed to fade in the BGM volume to 0.0 dB. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the BGM volume is changed from -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB at the timing when the output of the rare prize winning sound ends, the player is not immersed in the lingering sound of the rare prize winning sound. It becomes possible to As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When a watermelon winning is established, the output time of the rare combination winning sound is longer than when a cherry winning is established. In the chance mode, if you win a watermelon, you have a higher probability of winning the lottery for switching to the notification mode than if you win a cherry. Furthermore, in the notification mode, if the player wins a watermelon, the expected value of the number of additional games is higher than if the player wins a cherry. Therefore, when a watermelon win is achieved, the output time of the rare winning sound is longer than when a cherry win is achieved, so that benefits such as transition to notification mode and additional number of games are granted. It becomes possible to associate the expectation level with the output time of the rare combination winning sound, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

The time required for the BGM volume to return to 0.0 dB after the output of the rare combination winning sound ends is different between the case where a watermelon prize is established and the case where a cherry prize is established. With this configuration, it is possible to make the time for the player to soak in the lingering sound different when the watermelon winning sound is output and when the cherry winning sound is output, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes. In addition, the configuration is such that when a watermelon prize is established, where expectations for benefits such as transition to notification mode and additional games are high, it takes longer to return to 0.0 dB than when a cherry prize is established. As a result, it becomes possible to correlate the level of expectation for awarding a bonus with the time it takes for the BGM volume to return to 0.0 dB, thereby making it possible to improve gaming enjoyment.

If a start command is issued during fade-in control, the BGM volume is immediately controlled to return to 0.0 dB. With this configuration, when a start command to start the next game is generated, it is possible to output BGM at 0.0 dB in the next game.

The RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with seven layers for CH4, which is responsible for BGM. The CH4 layer is configured to store a volume depending on the application for each layer. With this configuration, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from CH4, for example, information related to the volume before the change and information related to the volume after the change can be stored in different layers. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

In the CH4 layer, if there is a mute instruction, the volume value of the fourth layer is changed to 0, and if there is a rare prize winning sound output instruction, the volume value of the sixth layer is changed to 64. The structure is as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to know whether or not a mute effect is being executed, whether a rare winning combination sound is being output, etc. through the volume values of the fourth and sixth layers. becomes. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When outputting BGM, the volume values of each layer are compared and the minimum volume value is used. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the need for the process of checking the volume being output from CH4, and it is possible to simplify the process configuration. Further, by configuring the configuration to output BGM from CH4 using the minimum volume value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration in a situation where, for example, the volume of CH4 is maintained in a muted state.

In other words, in a conventional slot machine that has only one volume value storage area for CH4 in the VDP RAM, it is necessary to store the volume value that defines the volume actually output from CH4 in the volume value storage area. However, the processing configuration related to sound output is complicated.

As a specific example, when a rare winning combination is achieved while a mute effect is being executed, an event similar to that of this embodiment is generated, that is, when a rare winning combination is achieved, the BGM output is set to -6. Consider leaving the sound muted instead of setting it to .0 dB. In order to generate such an event, at least one of the effect control device, the CPU of the liquid crystal control device, and the VDP needs to be configured to be able to grasp whether or not the mute effect is being executed. For example, in order to configure the CPU of the liquid crystal control device to be able to grasp whether or not a mute effect is being executed, it is necessary to set a mute flag indicating that the mute effect has started when the mute effect is started, and to set the mute flag to indicate that the mute effect has started. A storage area is required to store the data. In the winning sound instruction process, when a rare winning combination is established, it is determined whether or not a muting effect is being executed based on whether or not a muting flag is set, and if the muting effect is being executed; It is necessary to send different internal commands to the VDP depending on whether the mute effect is being executed or not. If the mute effect is being executed, it is necessary to send an internal command that sets the CH4 volume value storage area to 0; if the mute effect is not being executed, the CH4 volume value storage area is set to 64. This is because it is necessary to send an internal command that sets . Therefore, in the winning sound instruction process, a process for determining whether or not a mute effect is being executed, an internal command for when the mute effect is being executed, and an internal command for when the mute effect is not being executed are required.

On the other hand, in the present slot machine 10 in which the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 is provided with a layer for CH4, each of the above-mentioned configurations is unnecessary. That is, the VDP 254 of the slot machine 10 changes the volume value of the fourth layer to 0 when there is a mute instruction, and changes the volume value of the sixth layer to 64 when there is an instruction to output the rare winning sound. do. Since volume values can be stored in different layers according to instructions in this way, the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 does not need internal commands for when the mute effect is being executed and internal commands for when the mute effect is not being executed. Accordingly, the process of determining whether or not a mute effect is being executed in the winning sound instruction process is also unnecessary. Then, in the winning sound instruction process, there is no need to perform a process of determining whether or not a mute effect is being executed, so when the mute effect is started, a process of setting a mute flag indicating that the mute effect has been started; This is because a storage area for storing the mute flag becomes unnecessary. In addition, when outputting BGM, the volume values of each layer are compared and the minimum volume value is used. There is no need to send any commands.

As a result of the above, by providing the RAM 254 of the VDP 253 with a plurality of layers regarding CH4 which is responsible for BGM, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from CH4.

(Tenth embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by an ending effect that can be executed in the notification mode. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the feature points will be described below.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied in the notification mode, the ending effect is performed. In the first embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are that 1500 games have been played in the advantageous section and that the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section has reached 2400. In the embodiment, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are that 3000 games have been played in the advantageous section and that the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section has reached 2400. The display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, and the upper lamp 63 in order to execute the ending movie in the ending effect.

The ending movie is composed of a story part and a music part, as shown in FIG. 120(a). In the story part, a digest video that summarizes the story about the main character of the slot machine 10 in 175 seconds is output over a period of 200 seconds. In the music part, the opening song and video of the work related to the main character of the slot machine 10 are output for 40 seconds. When the output of the story part is finished, the music part is repeatedly output until the notification mode and advantageous section are finished.

The ROM of the display control device 81 stores data used when reproducing the story part divided into seven files. That is, as shown in FIG. 120(b), data from the start of the story part to 25 seconds is stored in the story part 1 file, and data from 26 seconds to 55 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 2 file. The data from 56 seconds to 65 seconds of the story part is stored in the file for story part 3, and the data from 66 seconds to 95 seconds of the story part is stored in the file for story part 4. The data from 96 seconds to 125 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 5 file, and the data from 126 seconds to 135 seconds of the story part is stored in the story part 6 file. Data from 136 seconds to 175 seconds of the part is stored in the story part 7 file. Furthermore, the file of story part 3 is composed of 10 seconds of playback data from 56 seconds to 65 seconds of the story part and 10 seconds of pause data. When data for story part 3 is output, the story part will be played from 56 seconds to 65 seconds, and then "NEXT" will be displayed and the same image (i.e. the image at 65 seconds of the story part) will continue for 10 seconds. It is now displayed. The same applies to the story part 6 file, which is composed of 10 seconds of playback data from 126 seconds to 135 seconds of the story part and 15 seconds of pause data. When the data of story part 6 is output, the story part from 126 seconds to 135 seconds is played, and after that, "NEXT" is displayed and the same image (i.e. the image at 135 seconds of the story part) continues for 15 seconds. It is now displayed. The data used when reproducing the music part is stored in one file as 40 seconds of data.

The processing performed by the display control device 81 when performing the ending effect will be explained.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the ED determination process performed by the display control device 81.

In step S100101, it is determined whether or not the ED start flag, which means that the ending effect has started, is set. If the ED start flag is not set, the process advances to step S100102, and it is determined whether the ED flag indicating that the ending movie is being played back is set. If neither the ED start flag nor the ED flag is set, the process advances to step S100103, and it is determined whether the completion condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode or not, and if the current gaming mode is the notification mode, the current difference number of coins and the remaining number of payouts until the notification mode ends are determined. It is determined whether the sum of and is greater than 2400. If the sum of the current difference and the remaining number of medals to be paid out until the end of notification mode is less than 2400, the number of remaining payouts until the end of notification mode is calculated based on the expected increase in the number of medals per game. Divide by the value 3.5 to derive the required number of games. Then, it is determined whether the required number of games is greater than the remaining number of games in the advantageous section. The completion condition is met if the sum of the current difference number and the remaining number of payouts until the notification mode ends is greater than 2400, and if the required number of games is greater than the remaining number of games in the advantageous section. It is determined that On the other hand, if the current gaming mode is not the notification mode, or if the current gaming mode is the notification mode, but the sum of the current difference number and the remaining number of payouts until the notification mode ends is 2400 or less, and the necessary If the number of games is less than the remaining number of games in the advantageous section, it is determined that the completion condition is not satisfied.

If it is determined that the completion condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S100104, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are drive-controlled to notify the transition to ED. Specifically, processing is performed to display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the ending movie will start from the next game. After that, the ED start flag is set in step S100105, and the process ends.

When it is determined that the ED start flag is set in step S100101, when it is determined that the ED flag is set in step S100102, and when it is determined that the completion condition is not satisfied in step S100103. In this case, the process ends immediately.

As described above, when the completion condition is met due to an additional lottery win or the like, it is announced that the ending movie will start from the next game.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the ED processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S100201, it is determined whether the ED start flag is set. If the ED start flag is set, ending movie start processing shown in steps S100202 to S100208 is performed, and the present processing ends.

In the ending movie start process, it is determined in step S100202 whether a start command has been issued. If a start command has not been generated, this process is directly ended, and if a start command has been generated, the ED start flag is cleared in step S100203, and the ED in progress flag is set in step S100204. In the subsequent step S100205, 1 is set in the file number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81, and in step S100206, 1 is set in the data number storage area provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S100207, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read out of the data previously stored in the ROM of the display control device 81. That is, in step S100207, the first data stored in the story part 1 file is read. In step S100208, processing is performed to output the read data. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S100201 that the ED start flag is not set, the process advances to step S100209, and it is determined whether or not the ED flag is set. If the ED flag is not set, this process is terminated, and if the ED flag is set, the ending movie progression process shown in steps S100210 to S100216 is performed, and this process is terminated. .

In the ending movie progression process, in step S100210, it is determined whether the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the frame rate of the ending movie is 24 fps. Therefore, the final data number is 600 (=24 x 25) for story part 1, 720 (=24 x 30) for story part 2, and 480 (=24 x 20) for story part 3. So, for story part 4, it will be 720 (=24 x 30), for story part 5, it will be 720 (=24 x 30), for story part 6, it will be 600 (=24 x 25), and for story part 7, it will be 720 (=24 x 30). If it is a music part, it will be 960 (=24×40), and if it is a music part, it will be 960 (=24×40).

If the value stored in the data number storage area is not the final data number, the process advances to step S100217, and 1 is added to the value stored in the data number storage area. Thereafter, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214, and data corresponding to the file number and data number is read out in step S100215. In step S100216, processing is performed to output the read data. After that, this process ends.

If the value stored in the data number storage area is the final data number, the process advances to step S100211, and 1 is set in the data number storage area. In step S100212, it is determined whether the value stored in the file number storage area is 8 or not. If the value stored in the file number storage area is not 8, the process advances to step S100213, and 1 is added to the value stored in the file number storage area. Thereafter, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214, and data corresponding to the file number and data number is read out in step S100215. In step S100216, processing is performed to output the read data. After that, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S100212 that the file number is 8, error confirmation processing is performed in step S100214 without changing the value stored in the file number storage area. Then, in step S100215, data corresponding to the file number and data number is read out, and in step S100216, processing is performed to output the read data. After that, this process ends. File number "8" is music part data. In other words, when the music part data is output to the end, the music part data is output again from the beginning.

As described above, when the ending movie is started in response to the generation of the start command, the data of story parts 1 to 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output. When the music part data is output to the end, the music part data is repeatedly output until the ED flag is cleared. Note that the ED flag is cleared when a section command indicating that the advantageous section has ended is received.

Here, the error confirmation process in step S100214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 123.

In step S100301, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred, and if no error has occurred, the process is immediately terminated. If an error has occurred, the process advances to step S100302, and 1 is added to the value of an error counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81. In step S100303, the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are driven and controlled to notify the occurrence of an error. Specifically, an error type such as a hopper empty error indicating that the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 is empty is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and an error sound is output from the speaker 64. At this time, the ending movie is interrupted. In step S100304, it is determined whether the error has been resolved, and if the error has not been resolved, error notification is continued until the error is resolved. On the other hand, if the error has been resolved, the process advances to step S100305, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are driven and controlled to notify the restart operation. Specifically, processing is performed to display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the ending movie will be restarted when a command to start the next game is issued. In step S100306, it is determined whether a restart operation has been performed, and if the restart operation has not been performed, the notification of the restart operation is continued until the restart operation is performed. If a restart operation is performed, restart processing is performed in step S100307, and this processing ends.

In the restart process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 124, it is determined in step S100401 whether the file number is 8. If the file number is 8, it means that an error occurred while outputting music part data. In such a case, 1 is set in the data number storage area in step S100402, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S100401 that the file number is not 8, this means that an error has occurred while outputting the story part data. In such a case, the process advances to step S100403, and it is determined whether the value of the error number counter is greater than 3. Note that the value of the error count counter is changed to 0 when the advantageous section ends, and is updated only in step S100302 of the error confirmation process. If the value of the error count counter is greater than 3, it means that an error has occurred four or more times after the ending movie was started, so 1 is added to the value of the file number storage area in step S100404. Thereafter, in step S100402, 1 is set in the data number storage area, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S100403 that the value of the error number counter is 3 or less, the process advances to step S100405, and it is determined whether the advance condition is satisfied. The ROM of the display control device 81 stores a carry-up table that defines the correspondence between file numbers and carry-up conditions. In the advance table, the number of games in the advantageous section and the difference in the number of coins are determined as conditions for the advance, and the number of games in the advantageous interval, the difference in the number of coins, and In addition to , the elapsed time is determined as an advance condition. As shown in FIG. 120(b), file number "1" has 2920 set as the number of games in the advantageous section and 2190 as the difference number. In the file number "2", 2930 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2210 is set as the difference number of sheets. In the file number "3", 2940 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, 2240 is set as the difference number of sheets, and 10 seconds is set as the elapsed time. In the file number "4", 2950 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2260 is set as the difference number of sheets. In the file number "5", 2960 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2290 is set as the difference number of sheets. For file number "6", 2970 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, 2320 is set as the difference number of sheets, and 10 seconds is set as the elapsed time. In the file number "7", 2980 is set as the number of games in the advantageous section, and 2350 is set as the difference number of sheets. In step S100405, if any of the number of games in the advantageous section, the difference in the number of coins, and the elapsed time is greater than the above set value, it is determined that the advance condition is satisfied, and the number of games in the advantageous interval, the difference in the number of coins , elapsed time, and are both less than or equal to the set value, it is determined that the advance condition is not satisfied. Note that the elapsed time may be determined by measuring the elapsed time after moving to file number "3" or "6", or it may be determined whether the data number is larger than 240 (=24×10). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether the If the carry-up condition is satisfied, 1 is added to the value of the file number storage area in step S100404. Thereafter, in step S100402, 1 is set in the data number storage area, and the process ends. If the carry-up condition is not satisfied, 1 is set in the data number storage area in step S100402 without changing the value in the file number storage area, and the process ends.

As described above, if an error occurs while the ending movie is being executed, the ending movie is interrupted. When the error is resolved, a restart operation is notified, and when the restart operation is performed, the ending movie is restarted. At this time, if an error occurs during the music part, the music part is started from the beginning. If an error occurs in the middle of the story part, if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less and the advance condition is not met, the file will start from the beginning of the file when the error occurred. . On the other hand, if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 4 or more, and if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less but the advance condition is met, when an error occurs starts at the beginning of the next file.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a conventional slot machine capable of executing an ending movie, if an error occurs during the ending movie, the ending movie is started from the beginning after the error is resolved. For this reason, in the above-mentioned slot machine, the ending movie must be viewed from the beginning every time a hopper empty error occurs, and there is a concern that the game will become monotonous.

Therefore, this slot machine 10 is configured to interrupt the ending movie if an error occurs while the ending movie is being executed. Then, if the error is resolved, the ending movie is restarted from the middle of the ending movie instead of from the beginning. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid starting the ending movie from the beginning even if the progress of the ending movie is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to avoid repeating the beginning of the ending movie, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

The data used when executing the ending movie is divided and stored into eight files: story part 1 to story part 7 and music part. When the ending movie is executed, data of the file corresponding to the value stored in the file number storage area is output. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the execution of the ending movie from becoming complicated, and to restart the ending movie from a position corresponding to the interrupted position when the progress of the ending movie is interrupted. It becomes possible.

When the ending movie is started in response to the generation of a start command, the data of story parts 1 to 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output. With this configuration, even if the data used to execute the ending movie is divided into multiple files and stored, it is possible to advance the ending movie independently from the progress of the game round. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

If an error occurs in the middle of a music part, the system starts from the beginning of the music part. In addition, if an error occurs in the middle of the story part, if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less and the advance condition is not met, the file will be restarted from the beginning of the file when the error occurred. The configuration is as follows. With this configuration, it becomes possible to re-execute a part of the ending movie that was executed before the error occurred, that is, to overlap a part of the ending movie before and after the error occurs, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

If the error is resolved, the ending movie is restarted when a command to start the next game is issued. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to decide the timing for restarting the ending movie, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. It is certainly possible to configure the ending movie to be restarted immediately if the error is resolved. However, an error that is likely to occur during the ending movie is a hopper empty error. If a hopper empty error occurs, it is necessary for the administrator of the gaming hall where the present slot machine 10 is installed to replenish medals, so there is a possibility that the player will leave his/her seat. If the player leaves his/her seat due to the occurrence of the hopper empty error, an event may occur in which the ending movie proceeds in the absence of the player. This can lead to a significant decrease in the player's desire to play. This is because the frequency at which the completion condition is satisfied, that is, the frequency at which the ending performance is performed, is not so high, and therefore, general players would like to enjoy the ending movie from beginning to end. In this slot machine 10, in which the ending movie is restarted when a command to start the next game is generated, the generation of the start command is caused by the player's operation, so it is possible to suitably eliminate the above-mentioned concerns, and improve the enjoyment of the game. This makes it possible to improve the

If the error is resolved, a restart operation is notified. Then, the ending movie is configured to be restarted when a restart operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable when the ending movie is not restarted even though the error has been resolved.

In the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the ending effect is performed when it is determined that the above-mentioned termination condition is satisfied. In such a configuration, the number of games in which the ending movie can be executed changes depending on the winning combination results, etc., so if the progress of the ending movie is interrupted and the ending movie is restarted from the beginning, the ending movie will not be executed until the end. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, if the ending movie is configured to start from the middle when the progress is interrupted, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

If an error occurs in the middle of the story part, the conditions for moving forward are met if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 4 or more, and if the number of errors after the ending movie starts is 3 or less. In this case, the ending movie is configured to start from the beginning of the next file when an error occurs. In this way, by omitting a part of the ending movie so that it can be restarted, it is possible to reduce the chance that the ending movie will not be able to be executed to the end even if the progress of the ending movie is interrupted. Become.

The files for Story Part 3 and Story Part 6 are provided with 10 seconds or 15 seconds of pause data in addition to 10 seconds of playback data for advancing the ending movie. If an error occurs while playing the story part 3 or story part 6 file, it is determined whether 10 seconds have elapsed or not, and if 10 seconds have elapsed, the ending movie is played from the beginning of the next file. The configuration was set to start. In this way, a configuration is provided in which pause data is provided in which the story part does not progress, and if an error occurs while outputting the pause data, the output of the pause data is omitted and the process starts from the next file. This makes it possible to reduce the chance that the ending movie will not be able to be executed to the end when the progress of the ending movie is interrupted.

(Eleventh embodiment)

This embodiment is characterized by the processing performed when setting the probability of winning. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the feature points will be described below.

In the first embodiment described above, six levels of winning probabilities are prepared in advance from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", but in this embodiment, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" In addition to the six levels of winning probability, a winning probability of "setting 7" is prepared in advance.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the winning probability setting process for setting the above setting values.

In step S110101, it is determined whether the signal from the front door open sensor that detects opening of the front door 12 is ON, that is, whether the front door 12 is open. If the front door 12 is open, the process advances to step S110102 to check whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is ON, that is, whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Determine whether or not the If the signal from the front door open sensor is OFF, or if the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, the process ends immediately.

If the signal from the front door open sensor and the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a are both ON, the process advances to step S110103, and interrupt permission processing is performed to permit activation of timer interrupt processing. In step S110104, interrupt wait processing is performed to wait until the timer interrupt processing starts. In step S110105, a setting change command is sent to the display control device 81 to make it aware that the settings will be changed. In step S110106, the current setting value is read from the setting value storage area provided in the RAM 106. Thereafter, a setting change process is performed in step S110107, and this process ends.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the setting change process.

In step S110201, it is determined whether the setting value read in step S110106 is 0. If the set value is not 0, the process advances to step S110202, and it is determined whether the set value is greater than 7. As described above, the setting value in this embodiment is any one of 1 to 7. Therefore, when the set value is 0 and when the set value is 8 or more, it means that the set value is not an appropriate value. In such a case, the set value is changed to 1 in step S110203, and then the process advances to step S110204. If the set value is one of 1 to 7, the process directly advances to step S110204. In step S110204, the set value is stored in a display buffer provided in the RAM 106, and in step S110205, the set value stored in the display buffer is displayed on the payout number display section 62. In step S110206, interrupt wait processing is performed to wait until the timer interrupt processing starts. In step S110207, based on the processing result of the timer interrupt processing, more specifically, the processing result of the sensor monitoring processing performed in the timer interrupt processing (step S107, see FIG. 10), it is determined whether the signal from the sensor has switched from OFF to ON. ON edge confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether the

Here, the first sensor buffer provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101 will be explained based on FIG. 127.

The first sensor buffer is made up of four areas, 0th area to 3rd area, and each of 0th area to 3rd area is made up of 1 byte. The 0th bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area is an area for storing signal information from the setting key detection sensor 73a. The first bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area is an area for storing signal information from the front door open sensor. The second bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area is an area for storing signal information from the reset detection sensor 72a. The third and fourth bits of the 0th area to the 3rd area are unused areas, and 1 is always stored therein. The fifth bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area is an area for storing signal information from the start detection sensor 41a. The 6th bit and the 7th bit of the 0th area to the 3rd area are areas for storing signal information from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the sensor monitoring process of the timer interrupt process, information in the first area of the first sensor buffer is shifted to the third area, and information in the 0th area is shifted to the first area. After that, the signals from the various sensors mentioned above are read, and if it is an ON signal, 1 is stored in the corresponding bit of the 0th area, and if it is an OFF signal, 0 is stored in the corresponding bit of the 0th area. conduct.

Therefore, in the first sensor buffer, it can be said that the current sensor signal state is stored in the 0th area, the previous sensor signal state is stored in the 1st area, and the 3rd area stores the current sensor signal state. It can be said that the area stores the signal state of the sensor two times before. Information in the ON edge confirmation process is stored in the second area.

In the ON edge confirmation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 128, in step S110301, the information stored in the 0th area of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110302, the information stored in the first area of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110303, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the change state of the sensor. In step S110304, the logical product (AND) of the changing state of the sensor and the current sensor state is obtained, and the obtained result is stored in the second area of the first sensor buffer. After that, this process ends.

Through the process of step S110303, in the sensor change state, the previous sensor state is "1" and the current sensor state is "0", and the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". ``1'' will be stored in the bit and . Then, by the process of step S110304, "1" is stored in the second area of the first sensor buffer in the bit where the previous sensor state is "0" and the current sensor state is "1". In other words, it can be said that the second area stores information indicating an ON edge where the signal from the sensor is switched from OFF to ON.

Returning to the explanation of the setting change process, if the ON edge confirmation process is completed, the process advances to step S110208 and checks whether 1 is stored in the 5th bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, that is, the start detection sensor 41a It is determined whether the ON edge of is detected. If the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a is not detected, the process advances to step S110209, and it is determined whether 1 is stored in the second bit of the second area of the first sensor buffer, that is, the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a is detected. is detected. If the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a is detected, that is, if the reset switch 72 is operated, the set value is updated by 1 in step S110210, and then the process returns to step S110202. As a result, in the setting change process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset switch 72 is operated, and when the reset switch 72 is operated after the set value reaches 7, the set value returns to 1. .

Note that when the process returns from step S110209 to step S110202, the ON edge confirmation process of step S110207 is performed after the interrupt wait process of step S110206. In other words, if the previous state was "0" and the current state was "1" during the previous ON edge confirmation process, in the current ON edge confirmation process, the previous state was "1" and the current state was has changed to "1", so "0" will be stored in the bit in the second area where "1" was stored. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event in which the set value is updated multiple times in response to one operation of the reset switch 72.

Incidentally, the determination of the signal from the front door open sensor in step S110101 and the determination of the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a in step S110102 are based on the corresponding bits (first bit, It is determined whether 1 is stored in the 0th bit).

If it is determined in step S110209 that the ON edge of the reset detection sensor 72a has not been detected, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S110206. If it is determined in step S110208 that the ON edge of the start detection sensor 41a is detected, that is, if it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated, a change end process is performed in step S110211, and this process is ended. .

In the change termination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 129, display of the setting values is terminated in step S110401. More specifically, the display mode of the payout number display section 62 is changed from one of 1 to 7 indicating the set value to 0, which is the initial display mode of the payout number display section 62. In step S110402, a setting key OFF wait process is performed.

In the setting key OFF wait process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 130, interrupt wait process is performed in step S110501. In step S110502, the information stored in the 0th area of the first sensor buffer is read as the current sensor state. In step S110503, the information stored in the first area of the first sensor buffer is read as the previous sensor state. In step S110504, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the current sensor state and the previous sensor state is obtained as the change state of the sensor. In step S110505, the logical product (AND) of the changing state of the sensor and the previous sensor state is obtained as the OFF edge of the sensor. Contrary to the ON edge confirmation process, in step S110505, "1" is stored in the bit where the previous sensor state was "1" and the current sensor state was "0".

In step S110506, it is determined whether 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the OFF edge, that is, whether the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a has been detected. If the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is not detected, the process returns to the interrupt wait process of step S110501. On the other hand, when the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected, it means that the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 has been switched from ON to OFF after operating the start lever 41. In this case, the process advances to step S110507, and 10 times is set as the number of interruptions. In step S110508, interrupt wait processing is performed, and in step S110509, it is determined whether 0 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer, that is, whether the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF. Determine whether If the signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a is OFF, it is determined in step S110510 whether or not timer interrupt processing has been performed 10 times. If the timer interrupt process has not been performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait process in step S110508, and if the timer interrupt process has been performed 10 times, this process ends. If 1 is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area of the first sensor buffer until the timer interrupt processing is performed 10 times, the process returns to the interrupt wait processing of step S110501.

As described above, the setting key OFF wait process is performed 10 times in a row after "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area of the 1st sensor buffer and "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area. The process ends when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area.

Returning to the explanation of the change completion process, if the setting key OFF wait process is completed, the process advances to step S110403, and the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. In step S110404, a change end command is sent to the display control device 81 to make it aware that the setting change has been completed and the newly set setting value. In step S110405, data in the RAM 106 other than the setting value storage area is cleared. Incidentally, the setting value storage area is provided at the top address (0000H) of the RAM 106. Therefore, in step S110405, data is initialized by specifying the second and subsequent addresses. In step S110406, a front door command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in order to determine whether the front door 12 is open or not. In addition to clearing the RAM 106 above, the front door command is also used when the front door 12 is switched from a closed state to an open state, when the front door 12 is switched from an open state to a closed state, and when an error condition occurs. is transmitted to the display control device 81 when the reset switch 72 is operated to reset the . When the front door command is sent to the display control device 81, the change completion process is ended.

The process performed by the display control device 81 when setting the probability of winning will be described.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing front door command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110601, it is determined whether or not a front door command has been received, and if the front door command has not been received, the process is immediately terminated. If the front door command is received, the process advances to step S110602, and it is determined whether the front door 12 is in an open state. If the front door 12 is in the open state, the process advances to step S110603, and it is determined whether the set value of the winning probability is 7 or not. If the set value is not 7 but one of 1 to 6, in step S110604 a process for outputting a normal open sound from the speaker 65 is started, and this process ends. If the set value is 7, a process for outputting a special opening sound from the speaker 65 is started in step S110605, and the process ends. Here, the normal opening sound and the special opening sound are audio data output to notify that the front door 12 is opened. For the normal opening sound, a female voice saying "The door is open" is output, and for the special opening sound, a male voice saying "The door is open" is output.

If it is determined in step S110602 that the front door 12 is not in the open state, that is, if the front door 12 is in the closed state, the process advances to step S110606, and it is determined whether the set value of the winning probability is 7 or not. If the set value is not 7 but one of 1 to 6, the process of outputting the normal open sound from the speaker 65 is ended in step S110607, and the present process is ended. If the set value is 7, the process of outputting the special opening sound from the speaker 65 is ended in step S110608, and the lighting mode switching process is performed in step S110609, and this process is ended. Here, the lighting mode switching process is a process of switching the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63 for a predetermined period of time, and more specifically, the upper lamp 63 whose normal mode is in the lit state is turned off for 30 seconds, After that, a process is performed to return the light to the lighting state.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing setting change command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110701, it is determined whether or not a setting change command has been received, and if the setting change command has not been received, the process is directly ended. If a setting change command is received, the process of outputting a normal open sound or special open sound from the speaker 65 is ended in step S110702, and the process of outputting a setting change sound from the speaker 65 is started in step S110703. , this process ends. Here, the setting change sound is audio data that is output to notify that the setting value of the winning probability can be changed. As the settings change sound, a female voice saying "Settings are being changed" is output.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the change end command processing performed by the display control device 81.

In step S110801, it is determined whether or not a change end command has been received, and if the change end command has not been received, the process is directly ended. When the change end command is received, the process of outputting the setting change sound from the speaker 65 is ended in step S110802, and the setting value indicated by the change end command is stored in step S110803, and this process is ended.

Here, the relationship between the series of operations performed when setting the winning probability and the notification sound to be notified will be explained.

A reset switch 72 and a setting key insertion hole 73 used for setting the winning probability are provided in the power supply box 70. The power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11, as shown in FIG. 3 and the like. Therefore, when setting the winning probability, it is first necessary to open the front door 12 from the casing 11 and expose the power supply box 70 to the open front side of the casing 11. When the front door 12 is opened from the housing 11, front door command processing is performed, so if the setting value is between 1 and 6, an opening sound will normally be output, and if the setting value is 7, an opening sound will be output. A special opening sound is output (see FIG. 131).

The operation for setting the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as "setting change operation") can be roughly divided into a start operation, a change operation, and an end operation. The starting operation corresponds to inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. The changing operation corresponds to turning on the reset switch 72. The termination operation corresponds to turning on the start lever 41 and then turning off the setting key. Here, to briefly explain the configuration of the well-known setting key and the setting key insertion hole 73, the setting key insertion hole 73 has an ON position where an ON signal is output from the setting key detection sensor 73a, and an ON position where the setting key detection sensor 73a outputs an ON signal. An OFF position is provided in which an ON signal is not output from 73a (an OFF signal is output). The setting key can be inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 from the OFF position and moved to the ON position by rotating it to the right (ON operation). The setting key insertion hole 73 is configured to hold the setting key in the ON position when the setting key is in the ON position. The setting key can be removed from the setting key insertion hole 73 by rotating the setting key located at the ON position to the left to move it to the OFF position, and then pulling it out from the setting key insertion hole 73 (OFF operation).

When the start operation is performed, a setting change command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 (step S110105, see FIG. 125). As a result, the setting change command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and the output of the normal opening sound or the special opening sound is ended, and the output of the setting change sound is started (see FIG. 132). The setting change sound continues to be output while the change operation is being performed.

When the end operation is performed, a change end command is sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 (step S110404, see FIG. 129). As a result, the change end command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and the output of the setting change sound is ended (see FIG. 133). Furthermore, when the main control device 101 transmits the change end command, it transmits a front door command to the display control device 81 (step S110406, see FIG. 129). As a result, front door command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and if the set value is between 1 and 6, output of the normal opening sound is started, and when the set value is 7, the output of the special opening sound is started. is started (see FIG. 131).

When the end operation is performed to end the setting change operation, the front door 12 is closed. When the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state, a front door command is transmitted from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81. As a result, front door command processing is performed on the display control device 81 side, and output of the normal opening sound or special opening sound is terminated (see FIG. 131). At this time, if the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is in the lit state in the normal mode, will be in the off state for 30 seconds.

FIG. 134 shows a series of operations performed when setting the probability of winning, the relationship between the set value, and the notification sound to be announced.

For example, if the setting value is changed to 7 from a situation where the setting value is one of 1 to 6, before the setting key is turned ON and after the setting key is turned OFF, that is, The notification sound for notifying the opening of the front door 12 changes before and after the setting change operation starts and ends. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall where the present slot machine 10 is installed that the set value is 7. In addition, by notifying when the front door 12 is open, if the administrator of the game hall wants to change the setting value to a value other than 7, the front door 12 can be closed and opened. Settings can be changed without any work.

When the front door 12 is closed, if the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, will be turned off for 30 seconds. This makes it possible to notify the administrator of the game hall that the setting value is 7 even in a situation where it is difficult to close the front door 12 and perform a setting change operation.

Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, when the front door 12 is opened, the opening sound is different depending on whether the set value is 7 or when the set value is one of 1 to 6. . Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can change the setting value to 7 depending on whether or not the special opening sound is output, without having to perform a setting change operation and check the setting value displayed on the payout number display section 62. You can check whether it exists or not.

Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, which notifies you of whether or not the setting value is 7 by means of a notification sound that notifies you of the opening of the front door 12, even when an administrator of a gaming hall or the like performs a setting change operation, It is possible to notify whether the set value is 7 or not. For example, when an error such as a hopper empty error occurs, the front door 12 is closed in order to resolve the error, such as replenishing the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 with medals or operating the reset switch 72. It is common to leave it open. In a situation where the error has not been resolved, a notification sound notifying the occurrence of the error is output, but when the error is resolved and the reset switch 72 is operated, the front door command is sent to the display control device 81. This is because the normal opening sound or the special opening sound is output by being transmitted to the user.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that different notifications can be executed when the set value is 7 and when the set value is one of 1 to 6. With this configuration, it becomes possible to notify that the set value is 7, and to prompt the user to perform a setting change operation to change the set value to any one of 1 to 6. As a result, as setting 7, it is possible to set, for example, a winning probability for event sales that gives a higher machine discount than other setting values.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the setting value is 7, a special opening sound is output at the timing when the setting change operation is completed. With this configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that 7 has been stored as the set value, and it is also possible to reduce the effort required to change the set value. For example, it is possible to configure the system to notify that the set value is 7 after the front door 12 is closed, but in such a configuration, the front door 12 must be opened before performing the setting change operation. This is because it requires work.

When a setting change operation is being performed, the configuration is such that the setting value is not notified that it is 7. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid notification every time the reset switch 72 is operated and the set value becomes 7. As a result, it becomes possible to have the operator who performs the setting change work perform the above-mentioned work without making him/her feel annoyed.

When it is determined that the set value is 7 in a situation where the front door 12 is opened, a special opening sound is output. With this configuration, the administrator of the game hall, etc., can change the setting depending on whether or not the special opening sound is output, without having to perform a setting change operation and check the setting value displayed on the payout number display section 62. You can check whether the value is 7 or not. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the set value is 7 or not.

When the front door 12 is opened, a different opening sound is output depending on whether the set value is 7 or when the set value is one of 1 to 6. Indeed, instead of performing a process to notify that the set value is 7 in the front door command process as in this slot machine 10, a new process to notify that the set value is 7 has been added. It is also possible to have a configuration in which they are provided independently. However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a concern that the processing configuration may become complicated depending on the timing of activating the process for notification, which process is prioritized over other processes, and the like. However, in the present slot machine 10 which notifies whether the set value is 7 based on the difference in the opening sound of the front door 12, the front door 12 is opened while suppressing the processing configuration from becoming complicated. It becomes possible to notify both this and whether or not the set value is 7.

When the front door 12 is switched from the open state to the closed state, if the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally turned on, is turned off for 30 seconds. With this configuration, it is possible to make the change in the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63 function as a final means of checking whether the set value is 7 or not. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the chance that the administrator of the game hall or the like forgets to change the setting value from 7. In addition, since the upper lamp 63 is configured to return to the on state after 30 seconds, the work to return the upper lamp 63 to the on state becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the labor when the set value is set to 7. Become.

A reset switch 72 and a setting key insertion hole 73 are provided in a power supply box 70, the power supply box 70 is provided inside the casing 11, and the front open side of the casing 11 is covered with the front door 12. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to create a configuration in which it is difficult to perform a setting change operation without opening the front door 12, and it is possible to suppress unauthorized attempts to change setting values. .

The end operation of the setting change operation is performed by turning on the start lever 41 and then turning off the setting key. By configuring the configuration to include the operation of the start lever 41 and the operation of the setting key as requirements for the termination operation, it is possible to make fraudulent acts difficult, and to prevent the termination operation from being performed due to noise or the like. It is possible to reduce the chances of erroneous determination. In addition, by detecting the ON edge of the start lever 41 and detecting the OFF edge of the setting key, the operation of the setting key is more reliable than, for example, a configuration that detects the OFF signal of the setting key. It becomes possible to detect

That is, some conventional setting change operations include detecting an OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a as a requirement for the termination operation. In such a configuration, even if the setting key is turned ON as a starting operation and the setting key is immediately pulled out from the setting key insertion hole 73, the requirements for the ending operation are satisfied. For this reason, there is a concern that the requirement to detect the OFF signal from the setting key detection sensor 73a may not contribute in any way to the termination operation from the perspective of preventing fraud.

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10 that detects the OFF edge of the setting key, if the setting key is turned on as a start operation and the setting key is immediately pulled out of the setting key insertion hole 73, the start lever 41 is turned on. Later, it will be necessary to turn on the setting key again. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to change the set value normally, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

The setting key OFF wait process is executed 10 times in a row after "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area of the first sensor buffer and "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area. The configuration is such that the process ends when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the area. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneously detecting an OFF edge due to noise or the like.

When the setting key OFF wait process is completed, that is, when an end operation is performed, the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the setting value in the setting value storage area is updated when the reset switch 72 is operated, but in such a configuration, the setting value in the setting value storage area can be updated without performing the termination operation. There is a concern that the setting value may be changed illegally. On the other hand, in this configuration where the current setting value is stored in the setting value storage area when the termination operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the setting value stored in the setting value storage area from being changed without the termination operation being performed. This can be avoided, and the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

When a change operation is performed, the set value is saved in the display buffer, and the saved set value is displayed on the payout number display section 62. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the operator who performs the change operation to select the setting value intended by the change operation relatively easily.

When determining whether an ON edge or an OFF edge has been detected, an interrupt wait process is performed prior to the determination, and the system waits until a timer interrupt process is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether an ON edge or an OFF edge has been detected based on the latest status of the signals from the start detection sensor 41a, reset detection sensor 72a, and setting key detection sensor 73a. As a result, it is possible to avoid detecting the ON edge multiple times for one operation of the reset switch 72, for example, and update the set value multiple times for one operation of the reset switch 72. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions that would otherwise occur.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(1) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the main game is started as is, but all the reels 32L , 32M, and 32R may be slowed down for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds), then returned to a steady rotation speed, and then the main game may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the pseudo game will end through a change in the rotational speed of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the main game continues as it is, but all the reels 32L , 32M, and 32R may be pseudo-stopped before proceeding to the main game, or one or two reels may be pseudo-stopped before proceeding to the main game.

In the case of a configuration in which one or two reels are pseudo-stopped and then the main game is started, the pseudo-game is It becomes possible to quickly transition from the game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, the transition to the main game can be notified by the reels that have stopped pseudo-stopping starting to rotate again, so the player cannot tell whether it is a pseudo-game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

(3) In the first embodiment, if the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is ended after all rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping all of the rotating reels. In the case of such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform a process of starting rotation of only the reels that have been pseudo-stopped, so it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo-game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, the transition to the main game can be notified by the reels that have stopped pseudo-stopping starting to rotate again, so the player cannot tell whether it is a pseudo-game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the payment switch 59, the same processing as when a pseudo-stop command is generated is performed. It may be configured to perform different processing than when a command is issued. In the case of such a configuration, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to pseudo-stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the settlement switch 59 is operated to pseudo-stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to change the stopping result of the symbol depending on the case. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the payment switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 clear, and it becomes possible for the player to select which one to operate.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are immediately brought to a pseudo stop at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the stop position of the symbols. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause an event such as, for example, a symbol stopping at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped so that the combination of "Red 7" symbols does not stop on the middle line L2 even if the winning lottery is won. let

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the stop position when the pseudo-stop command is generated.

(5) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a pseudo game, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed, but this is not limited to the operation of the settlement switch 59, and the game Any operation that does not affect the progress of the game after the start of the game is sufficient. Therefore, it may be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, or it may be configured that it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the second credit input switch 57 is operated. . A configuration may also be adopted in which it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit input switch 58 is operated.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of determining whether a cancel operation has been performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo game is ended when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without a pseudo stop command being generated.

(6) In the first embodiment, when the payment switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, all rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one of them is pseudo-stopped. In such a configuration, if one reel is in a pseudo-stop, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice in order to make all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stop.

(7) In the first embodiment, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is immediately ended and at least one reel is pseudo stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation, all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped, but the process performed when ending the pseudo-game is different depending on the number of reels that are pseudo-stopped or the number of pseudo-stop commands generated. Good to have.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, one reel will be pseudo-stopped while the other two reels will not be pseudo-stopped and a pseudo-game will be played. Terminate it. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game is ended after the other two reels are pseudo-stopped. When a settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is ended without pseudo-stopping the other reel.

(8) In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the reels in the pseudo game and the rotation speed of the reels in the main game are equal, but the rotation speed of the reels in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the main game are the same. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the rotational speeds of and the rotational speeds are different.

(9) In the first embodiment, the stop information setting process is performed after the rotation start process, but the stop information setting process is performed before determining whether a pseudo stop command has occurred. If the structure is configured to perform this, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, or the stop information setting process may be performed after the instruction monitor display process is performed.

(10) In the first embodiment, a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win and a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win are stored in advance. In this case, when a pseudo-stop command is generated, the slip table is referred to. However, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined in step S1103 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1104, and if it is a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win, the stop symbol number is "15". If the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, set "15" as the stop symbol number, and the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel. If it is 32R, set "16" as the stop symbol number. Since the stop symbol number has been set, the processing in step S1107 and step S1108 is not performed.

In the case of such a configuration, in addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a sliding table in advance, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. .

(11) In the first embodiment, the structure is such that it is possible to slide a maximum of 19 symbols in the pseudo game, but similarly to the main game, within a predetermined time after the pseudo stop command is generated. A pseudo-stop configuration may also be used.

However, in such a configuration, if the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, it will not be possible to slide four symbols due to the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information. Possible.

Therefore, when adopting a configuration that performs the same stop control as the main game, the stop information for the main game and the stop information for the pseudo game are set in the stop information setting process. At this time, the stop information for the main game is set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for the pseudo game is set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

In such a configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process becomes longer, there is no need to set the stop information for the main game when transitioning from the pseudo game to the main game, It becomes possible to quickly shift to playing games.

At this time, when setting pseudo game stop information based on the additional lottery win, set the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game as the pseudo game stop information, When setting pseudo game stop information based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of losing in the main game is set as the pseudo game stop information. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo game and the stop information for the real game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the first embodiment, the pseudo game stop information is not set in the stop information setting process, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in FIG. 15, it is determined in step S403 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. Then, when the pseudo game flag is set, in the stop information setting process, the stop information for the pseudo game is set instead of the stop information for the main game. If the pseudo game flag is not set, stop information for the main game is set in the stop information setting process. At this time, if the pseudo game stop information is set, that is, after the pseudo game ends, the pseudo game stop information is rewritten to the real game stop information. That is, the storage area where the pseudo game stop information is set and the storage area where the real game stop information is set are the same area. Then, the configuration is such that the process of step S1104 in the stop position determination process is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the stop information storage area 106b from increasing.

At this time, when setting pseudo game stop information based on the additional lottery win, set the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game as the pseudo game stop information, When setting pseudo game stop information based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of losing in the main game is set as the pseudo game stop information. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo game and the stop information for the real game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the first embodiment, a sliding table for the pseudo game is prepared in advance, but it may also be configured to set stop information in the same way as for the main game.

(14) In the first embodiment, when the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2 in the pseudo game, a benefit is provided to notify that the net increase in the number of coins increases. Although the configuration has been described in which bonuses are awarded, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and any configuration may be used as long as a bonus that is different from the bonus that is awarded when a winning is established, such as medal payout, is awarded. Typical examples of benefits that are different from the benefits given when a prize is won include, for example, performing a setting suggestion performance, and suggesting a winning combination in the subsequent main game.

(15) In the first embodiment, the pseudo game is performed in the case of winning the additional lottery and in the case of winning the pseudo game lottery, but the conditions for performing the pseudo game are arbitrary.

For example, a pseudo game is performed in the final game of the notification mode.

For example, if a rare combination is won, a pseudo game is performed regardless of whether the additional lottery is successful or not.

(16) In the first embodiment described above, when winning the top-up lottery, the pseudo game is executed in the relevant game round, but it may also be configured to perform the pseudo-game in the next game round after winning the top-up lottery. . In the case of such a configuration, it becomes possible to start the next game round after making the player understand that he or she has won the rare combination, that is, that the additional lottery has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game round while making the player look forward to the start of the pseudo game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that the pseudo game may be executed a predetermined number of times, such as after five games, instead of the next game time.

(17) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the system does not notify whether or not an additional reel has been added. It may also be configured to notify whether or not it has been completed.

(18) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, no notification will be made as to whether or not there has been a top-up lottery, but no notification will be made as to whether or not the top-up lottery has been won. For example, although the remaining number of payouts displayed in the main game is updated, the remaining number of payouts displayed in the main game may not be updated even if the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced number of additional coins may be notified in a subsequent pseudo game, or may be notified in the final game of the notification mode.

(19) In the first embodiment, the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game, but the structure is not limited to this, and there is a means for notifying that it is a pseudo game. Any configuration is sufficient as long as it includes the following. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a pseudo game lamp is lit only during the pseudo game, or a configuration may be adopted in which the stopped reels are swung up and down during the pseudo game to notify that the pseudo game is in progress. .

(20) In the second embodiment, the standby process is performed for 100 msec, but the length can be set to any length as long as it can be expected that the swinging of the reel will settle down.

(21) In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the standby process is performed to wait for 100 msec after determining that the instruction monitor is not being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor, but this is not limited to such a position. The standby process can be performed at any position after determining that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, after determining the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the closer the process is to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, the more it becomes necessary to set a longer time than 100 msec as the waiting time in the standby process, so it is necessary to start the next game round. There are concerns that it may take a long time until this becomes possible.

(22) In the second embodiment, after it is determined that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. However, after it is determined that all stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number. It may be configured to determine whether or not it has occurred. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured to determine whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number after transmitting the operation end command. In other words, the configuration may be such that the all reel stop completion command is sent after the operation end command is sent.

(23) In the second embodiment, after sending the all reel stop completion command, it is determined whether all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. The configuration may be such that the all reel stop completion command is sent after determining that the switches 42 to 44 are not operated. At this time, if the configuration is such that the operation end command is sent after the all reel stop completion command is sent, it can be expected that the same effects as in the second embodiment can be achieved.

(24) In the second embodiment, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop symbol number, and if all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated. Although the order of determining whether the state has been reached and the order of transmitting the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are the same, they may be different. For example, after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. On the other hand, the command transmission order is such that the all reel stop completion command is transmitted after the operation end command. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a concern that the processing configuration will become complicated and the storage capacity will increase.

(25) In the second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command is sent when the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number, but the left reel A configuration may also be adopted in which the stop completion commands for the reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R are transmitted individually. More specifically, in step S2204, if it is determined that the left reel 32L and right reel 32R have reached the stop symbol number, but the middle reel 32M has not reached the stop symbol number, the left reel stop completion command is issued. Send a right reel stop completion command and wait until the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number. If the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number, the process advances to step S2206 after transmitting the middle reel stop completion command. In such a configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output the third notification sound when all of the left reel stop completion command, middle reel stop completion command, and right reel stop completion command are received, the second It can be expected that the same effects as in the embodiment will be achieved.

The same applies to the operation end command, and a configuration may be adopted in which the left operation end command, middle operation end command, and right operation end command are sent individually.

(26) In the second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are sent in the main game, but in the structure in which a pseudo game is performed as in the first embodiment, In a pseudo game, an all reel stop completion command or an operation end command may be transmitted.

(27) In the third embodiment, both the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured with one byte, but it goes without saying that they may be configured with two or more bytes.

(28) In the third embodiment, the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured to be the same byte, but they may be configured to be different bytes. For example, the pseudo game flag storage area may consist of 1 byte, and the header may consist of 2 bytes. Even in such a configuration, if the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area and a predetermined 1 byte of the header information, the above The same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(29) In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the header information transmitted in the case of the main game is stored in advance, but this configuration is changed.

In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo game flag storage area and the fifth bit of the header are blank, but the fifth bit is configured to have a function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. When clearing the pseudo game flag (see step S611, FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0", and the pseudo game flag storage area is The configuration is such that the fifth bit is set to "1". When setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the 6th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1", and the 5th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0". The configuration is to set.

It is clear that even with such a configuration, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(30) In the third embodiment, the information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body or in the header. . Even with these configurations, the body to be sent is created by adding pseudo game judgment information to the body information, or the header to be sent is created by adding pseudo game judgment information to the header information. In this case, it is clear that the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(31) In the third embodiment, the header is created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, but the header is created by performing other predetermined operations such as subtraction. Even in this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(32) In the third embodiment, the command to be sent when it is a pseudo game is different from the command to be sent when it is to be a real game, but this configuration is changed.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be sent when the device is in the BB state is different from a command to be sent when the device is in the non-BB state. In such a configuration, a BB status storage area is provided for storing information on whether the BB status is present, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the BB status storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a command to be transmitted in a normal section and a command to be transmitted in an advantageous section are different. In such a configuration, an advantageous section storage area is provided that stores information on whether the section is an advantageous section, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the advantageous section storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be sent in the notification mode (AT game) and a command to be sent in the non-notification mode (non-AT game) are different. In such a configuration, a notification mode storage area is provided that stores information as to whether the notification mode is set, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be transmitted in a three-coin game and a command to be transmitted in a two-coin game are different. In such a configuration, a bet number storage area is provided to store information as to whether or not it is a 3-card game, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and header information. When configured, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, there are commands to be sent when the player is in the BB1 state (BB state for a 3-card game), commands to be sent when the player is in the BB2 state (BB state for a 2-card game), and commands to be sent when the player is in a non-BB state. The configuration is such that the . In such a configuration, a gaming state storage area is provided that stores information on which gaming state is in, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the gaming state storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved. In addition, in order to include information indicating which of the three types of gaming states is in the header, it is necessary to prepare at least two bits for storing the above information in the gaming state storage area and the header. be.

Note that it is naturally possible to combine each of the above configurations. For example, by adding the pseudo game determination information and the information stored in the bet number storage area to the header information, it can be determined whether it is a pseudo game or not, and whether it is a 3-coin game or a 2-coin game. It is also possible to create a header containing the following. In addition, by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, a header that includes whether or not it is a pseudo game is created, and by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information, the 3-coin game It is also possible to create a body including whether the game is a 2-card game or a 2-card game.

(33) In the third embodiment, when transmitting the rotation start command, stop command, and stop command, the header is created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information. It goes without saying that when transmitting other commands such as result commands, the header may be created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area may be electrically connected to the output port. In such a configuration, when the pseudo game flag is set (“1” is stored in the 6th bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the pseudo game flag is cleared (“1” is stored in the 6th bit). If "0" is stored in the 6th bit, an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area has the function of information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and outputs a signal to the outside of the slot machine 10 indicating that it is a pseudo game. It becomes possible to provide a function as information used when doing so. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the pseudo game flag storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, the result display is started when the effect switch 67 is operated once, but if the result display is started based on the operation of the effect switch 67, , the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Therefore, for example, it may be configured to start displaying the results when the production switch 67 is repeatedly pressed a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, or it may start displaying the results when the production switch 67 is pressed for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds. It may also be a configuration.

(36) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the press-down display is started when the operation end command is received, but the configuration may be such that the press-down display is started when the all reel stop completion command is received. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the press-down display is started when a section command is received, or a configuration in which the press-down display is started when a status command is received. In any of these configurations, the press-down display is started after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, so that the above-described effects can be achieved.

(37) In the fourth embodiment, the press-down display is started when an operation end command is received, but for example, the press-down display may be started at the timing when it is decided to execute the press-down display in the production determination process. The configuration may be such that the press-down display starts in the middle of a game round. In such a configuration, in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined in step S3601 whether a completion flag is set. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes effective immediately as in the case where the press effect is not executed, and when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes effective immediately. If the completion flag is not set, the menu start operation becomes valid based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, as described in the fourth embodiment.

(38) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after the press display starts, but when the operation end command is received, the value of the first timer is set to 1000. Alternatively, the first timer may be set to 1000 when an all reel stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the first timer value may be set to 1000 when a section command is received, or the first timer value may be set to 1000 when a status command is received. Even with these configurations, the above-described effects can be achieved because only the timing at which the first timer starts operating changes.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the second timer value is set to 300 when the result display is executed to the end, but when the result display is started, the second timer value is set to 500. It may also be configured to set. It is clear that even with such a configuration, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

Note that if the configuration is such that the completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300, and the result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the fourth embodiment described above may be used. The display counter used in the embodiment becomes unnecessary.

Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether the value of the second timer is 300 or less in step S4104 of the press effect processing shown in FIG. 61, the completion flag becomes unnecessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, the second timer value is set to 300 when the result display is executed to the end, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, when the result display is executed to the end, it is determined whether the value of the first timer is 0 or not. Then, if the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer becomes 0, that is, the value of the second timer is not referenced. The configuration is such that the result display process ends without setting the timer value to 300. On the other hand, if the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation is valid when the value of the second timer reaches 0, not the first timer, so set the value of the second timer to 300. After that, the result display process ends.

In the case of the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, in a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, the second timer does not operate and the second timer does not operate. In a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the second timer, the first timer can be configured not to operate, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

(41) In the fourth embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with the first timer, and the menu start operation is sometimes enabled based on the value of the first timer. 101 may be provided with a first timer, and a time elapsed command may be sent to the display control device 81 when the value of the first timer becomes 0. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the time elapsed command is received, the display control device 81 is configured to end the press effect processing and enable the subsequent menu start operation, If the completion flag is not set when the command is received, the push effect processing is ended when the value of the second timer becomes 0, and the subsequent menu start operation is made valid. With such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, the main controller 101 can specify the timing at which the press-down display starts and the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of malfunction occurring.

Note that the timing for setting the value of the first timer to 1000 may be configured such that it is set when it is determined in step S3304 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, or it may be set when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to the stop position in step S3306. The stop switches 42 to 44 may be set when it is determined that they are not operated. Alternatively, it may be configured to be set at another timing, such as after transmitting the operation end command.

(42) In the fourth embodiment, the result display that is executed when the player has won the additional lottery, and the result display that is executed when the additional lottery has not been won, are executed until the end. Although a configuration in which the required time is the same is used, it goes without saying that different configurations may be used. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after displaying the results to the end, when the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, the result It is possible to make the time from when the display is executed to the end until the menu start operation becomes effective to be constant.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18000 in the press effect processing, but if the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, the value of the standby timer is The configuration may be such that the press effect processing is ended after setting 18,000 to 18,000. In the case of such a configuration, the customer waiting effect will start approximately 180 seconds after the press effect process ends.

(45) In the fourth embodiment, the menu start operation is enabled immediately when the press effect is not executed, but the menu start operation becomes effective after about 10 seconds even when the press effect is not executed. It may be configured as follows. For example, in the operation end command process shown in FIG. 55, when it is determined that the operation end command has been received, the configuration for realizing this configuration is to set the standby timer value to 18000 and set the first timer value to 1000. The configuration is to set. In step S3505, the value of the first timer is not set to 1000. Then, in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, when it is determined that the effect flag is not set, it is configured to determine whether the value of the first timer becomes 0 or not. If it is determined that the value of the first timer has become 0, the configuration is such that the processes shown from step S3603 onwards are performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment, when a menu start operation is performed, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, but the menu screen display section is provided separately from the auxiliary display section 65, and the A configuration may be adopted in which the menu screen is always displayed on the menu screen display section.

(47) In the fourth embodiment, the effect switch 67 has the function of advancing the press effect and the function of displaying the menu screen. It may be configured to be provided separately from the switch 67.

(48) In the fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes the game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and clear game history, but the types and number of selection menus are arbitrary. It is. Therefore, the configuration may include a payout table and volume adjustment, or the configuration may include only volume adjustment. In addition, in a configuration having only one type of game information to be displayed, it goes without saying that when the effect switch 67 is operated, the game information may be directly displayed instead of the menu screen.

(49) In the fourth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that the success or failure of the additional lottery is notified in the press effect, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration is such that it is configured to notify whether or not the transition lottery has been won in the chance mode. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the winning combination.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration using a timer that is subtracted has been described, but it goes without saying that a timer that is added may be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that when the value of the first timer is set to 1000, the subtraction of the first timer is started, but this configuration is changed. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at an arbitrary timing before starting the press display, such as at the timing when a start command is generated. Then, in step S3505 (see FIG. 55) of the operation end command processing, the configuration is such that subtraction of the first timer is permitted. Even in the case of such a configuration, the operation timing of the first timer is when the process in step S3505 is performed, so that the effects described in the fourth embodiment can be achieved.

(52) In the fourth embodiment, if a bet number command indicating that the number of bets has become 1 or more is received during the press effect process, the press effect process is ended and the process shifts to a start command waiting process. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In the case of such a configuration, the press-down display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 ends at the timing when the player bets the medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the fourth embodiment described above, the explanation was given from this perspective by focusing on the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when the press effect is executed, but the customer waiting effect when the press effect is executed. It is clear that the same effects as those described above can be achieved with respect to the timing of transition to . This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after the press effect process is finished.

(54) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the exhaustion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the last game of the notification mode, but all reels 32L, 32M, 32R It may also be configured to display an end screen after stopping.

(55) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the exhaustion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the last game in the notification mode, but at least one reel stops. If the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed beforehand, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. This is because sufficient time for displaying the end screen can be secured.

At this time, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed after the two reels have stopped, it is possible to know whether or not a bell has been won, at least if the push order bell is won. It becomes possible to display the difference in the number of sheets at the end of the notification mode as the number of sheets.

(56) In the fifth embodiment, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, but in addition to this, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends when the number of section games reaches 1500. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the notification mode is configured to end depending on the number of games played under the notification mode, but the notification mode is configured to end depending on the number of notifications in the order of operations performed under the notification mode. Good too. Even in such a configuration, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed not based on the reception of the start command but based on the reception of the lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won, the above-mentioned fifth The effects described in the embodiment can be achieved.

(58) In the fifth embodiment described above, only the display control device 81 is configured to know the number of post-notification games, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which only the main control device 101 is aware of the number of post-notification games. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 know the number of later notification games.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, when winning the top-up lottery, the number of top-up games is notified in a pseudo game, and the number of top-up games is notified in a revival performance. It may be configured to notify the number of additional games only in the revival performance.

(60) In the fifth embodiment, an additional lottery is performed when a rare combination is won under the notification mode, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the notification mode continues with a revival effect. Any configuration is sufficient as long as it can notify the user of the situation. For example, the notification mode may be configured to end after 50 games in one set, and a set number additional lottery (resurrection lottery or continuous lottery) may be performed in a predetermined game such as when transitioning to the notification mode or at the end of one set.

(61) In the fifth embodiment described above, the conditions for determining the end of the notification mode with the difference number of sheets of 2400 are that the remaining number of games is greater than 50 and that the difference number of sheets is greater than 2200. Setting of conditions is arbitrary. Only the number of remaining games may be set as a condition, or only the difference in the number of sheets may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, the ending effect is started from the next game when the end of the notification mode is confirmed due to the number of difference sheets of 2400, but the timing to start the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be started from the next game when the difference in number of sheets reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be started from the next game when the difference in the number of sheets reaches 2250. That is, it is sufficient to start with the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode, but the end screen is displayed only in the first game, and from the second game onwards, the end screen is displayed continuously. It may also be configured to perform auxiliary effects.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the notification mode ends, and the advantageous section does not end under the chance mode. It may also be configured such that an event that terminates occurs. For example, in addition to the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode under the chance mode, a lottery for ending the advantageous section may be performed, or the configuration may be configured to transition to the chance mode after the notification mode ends.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition from the normal section to the notification mode is not performed, but a configuration may be adopted in which the transition is made to the notification mode.

(66) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestion jewel or the confirmed jewel is displayed if the lottery to enter the chance mode is not won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the suggested jewel or the confirmed jewel is displayed when the transfer lottery is won.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggestion or confirmed orb, but any configuration that suggests or informs advantageous information advantageous to the player may be used. , the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. Examples of advantageous information include, for example, in a configuration that includes multiple chance modes with different winning probabilities for the lottery to transition to the notification mode, a configuration that suggests or informs the destination of the chance mode, and a configuration that suggests or informs the destination of the chance mode, or a ceiling game number under the chance mode (transition game In a configuration in which a plurality of numbers can be set, a typical example is a configuration in which the number of ceiling games to be set is suggested or notified.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the guaranteed orb is displayed after the 6th game of the normal section, but the confirmed orb is also displayed with a predetermined probability in the 1st to 5th games of the normal section. It may also be a configuration. In other words, any configuration may be sufficient as long as the accuracy of setting suggestions increases according to the number of games played in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestion jewel and the confirmed jewel are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of displaying them is arbitrary. Furthermore, although the suggested orb and the confirmed orb are not displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, they may be continuously displayed until the chance mode is entered. Further, in a configuration capable of displaying a menu screen, when a game history is selected, the suggested orbs and confirmed orbs that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed.

(70) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is configured to display the fact that the notification mode ends and the number of medals acquired, but it may also be configured to display only that the notification mode ends. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that only the number of acquired medals is displayed. In addition, the indication that the notification mode ends is not limited to the actual text such as "end of notification mode", but also the indication that the notification mode ends by a predetermined action such as a predetermined character waving his hands while crying. You may notify.

(71) In the fifth embodiment, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of medals won is not changed after that. However, when the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode, the The display of the number of medals won may be changed depending on the game result (whether or not a prize is won). Furthermore, the display of the number of medals acquired may be changed even in the normal section.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, two winning combinations, left center right bell 1 and left center right bell 2, are provided as winning combinations in which a bell prize is established in the left center right operation order, but only one winning combination is provided. Needless to say, it's a good thing. The same applies to the left and right middle bells, middle left and right bells, middle right left bells, right left middle bells, and right middle left bells.

(73) In the sixth embodiment, for example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle left and right, the winning combination is either middle left/right bell 1, middle left/right bell 2, or the first special bell. Although the configuration is such that three small winning combinations are achieved, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the form of the bell winning that is achieved differs depending on the winning combination. For example, if you win the middle left/right bell 1, you will get a small win of 3, if you win the middle left/right bell 2, you will get a small win of 4, and if you win the 1st special bell, you will get a small win of 3. The structure is such that one prize can be won. Even in the case of such a configuration, the phenomenon that a bell prize is established in which 8 medals are paid out remains unchanged, so that the same effects as in the sixth embodiment can be achieved.

(74) In the sixth embodiment, there are six types of operation orders that can make a bell win, but the type of operation order is arbitrary. For example, there may be three types depending on which stop switch 42 to 44 is operated first, or there may be two types depending on whether the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Alternatively, there may be four types, for example, middle left and right, middle right left, right left middle, and right middle left. In addition to the above operation order, if it is also required to operate a predetermined stop switch at a predetermined timing, more than six types of bells can be set in the order of pressing.

(75) In the sixth embodiment, the left middle right bells 1 and 2 and the left and right middle bells 1 and 2 are included in the push order group 1, while the winning combination in which a bell prize is established in the above operation order is included in the push order group. 2, but the winning combinations with all the operation orders that can make a bell win are set as push order group 1, and the winning combinations with a predetermined operation order that can make a bell win are put into the push order group. If the configuration is not included in 2, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the sixth embodiment.

(76) In the sixth embodiment, the winning combinations belonging to push order group 1 have the same probability of winning, but the winning combinations belonging to push order group 1 may have different winning probabilities. For example, in push order group 1, the point values PV of the left middle right bells 1 and 2 and the left and right middle bells 1 and 2 are set to 1960, and the point values PV of the other push order bells are set to 1990. Even in such a configuration, if the operation order is always notified when the push order group 2 is selected, the operation order will be notified when the operation order is not notified under notification mode A and notification mode B. Differences in the frequency of winning bells depending on the order can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the slot machine 10, and it is possible to allow players to enjoy the game regardless of the amount of knowledge.

(77) In the sixth embodiment, the operation order is always notified if push order group 2 is selected in the notification mode, but the operation order is announced with a predetermined probability such as 90%, for example. You can also use it as Even with such a configuration, when the operation order is not notified under notification mode A and notification mode B, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winning a bell depending on the operation order.

In addition, if the operation order is not announced in a situation where the push order group 2 is selected, it is desirable to display "x??" on the auxiliary display section 65 indicating that the operation order is based on the center or right. .

(78) In the sixth embodiment, by making a determination according to the push order group in the navigation determination process, when the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, the stop switch 42 to 44, the probability of winning a bell is the same, but this configuration will be changed.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing another example of the lottery table. In addition, in FIG. 90, in order to facilitate comparison with the sixth embodiment, the first to fourth special bells are described and the point value PV is set to 0 (not won). These are unnecessary.

1980 is set as the point value PV for left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left middle bell 1, left middle bell 2, middle left bell 1, middle left right bell 2, middle right left bell 1, 4070 is set as the point value PV for the middle right left bell 2, the right left middle bell 1, the right left middle bell 2, the right middle left bell 1, and the right middle left bell 2.

Left middle right bell 1, left middle right bell 2, left and right middle bell 1, left and right middle bell 2 are the left correct bells, middle left and right bells 1, middle left and right bells 2, middle right left bell 1, middle right left bell 2 are the middle correct bells. Let right-left center bell 1, right-left middle bell 2, right-center left bell 1, and right-center left bell 2 be the correct right bells. At this time, the winning probability of the left correct answer bell is 7920/65535, the winning probability of the middle correct answer bell is 16280/65535, and the winning probability of the right correct answer bell is 16280/65535.

In notification mode A, if the left correct answer bell is won, it is determined that navigation will be performed with a probability of 0/7920, if the middle correct answer bell is won, it is determined that the navigation is performed with a probability of 8360/16280, and when the right correct answer bell is won, it is determined that the navigation is performed with a probability of 0/7920. It is determined that navigation will be performed with a probability of 8,360 minutes.

In the case of such a configuration, the number of values determined not to be navigated is 7920 regardless of whether it is a left correct answer bell, a middle correct answer bell, or a right correct answer bell. Therefore, when the order of operations is not notified in the notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same no matter what order of operations the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

In notification mode B, if the left correct answer bell is won, it is determined that navigation will be performed with a probability of 1920/7920, if the middle correct answer bell is won, it is determined that the navigation is performed with a probability of 10280/16280, and when the right correct answer bell is won, it is determined that the navigation is performed with a probability of 10280/16280. It is determined that the navigation will be performed with a probability of 10280/10.

In the case of such a configuration, the number of values determined not to perform navigation is 6000 regardless of whether it is a left correct answer bell, a middle correct answer bell, or a right correct answer bell. Therefore, when the order of operations is not notified in the notification mode, the probability of winning a bell is the same no matter what order of operations the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

(79) In the sixth embodiment, the configuration has three types of notification mode A, notification mode B, and notification mode C, which have different navigation rates, but it may also be configured to have only notification mode A or notification mode B. Alternatively, it may be configured to include any two of the above three types. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which there are four or more types of notification modes with different navigation rates.

(80) In the sixth embodiment, when transitioning from the chance mode to the notification mode, the configuration is such that the notification mode is started from the notification mode A, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the notification mode B is set with a predetermined probability. Alternatively, the configuration may be started from notification mode C.

(81) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion effect is always performed when the operation order is not notified in the notification mode, but the promotion effect may be performed with a predetermined probability.

(82) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion lottery is performed when a bell win is achieved in the game round in which the promotion effect is performed, but the promotion lottery is performed regardless of whether or not a bell win is achieved. You can also use it as Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a point lottery is performed when a bell prize is achieved in a game round in which a promotion effect is performed, and a configuration in which the navigation rate is increased when a predetermined point value is reached.

(83) In the sixth embodiment, the promotion lottery can be held if the operation order is not announced in the notification mode, but instead of or in addition to this, the value of the transition game number counter is increased. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an additional lottery can be held.

(84) In the sixth embodiment, when a rare combination is won under the notification mode, an additional lottery is performed, but instead of or in addition to this, a promotion lottery may be performed. .

(85) In the sixth embodiment described above, "???" is displayed in the promotion performance to allow the player to select one operation order from six operation orders, but this configuration has been changed. do.

For example, the stop switch to be operated first is displayed as "1??", "?1?", "??1", and the player is asked to select the stop switch to be operated from the second time onwards. .

Alternatively, the stop switch to be operated last is displayed such as "3??", "?3?", "?3", and the player is asked to select the stop switch to be operated first and second. do.

(86) In the sixth embodiment, if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first in the normal section and chance mode, even if the transition lottery is won, the result is invalidated. However, such configuration may be changed.

For example, if the transition lottery is performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to be high, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop When the switch 44 is operated for the first time, the probability of winning the transition lottery is set to be low.

For example, the configuration is such that the transition lottery is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the transition lottery is performed, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. If it is manipulated, the transfer lottery will not be held.

(87) In the sixth embodiment, when the push order bell is won, either a bell winning in which eight medals are paid out or a winning in which one medal is paid out is always established. However, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an order of operations that does not result in a bell winning, a configuration may be adopted in which a loss may occur in which no winning is achieved.

(88) In the seventh embodiment, if 700 3-card games are played without winning the transition lottery under the chance mode, the system shifts to the notification mode from the next game. It is also possible to configure the system to shift to the notification mode after 3 to 5 games of confrontation effects, similar to the case where the player wins. Furthermore, if 697 3-card games are played without winning the transition lottery under the chance mode, the system may be configured to transition to the notification mode after the three-game confrontation performance.

(89) In the seventh embodiment, when the number of missing games is one or more, the missing number of games is added to the value of the transfer game number counter, but it may not be added. In such a configuration, if you have not won the additional lottery, the notification mode will end in the middle of the confrontation performance, and if you have won the additional lottery, a part of the number of additional games will be played during the confrontation performance. It will be digested.

(90) In the seventh embodiment, when winning an additional lottery, the number of additional games in that game is added to the value of the transition game counter, but the value of the confrontation game counter becomes 0. In other words, after the end of the confrontation performance, the number of additional games may be added to the value of the transition game number counter.

(91) In the seventh embodiment, when a rare role is won, the confrontation effect lottery is performed regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won. However, even if the rare role is not won, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a showdown performance lottery is performed.

(92) In the seventh embodiment, any value from 3 to 5 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, but the value to be acquired is arbitrary. The configuration may be such that only 3 is acquired as the number of confrontation games, or any value from 2 to 10 may be acquired.

(93) In the seventh embodiment, the value obtained in the number of confrontation games lottery is the same in the case where the additional lottery is won and the case where the additional lottery is not won. A different configuration may be used.

For example, if you have won the additional lottery, the number of confrontation games will be any value from 3 to 5, and if you have not won the additional lottery, the number of confrontation games will be 5 to 7. The configuration is to obtain the value of . In such a configuration, if the showdown performance continues for six or more games, it will be confirmed that the player will not win the additional lottery, but the chance that the notification mode will be extended due to the addition of the missing number of games increases, resulting in players' disappointment. It becomes possible to suitably alleviate the

(94) In the seventh embodiment, when winning the confrontation performance lottery, a predetermined performance is performed in all games corresponding to the number of confrontation games, but the performance is not performed like a so-called precursor performance. A configuration in which a game exists may also be used. For example, if 7 is obtained as the number of confrontation games, an inciting effect that can be completed in one game will be performed in the 1st and 3rd games, no effect will be performed in the 2nd and 4th games, and 5 to 7 games will be performed. The structure is designed to create a confrontational effect on the eyes.

(95) In the seventh embodiment, the number of games in which the showdown effect is executed in the notification mode is not changed during the course of the game, but it may be changed in the middle.

(96) In the seventh embodiment, the structure includes a confrontation effect and a pseudo game as auxiliary effects for informing whether or not the bonus lottery has been won, but a structure may be adopted in which the pseudo game is not provided.

(97) In the seventh embodiment, it goes without saying that in addition to the showdown effect, an auxiliary effect that can be completed in one game may be provided. At this time, the display control device 81 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the auxiliary effect, since there is no shortage of games as in the case of a confrontation effect.

(98) In the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that in the notification mode, the presence or absence of a win in the additional lottery is notified through a confrontation effect, but this configuration will be changed.

For example, in a configuration in which a stock lottery is conducted in the notification mode, whether or not the stock lottery has been won is notified through a confrontation effect.

For example, if the notification mode includes notification mode A and notification mode B that can increase the number of games that can be played in notification mode A with high probability, and if you win the transition lottery in notification mode A, notification mode B It is possible to play the game a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, and then the system returns to the notification mode A, and the presence or absence of a win in the transition lottery is notified by a confrontation performance.

(99) In the seventh embodiment, a configuration has been described in which only a confrontation effect is provided as an effect performed over a plurality of games, but in addition to the confrontation effect, there is also an effect performed over a plurality of games. Needless to say, it may be configured as a configuration. In such a configuration, for example, if performances A and B are provided as performances to be performed over three games, and performances C and D are provided as performances to be performed over four games, the performances can be performed on the main control device 101 side. The configuration may be such that the performance period (3 or 4) to be executed is determined, and the display control device 81 side determines which performance to perform according to the performance period.

(100) In the seventh embodiment, if the display control device 81 side determines to execute a defeat showdown effect in the chance mode, and the 700th three-card game occurs during the defeat showdown effect, It goes without saying that a configuration in which a defeat showdown performance is switched to a victory showdown performance may also be used.

(101) In the seventh embodiment, in the chance mode, if the transition lottery is won in the middle of the defeat showdown performance, the defeat showdown performance is ended midway and the victory showdown performance is started from the beginning. However, the configuration may be such that the number of games in which the confrontation effect is executed is changed midway through, and the content of the effect to be executed is arbitrary. Therefore, in the game round in which the winning command is received, that is, in the game round in which the transfer lottery is won, the control is not to output the confrontation performance start video data to the auxiliary display section 65, but the control to output the video data during the confrontation performance to the auxiliary display section 65. You may do so.

(102) In the eighth embodiment, the value of the navigation counter is updated when a 3-coin game is played in the chance mode, but similarly to the notification mode, 3-coin games and 2-coin games The configuration may be such that the value of the navigation counter is updated regardless of whether any of the above is performed. In the case of such a configuration, the value of the navigation counter can be updated every time a game is played in an advantageous section, which is compared to a configuration in which the navigation counter is updated according to the game mode. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data. In addition, in the chance mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the push order bell is won, or the value of the navigation counter may be updated when another winning combination is different from the push order bell such as replaying. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(103) In the eighth embodiment, in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter is updated regardless of whether a 3-coin game or a 2-coin game is played, but this is similar to the chance mode. Alternatively, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when a three-coin game is played. In the case of such a configuration, the value of the navigation counter can be updated every time a game is played in an advantageous section, which is compared to a configuration in which the navigation counter is updated according to the game mode. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data. In addition, in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the push order bell is won, or the value of the navigation counter is updated when another winning combination different from the push order bell such as replay is won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Alternatively, in the notification mode, the value of the navigation counter may be updated when the player loses the navigation lottery.

(104) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter update process is performed in the game section process, that is, the navigation counter update process is performed at the end stage of the game, but at the start stage of the game such as lottery process. It is also possible to perform the configuration in

(105) In the eighth embodiment, in the navigation counter update process, the value of the navigation counter is updated in the notification mode as well as in the chance mode, but the value of the navigation counter is updated only in the chance mode. It may also be a configuration. Specifically, a process is added before step S80201 to determine whether or not the mode is chance mode, and if the mode is the chance mode, the process proceeds to step S80201, and if the mode is not the chance mode but the notification mode, the process proceeds to step S80203. shall be. In such a configuration, the frequency of operation order notification will be higher than 50% only in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, and in the second and subsequent press order bell winning games, the operation order will be notified more than 50% of the time. Unless the mode is shifted to mode B, the operation order will be notified at a rate of 50%.

(106) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter is used to increase the frequency of notification of the operation order in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, but this configuration is changed. . When transitioning from chance mode to notification mode, a first time flag is set. In the navigation determination process, it is determined in step S80404 whether the first time flag is set, and if the first time flag is set, the first time flag is cleared and the navigation flag is set. In such a configuration, the frequency of operation order notification will be higher than 50% only in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, and in the second and subsequent press order bell winning games, the operation order will be notified more than 50% of the time. Unless the mode is shifted to mode B, the operation order will be notified at a rate of 50%.

(107) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter is used to increase the frequency of notification of the operation order in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, but this configuration is changed. . In the first push-order bell winning game after shifting to notification mode, the navigation lottery has a higher probability of winning, such as 80%, than 50%, and in the second and subsequent push-order bell winning games, the system shifts to notification mode B. Unless otherwise specified, there will be a 50% chance of winning the Navi lottery.

(108) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation lottery is performed with a winning rate of 50%, but the winning rate in the navigation lottery is arbitrary.

(109) In the eighth embodiment described above, the configuration was such that a navigation lottery is conducted in which the winning rate is 50%, but this configuration is changed. A loop counter that loops two values, 0 and 1, is provided, and the value of the loop counter is updated when the push order bell is won. If the loop counter is updated before the navigation determination process, the operation order is notified when the loop counter value is 1, and the operation order is notified when the loop counter value is 0. The configuration is such that it does not notify. When the loop counter is updated at the end of the game, the operation order is notified when the loop counter value is 0, and the operation order is not notified when the loop counter value is 1. shall be. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the operation order is notified at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in the above configuration, since the operation order can always be notified in the first press order bell winning game after transitioning to the notification mode, the frequency of notification of the operation order can be adjusted in the first press order bell winning game after changing to the notification mode. If the function is limited to increasing the number, the configuration related to the navigation counter in the eighth embodiment is unnecessary. When the above configuration and the configuration related to the navigation counter are combined, the configuration related to the navigation counter will function as a relief when the push order bell is not won in 8 or more games.

(110) In the eighth embodiment, in the navigation determination process, the value of the navigation counter is checked if the navigation lottery is unsuccessful, but the configuration is such that the navigation lottery is performed after checking the value of the navigation counter Good too.

(111) In the eighth embodiment described above, when the lottery for transition to the notification mode is won, the transition is made from the chance mode to the notification mode A. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which there is a case where the notification mode changes from the mode to the notification mode B.

(112) In the eighth embodiment, the navigation counter is initialized when the operation order is notified in the notification mode, but the navigation counter may not be initialized.

(113) In the eighth embodiment, the operation order is notified when the value of the navigation counter is greater than 7, but the value of the navigation counter when notifying the operation order is arbitrary. However, if the value of the navigation counter is decreased, the navigation rate in notification mode A will increase, and if the value of the navigation counter is increased, there is a chance that the player's medals will run out in notification mode. This will lead to an increase in

(114) In the eighth embodiment, if a rare combination is won between the transition to the notification mode and the 50th game, a promotion lottery is performed, but the period for conducting the promotion lottery is arbitrary. be. The promotion lottery may be performed until the 30th game after the transition to the notification mode, or from the transition to the notification mode until the end of the notification mode A. In addition, starting from the establishment of a specified condition, such as when a bell prize is achieved in a push order bell winning game in which the operation order is not announced, until a predetermined number of games such as 10 games have elapsed. The period may be used as a period for holding a promotion lottery.

(115) In the eighth embodiment, if the player does not win the additional lottery, the player can play the game 100 times in both notification mode A and notification mode B, but this configuration is changed.

For example, if you do not win the promotion lottery, you can play the game 100 times under notification mode A, and if you win the promotion lottery, notification mode A ends in the game, but you can play the game 100 times under notification mode B. The configuration allows for the following games.

For example, if you do not win the promotion lottery, you can play the game 100 times under notification mode A, and if you win the promotion lottery, you can play the game 100 times under notification mode A, regardless of the timing of winning the promotion lottery. After the game is played, the system shifts to notification mode B, and the game is configured such that 100 games can be played under notification mode B.

(116) The sixth embodiment may be combined with the eighth embodiment as appropriate. That is, the symbol arrangement and winning mode in the sixth embodiment may be applied, or the structure may include three types of notification modes with different navigation rates as in the sixth embodiment. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the promotion lottery is performed when the rare combination is won, but the promotion lottery may be performed when the operation order is not notified in the push order bell winning game.

(117) In the ninth embodiment, the liquid crystal control device 251 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, but the liquid crystal control device 251 controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65. The upper lamp 63 may be driven and controlled, and the effect control device 201 may be configured to drive and control the upper lamp 63. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the liquid crystal control device 251 drives and controls the auxiliary display section 65, and the effect control device 201 drives and controls the upper lamp 63 and the speaker 64.

(118) In the ninth embodiment, the VDP 253 performs the BGM output processing, but the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 may perform the BGM output processing. If the CPU 252 of the liquid crystal control device 251 performs the processing, the layer may be provided in the RAM of the liquid crystal control device 251.

(119) In the ninth embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels provided is arbitrary.

(120) In the ninth embodiment, seven layers are provided, but the number of layers provided is arbitrary.

(121) In the ninth embodiment, a layer for CH4 has been described, but a layer may be provided for all channels CH0 to CH31, or for some channels such as CH4 to CH13. It is also possible to have a structure in which a layer is provided on the other hand. Alternatively, the number of layers constituting the layers may be different for each channel, for example, the layer for CH4 has a configuration of seven layers, and the layer for CH0 has a configuration of four layers.

(122) In the ninth embodiment, the BGM volume is reduced from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB when a rare winning combination is achieved, but the amount of reduction is arbitrary. For example, if you want to reduce the BGM volume to -12.0dB, or about one-fourth of the volume, set the 6th layer of the CH4 layer to "32" instead of "64". good. For example, if you want to reduce the BGM volume to -2.5dB, or about three-quarters of the volume, you can set the 6th layer of the CH4 layer to ``96'' instead of ``64.'' do it.

(123) In the ninth embodiment, when a rare winning combination is achieved, the rare winning sound is output at 0.0 dB, but if the sound is output at a volume greater than -6.0 dB, then , can be output at a louder volume than BGM, so it can be expected that the above effects will be achieved.

(124) In the ninth embodiment, the BGM volume is lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB when a rare winning combination is achieved. If this holds true, the BGM volume may be lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the degree of decrease in the volume of the BGM differs between when a rare winning combination is achieved and when a general winning is achieved.

(125) In the ninth embodiment, two types, cherry and watermelon, are set as rare combinations, but it goes without saying that three or more types of combinations may be set as rare combinations. At this time, the output time of the rare combination winning sound may be different for each role, or the output time of the rare combination winning sound may be different depending on the degree of expectation for awarding the bonus.

For example, rare combination A has a probability of approximately 1/2 of winning in the lottery for transition to notification mode, and rare combinations B and C have a probability of approximately 1/3 of winning in the lottery for transition to notification mode. In the configuration having the following, when a rare role A winning is established, a rare role winning sound is output for 2000 msec, and when a rare role B winning or a rare role C winning is established, a rare role winning sound is output for 1000 msec. Good too.

(126) In the ninth embodiment, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after the output of the rare combination winning sound ends in the case where the watermelon winning is achieved and the case where the cherry winning is achieved. Although the configuration is such that the times taken to complete the process are different, it may be configured that the times are the same.

In addition, if three or more types of roles are set as rare roles, the return time until the BGM volume returns to 0.0 dB may be configured to be different for each role, and the return time may vary depending on the level of expectation for the granting of benefits. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the times are different.

For example, rare combination A has a probability of approximately 1/2 of winning in the lottery for transition to notification mode, and rare combinations B and C have a probability of approximately 1/3 of winning in the lottery for transition to notification mode. In the configuration having the following, when a rare winning combination A is achieved, the BGM volume returns to 0.0 dB after 800 msec from the end of outputting the rare winning winning sound, and the rare winning combination B or rare winning sound is returned to 0.0 dB. When a C winning is achieved, the BGM volume may be configured to return to 0.0 dB after 500 msec from the end of the output of the rare combination winning sound.

(127) In the ninth embodiment, the fade-in control of the BGM is started after the output of the rare prize winning sound ends, but the volume of the BGM changes at the timing when the output of the rare winning prize sound ends. A configuration may also be adopted in which BGM fade-in control is started so as to return to 0.0 dB.

(128) In the ninth embodiment, the configuration is such that the rare winning combination, the output time of the winning sound, and the time for performing fade-in control correspond to each other, but this configuration is changed.

For example, if a rare winning combination is achieved in chance mode, and if the lottery to switch to notification mode is won, winning sound A will be output at a rate of approximately 90%, and winning sound B will be output at a rate of approximately 10%. The configuration is as follows. When the lottery for transition to the notification mode is not won, the winning sound B is output at a rate of about 90%, and the winning sound A is output at a rate of about 10%. The winning sound A is configured to be output for 2000 msec, and when the output of the winning sound A is finished, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after 800 msec has elapsed. The winning sound B is configured to be output for 1000 msec, and when the output of the winning sound B is finished, the volume of the BGM returns to 0.0 dB after 500 msec has elapsed.

In the case of the above configuration, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the notification mode will change depending on whether winning sound A or winning sound B is output, so it is not possible to know which winning sound has been output. If this happens, there is a possibility that the player's expectations for the transition to the notification mode will be diminished, and that the player's interest in the game may decline. However, when outputting winning sound A or winning sound B, the BGM volume is lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB, and when the output of winning sound A or winning sound B is finished, the BGM volume is reduced to -6.0 dB. In the configuration in which the fade-in is performed from 6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(129) In the ninth embodiment, the processing configuration related to the output of BGM has been described, but it goes without saying that it may be applied to the processing configuration related to the output of other sounds such as sound effects and jingles. do not have.

(130) In the ninth embodiment, the fade-in control is started when the output of the rare combination winning sound is finished, but the fade-in control may be started at another timing.

For example, when a player performs a game start operation in the power saving mode, the fade-in control is started.

Briefly, when transitioning to the power saving mode, "64" is set in the second layer of the CH4 layer. As a result, in the power saving mode, the BGM volume decreases from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB. When a game start operation is performed under such a situation, fade-in control is started to periodically update the volume value of the second layer of the CH4 layer to 128.

With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player who is trying to start a new game will be surprised by the sudden increase in the volume of the BGM and lose his or her desire to play, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. It becomes possible to aim for improvement.

Note that the game start operation includes a bet operation by directly inserting medals or operating the first to third credit input switches 56 to 58, and an operation to generate a start command by operating the start lever 41 after the bet operation. , the fade-in control may be started when a bet operation is performed, or the fade-in control may be started when a start command operation is performed. If the fade-in control is configured to start when a bet operation is performed, the fade-in control can be performed before the start command operation is performed, so the BGM It becomes possible to return the volume to 0.0 dB.

(131) In the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, the rare combination is configured to have the functions of the transition lottery to the notification mode and the additional lottery, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the prize winning combination is not limited to this configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as it has a function in which a predetermined benefit other than the benefit associated with establishment is granted, or a predetermined benefit can be expected to be granted. Therefore, in a so-called A-type slot machine, a winning combination that can be won twice with BB may be set as a rare winning combination. When such a rare winning combination is achieved, the rare winning combination sound may be output and the BGM output may be lowered from 0.0 dB to -6.0 dB.

(132) In the tenth embodiment, when the output of the story part is finished, the music part is repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends. However, the story part is repeatedly output until the advantageous section ends. It goes without saying that this may be a configuration.

(133) In the tenth embodiment, the value of the data number storage area is changed to 1 when the error is resolved, but when the value of the file number storage area is not changed, the data number storage area The configuration may be such that the value of is also not changed. With such a configuration, if the error is resolved, the ending movie can be resumed from where it left off.

(134) In the tenth embodiment described above, the data used when executing the ending movie is divided and stored into eight files of story part 1 to story part 7 and music part. The number of files is arbitrary. For example, the file may be stored in two files, a story part and a music part, or it may be stored in four files, three story parts and one music part. If you increase the number of files to be divided, it will be possible to shorten the time required to play one file, so the length of the overlapping ending movie will be shortened when the error is resolved. becomes possible.

(135) In the tenth embodiment described above, the data used when executing the ending movie is divided and stored into eight files of story part 1 to story part 7 and music part. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one file is stored without any data. However, in such a configuration, a second pointer indicating the elapsed time from the start of the ending movie can be set, and if an error occurs, the ending movie will start from the position corresponding to the second pointer. It is desirable to have a configuration that restarts.

(136) In the tenth embodiment, the story part 3 file and the story part 6 file are composed of playback data and pause data, but it goes without saying that they may be composed of only playback data. Nor. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which temporary stop data is provided in files other than those mentioned above.

(137) In the tenth embodiment, the ending movie is started from the next game when the completion condition is met, but the conditions for starting the ending movie are arbitrary. For example, the ending movie may be configured to start when the difference in number of sheets under notification mode exceeds a predetermined number such as 1000 sheets, or when the number of games under notification mode exceeds a predetermined number such as 100 games. The ending movie may be started in the case where the ending movie is displayed.

(138) In the tenth embodiment, the conditions for completing the race are set such that the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section under the notification mode reaches 2400, and that the number of games in the advantageous section under the notification mode reaches 3000. However, it may be set as a completion condition that only the difference in the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 2400 under the notification mode, or only that the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 3000 under the notification mode. It's okay. Further, other conditions may be set as the completion conditions.

(139) In the tenth embodiment, the restart operation is notified when the error is resolved, but the restart operation may not be announced.

(140) In the tenth embodiment, the ending movie is restarted when the error is resolved and the restart operation is performed, but the ending movie is restarted when the error is resolved. It may also be a configuration. For example, in the case of a hopper empty error, the operations for resolving the error performed by the game hall manager include pressing the reset switch 72 after replenishing medals and closing the front door 12. Therefore, if the ending movie is restarted when the error is resolved, the ending movie may be restarted when the reset switch 72 is pressed, or when the front door 12 is closed. The ending movie may be restarted when the situation occurs.

(141) In the above-described tenth embodiment, generating a command to start the next game is set as the restart operation, but the configuration is not limited to this, and any operation that can be performed by the player can be used. It is. Therefore, in a configuration equipped with a production switch, operating the production switch, that is, an operation that does not involve the progress of a game round, may be set as a restart operation, or it may be set as a restart operation, such as betting a medal, which is involved in the progress of a game cycle. The operation to do so may be set as the restart operation.

(142) In the above-described tenth embodiment, the differential number of coins in the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section, and the elapsed time are set as advance conditions, but a configuration in which only the differential number of coins in the advantageous section is set is possible. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that only the number of games in the advantageous section is set. More specifically, in the tenth embodiment, in a configuration in which the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section and the number of games in the advantageous section are provided as the end conditions of the advantageous section, the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section and the number of games in the advantageous section are provided. The number and are set as the rounding conditions. The advance condition may be configured to set a condition corresponding to the end condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, if the configuration is such that only the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is provided as the end condition of the advantageous section, only the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section can be set as the advancing condition.

(143) In the tenth embodiment, when the ending movie is started, the data of story parts 1 to 7 and the data of the music part are continuously output without being based on the player's operation. However, the configuration may be such that predetermined data is output based on the player's operation.

For example, an ending movie is composed of a story part A, a story part B, and a music part. Data for outputting story part A is divided into three files, story part 1 to story part 3, and stored. Data for outputting story part B is divided into four files, story part 4 to story part 7, and stored. Data for outputting a music part is stored in one file. The story part A is repeatedly output from the time when the completion condition is met until the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2240. That is, the data of story parts 1 to 3 are output continuously without being based on the player's operation, and when the final data of story part 3 is output, the data returns to the data of story part 1. When the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2240, the story part B is repeatedly output from the next game, that is, until the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2350 due to generation of a next game start command. do. When the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches 2350, the music part is repeatedly output from the next game, that is, until the advantageous section ends due to generation of a next game start command.

It is clear that even with such a configuration, the same effects as in the tenth embodiment described above can be achieved.

(144) In the tenth embodiment, if the number of errors after starting the ending movie is four or more, the ending movie is started from the beginning of the file following the file where the error occurred. , the number of errors to move to the next file is arbitrary.

(145) In the above-described tenth embodiment, the ending movie performance is configured, but it may also be a performance during a specific AT that starts under predetermined conditions, a performance during continuous performance, a performance during a big bonus, etc. For example, as an episode AT (episode bonus), an AT that plays a music part after executing a 200-second movie production of story parts 1 to 7, and the number of the story part that was interrupted when the episode AT was interrupted due to an error. The performance may be played back from.

(146) In the tenth embodiment, the ending effect is interrupted when an error occurs, but if an error occurs, an error screen is displayed on the upper layer of the liquid crystal, and the ending effect itself is hidden. You may also proceed with the process. When displaying an error screen on the upper layer, you can display the error information on a black screen that completely obscures the ending effect, giving the appearance that the ending effect has been interrupted. However, the error information may be displayed on a semi-transparent gray transparent screen so that it can be recognized that the ending effect is progressing through the transparent screen. In that case, the file number where the error occurred will be memorized, the ending performance itself will proceed in the background, and when the error is resolved, it will be decided where to play from based on the file number where the error occurred. do. By doing this, in the case of a configuration in which an error screen is displayed on the upper layer of the production image when an error occurs, the error screen is displayed in the same way for errors during the ending production, thereby making the process for errors common. can be achieved. Specifically, when a door open error occurs, the current performance continues and the message "The door is open" is displayed on the upper layer of the liquid crystal. You will be able to do this.

(147) In the eleventh embodiment, a configuration with seven levels of winning probabilities has been described, but the number of winning probabilities provided is arbitrary.

(148) In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that different notifications are executed when the set value is one of 1 to 6 and when the set value is 7, but this configuration is limited. It is not something that will be done. A configuration may be configured in which different notifications are executed when the set value is 4, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, or 5 to 7, or when the set value is any of 1 to 3. A configuration may be adopted in which different notifications are executed depending on whether the setting value is one of 4 to 7. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which different notifications are executed for each set value.

(149) In the eleventh embodiment, the opening sound notifies that the front door 12 is open when the set value is one of 1 to 6 and when the set value is 7. However, instead of or in addition to this, the notification sound for notifying a predetermined error such as a reserve tank full error may be configured to be different, or the predetermined sound such as a medal payout sound may be configured to be different. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to the sound, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like, or in which the lighting mode of the upper lamp 63, the lower panel, etc. is changed.

(150) In the eleventh embodiment, the normal opening sound and the special opening sound have the same notification content that the front door 12 is open, but the gender of the output sound is different. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the gender of the voice is the same but the notification content is different, or a configuration in which both the notification content and the gender of the voice are different. For example, the normal opening sound notifies you of the opening of the front door 12, such as "The door is open," and the special opening sound indicates the opening of the front door 12 and the set value, such as "Is this OK?" 7.

It goes without saying that a configuration may be adopted in which the opening of the front door 12 is announced by predetermined music, and different music may be output for the normal opening sound and the special opening sound.

(151) In the eleventh embodiment described above, the opening sound is different depending on whether the set value is 7 or when the set value is one of 1 to 6. However, this configuration can be changed. . When notifying that the front door 12 is open, the configuration is such that an opening sound is normally output regardless of the setting value from 1 to 7. However, when the set value is 7, a predetermined warning sound is output for a certain period of time before the normal opening sound is output. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which both the normal opening sound and the predetermined warning sound are output using a plurality of channels.

(152) In the eleventh embodiment, a setting change sound is output when a setting change operation is performed, but instead of or in addition to this, a normal opening sound or a special opening sound is output. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

(153) In the eleventh embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed in a situation where the set value is 7, the upper lamp 63, which is normally lit, is turned off for 30 seconds. However, it may be configured such that the light-off state is maintained until a predetermined cancellation operation is performed. The predetermined cancellation operation may be to operate an operating means such as the start lever 41, or may be to perform an operation to change the set value to a value other than 7.

(154) In the eleventh embodiment, the starting operation is to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turn it on, but opening the front door 12 and inserting the setting key The starting operation may be inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning on the setting key, or turning on the power switch 71 after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning on the setting key. . Further, an operation other than inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on may be used as the starting operation.

(155) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key OFF wait process is performed in a situation where "1" is stored in the 0th bit of the 1st area of the first sensor buffer, and "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area. Since then, the configuration was configured to end when "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area 10 times in a row, but "0" is stored in the 0th bit of the 0th area continuously. The number of times is arbitrary.

(156) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting key OFF wait process may be configured to end when the OFF edge of the setting key detection sensor 73a is detected.

(157) In the eleventh embodiment, the setting value is stored in the display buffer when a change operation is performed, and the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area when a termination operation is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the setting value in the setting value storage area is changed when a changing operation is performed.

(158) In the eleventh embodiment, the set value is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 when a change operation is performed, but the set value may not be displayed, or the payout number display unit The setting value may be displayed on a display unit other than 62. Further, a display section for displaying set values may be provided inside the housing 11.

(159) In the eleventh embodiment, the slot machine 10 in which the probability of winning can be changed has been described as an example, but it goes without saying that the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which the probability of winning can be changed.

(160) In each of the above embodiments, the transfer lottery and the additional lottery are performed only in the 3-card game, but the configuration may be such that the transfer lottery and the additional lottery are performed also in the 2-card game.

(161) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is configured to end when the net increase in the number of coins reaches 120, but the notification mode may be configured to end when the number of paid-out coins reaches 120. , the notification mode may be configured to end when the number of games has reached 50.

(162) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a continuation lottery is performed in the notification mode ending game, or a configuration in which a continuation lottery is performed in the notification mode transition game. Further, a continuous lottery may be performed in a predetermined game under the notification mode. Then, it may be configured to notify the results of these continuous lottery results in a pseudo game.

(163) In each of the above embodiments, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won under the chance mode, but the configuration is such that the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified with a lower probability than in the notification mode. Good too.

(164) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section also ends when the notification mode ends, but it may be configured to shift to the chance mode without ending the advantageous period when the notification mode ends. .

(165) In each of the above embodiments, when a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the mode shifts from the normal section to the chance mode, and the configuration is such that a loss occurs only with a probability of about 1 in 6.4. The probability of being out is arbitrary. However, as the number of games played in the normal section increases, the chance for the player to realize that the player is in the normal section increases, so it is desirable to have a configuration in which the probability of winning any winning combination is higher than the probability of losing. .

(166) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 61, but the section indicator 66 may be provided at any position. However, in order to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the game has ended in an advantageous period, it is desirable to arrange it at a position away from the auxiliary display section 65, for example, it is desirable to provide it at the payment switch 59.

(167) In each of the above embodiments, the process related to the game mode such as the transition lottery is performed on the condition that it is a 3-coin game, but the transition lottery is performed on the condition that it is a 3-coin game and not in a BB state. It may also be configured to perform processing related to gaming modes such as.

(168) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is turned off and turned off during the game section process, but it may be turned off and turned off during the start waiting process. Even in the case of such a configuration, since the section display 66 is turned off after the end of the advantageous section end game, it can be expected that the same effects as in the above embodiment can be achieved. Similarly, although the section indicator 66 is configured to be turned ON during the section lottery process, it may be configured to be turned ON after the rotation start process and before determining whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. Good too.

(169) In each of the above embodiments, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the transition to an advantageous section is made; however, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not limited to such a structure, and the operation timing of a predetermined stop switch is The configuration may be such that notification is provided, or the configuration may be such that the operation timing and operation method are notified. That is, the advantageous section may be any gaming section in which the instruction function of the stop switch can be activated. Note that the normal section may be any game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch for establishing a small winning combination does not operate.

(170) In each of the above embodiments, the combinations of symbols that result in winning are merely examples, and the combinations of symbols are not limited to these combinations. Further, the number of combinations of symbols that result in a winning is also arbitrary.

(171) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine with a BB state has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a slot machine without a BB state may also be used. It may also be a slot machine with both states. Furthermore, the slot machine may have other gaming states such as a CB state or an MB state.

(172) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that it is determined whether a start command is generated after three or two medals are bet, but the start command is also generated after one medal is bet. It goes without saying that the structure may be configured to determine whether or not. It goes without saying that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether or not a start command has been issued only after three medals have been bet, that is, a configuration in which only three medal games can be played.

(173) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the privilege of shifting the gaming state and the privilege of replaying, the privileges provided include the privilege of paying out medals, but the present invention is limited to such a structure. It is sufficient to have a configuration in which some kind of benefit is given to the player. For example, instead of the privilege of paying out medals, a configuration may be adopted in which prizes other than medals are paid out. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(174) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine is described in which three reels are arranged in parallel and one active line is provided, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, five reels are arranged in parallel. The slot machine may be a slot machine equipped with 5 active lines or a slot machine with 5 active lines.

(175) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined in the normal process, and the reel is stopped in the timer interrupt process. A configuration may also be adopted in which processing is performed to stop the . Specifically, when the stop symbol number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination process shown in FIG. Performs processing to stop the reels. Thereafter, the processing shown from step S1109 onwards is performed. In such a configuration, after stopping the reel where the stop command (pseudo stop command) has been generated, it is checked whether the next stop command (pseudo stop command) has occurred. It becomes impossible to continuously generate pseudo-stop commands.

(176) In each of the above embodiments, in the reel control process, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed (step S407, see FIG. 15). If the time from the start until the speed reaches a constant speed is uniform, a timer corresponding to the time is set when starting the reel acceleration (step S607, see FIG. 17), and the timer is set according to the time in step S407. It may be configured to wait until a time corresponding to the timer value has elapsed. It is clear that even with such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be achieved.

(177) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example was shown regarding the slot machine 10, but the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions among slot machines, it may be a gaming machine that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

Game machine A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circulating displays of the symbols on the circulating display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) ends the pseudo-game. Migration preparation processing function S412) in
If the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, a pseudo game second ending means (main controller 101) that ends the pseudo game. The pseudo game flag clearing function S1004) during the rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is configured to be executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the control by the second pseudo-game ending means is performed, the pseudo-game ends without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulation display means.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the pseudo game, the circular display of the symbols is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circular display of the symbols of the corresponding circular display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the structure to be able to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the circulation display means, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a pseudo game. Therefore, in this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is ended. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who finds it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a simulated game from decreasing his or her desire to play when the simulated game is started.

Furthermore, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulating display means are displaying the pictures in a circular manner, the circulating display of the pictures on the circulating display means does not pseudo-stop, and the picture on the circulating display means The pseudo game is configured to end while the cyclical display continues. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is impossible to grasp the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game without operating the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine A2. In the game machine A1, a second start control means (acceleration start of the main control device 101 in the main game) that performs control to start the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols in the pseudo game. processing function S607, stepping motor control processing function S106), and when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, a response is taken to stop the circular display of the symbols. a second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in this game of the main control device 101) that controls the circulation display means to A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege is awarded based on a control result by a control means.

According to this game machine, the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means which has been pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game is started again, and the circular display of the symbols is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Then, a privilege is awarded based on the result of stopping such a symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the circular display of symbols does not stop at the stage of starting the next game round. In addition, in such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated and the pseudo game ends while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is ended without going through the control by the second start control means. It becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A3. The above-mentioned gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game, pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display section 65) is provided to notify that the pseudo-game is being played. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, even if the simulated game ends without the cyclical display of symbols stopping, the player will not be able to tell whether it is a simulated game or a game related to awarding benefits. It is possible to avoid the problem of being lost.

Game machine A4. In the gaming machine A2 or gaming machine A3, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols cyclically, A game machine characterized by comprising a deceleration means for decelerating a display for a predetermined period of time.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are performing the circulation display of the symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is slowed down for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game ends through a decrease in the circulation display speed of the symbols.

Game machine A5. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to perform the pseudo-game execution means when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. Specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 performed via step S1003 of the main controller 101, stepping motor control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a processing function S106).

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is performed to pseudo-stop the circulation display of all the symbols. cyclic display means are controlled. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the simulated game without operating the stop operation means during the simulated game can complete the simulated game without operating the stop operation means by operating the specific operation means. It becomes possible to end the game.

Game machine A6. In the gaming machine A5, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stopping manner different from the case where the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display means performing the circulation display of symbols is stopped by the stop operation means. To pseudo-stop the circular display of pictures in a stopping manner different from that when is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the pseudo game is ended by operating the specific operation means or the pseudo game is ended by operating the stop operation means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means clear, and it becomes possible to allow the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine A7. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to perform the pseudo-game execution means when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. A game machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is performing the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A8. In the gaming machine A7, the second start control means is characterized in that when the pseudo game ends, the second start control means performs control so as to start the cyclic display of the symbols of the cyclic display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the symbols. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if there is a circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols when the pseudo game ends, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means is started. With this configuration, it is possible to use all the circulation display means to play games related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A9. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means and the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display speed of symbols in the pseudo game and the cyclic display speed of symbols in the game related to awarding benefits are equal. With this configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible.

Game machine A10. In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a determining means (of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not to grant a specific benefit (addition of the net increase number counter) different from the benefit granted by the benefit granting means. A gaming machine comprising an additional lottery winning confirmation function (S1804), and configured such that the specific condition is satisfied when the determining means determines to grant the specific benefit.

According to this gaming machine, when the privilege awarding means determines to award a specific benefit different from the award given, the specific condition is satisfied and a pseudo game is executed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to use the pseudo game as a game to notify that a specific benefit will be given, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine A11. In the gaming machine A10, when the pseudo-stopping result of the symbol becomes a specific stopping result (the combination of "Red 7" symbols stops on the middle line L2) under the control of the pseudo-stopping control means, the specific benefit The present invention further comprises an award notification means (auxiliary display section 65) that notifies that the specific benefit will be awarded and does not notify that the specific benefit will be awarded if the pseudo stop result of the symbol does not become the specific stop result. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo stop result of a symbol in a pseudo game becomes a specific stop result, it is announced that a specific benefit will be awarded. On the other hand, if the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game does not result in a specific stopping result, no notification will be given that a specific benefit will be awarded. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt players who wish to be notified of the granting of specific benefits to operate the stop operation means, while allowing players who do not need to be notified of the granting of specific benefits to operate the specific operating means. It becomes possible.

Game machine A12. In the gaming machine A11, there is an advantageous state transition means (notification mode transition function S1608 of the main controller 101) for shifting to an advantageous state (notification mode) advantageous to the player, and the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. and a number information storage means (a net increase number counter of the main controller 101) for storing information (remaining number of payouts), and the specific benefit is a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under advantageous conditions is provided as a specific privilege. With such a configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated in a pseudo game, it is possible to avoid disadvantages to the player.

Furthermore, "a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under an advantageous condition" refers to a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played if the advantageous condition ends based on the number of games played, and If the configuration is such that the advantageous state ends based on the number of awarded game media, then a benefit that increases the number of awarded game media is applicable.

Game machine A13. In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the specific operating means is an operating means different from the start operating means and the stop operating means.

According to this gaming machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will operate the specific operation means unintentionally. For example, it is possible to set the start operation means to be a specific operation means, but if a player hits the start operation means repeatedly when starting a game, the pseudo game ends even though he/she wanted to enjoy it. This is because an event may occur where the

Game machine B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circulating displays of the symbols on the circulating display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) ends the pseudo-game. Migration preparation processing function S412) in
A second pseudo game ending means (a pseudo game ending function based on a cancel operation of the main control device 101) that ends the pseudo game when a second specific condition (operation of the payment switch 59) is satisfied is configured to be executable. ,
A second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 of the main control device 101 in the main game, stepping motor control processing function S106);
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; Equipped with a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106) in this game of the main control device 101,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second pseudo game ending means executes different processing depending on the pseudo stop state of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the pseudo game, the circular display of the symbols is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circular display of the symbols of the corresponding circular display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the structure to be able to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the circulation display means, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

Further, the pseudo game is configured to end also when the second specific condition is satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the pseudo game is ended, the pseudo game of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied is The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the stop status. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the pseudo stop situation of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine B2. The gaming machine B1 is configured such that the second specific condition is satisfied when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated, and the benefit granting means is configured to perform the above-mentioned benefit awarding means based on the control result by the second stop control means. A gaming machine that provides a privilege, and wherein the pseudo game second ending means executes different processing depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

According to this gaming machine, the pseudo game is configured to end even when the specific operating means is operated, and when the specific operating means is operated and the pseudo game is ended, the pseudo game is terminated before the specific operating means is operated. The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the number of operated stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the situation in which the specific operation means is operated.

Game machine B3. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means ends the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means that is not operated. Game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated, the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the unoperated stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is impossible to grasp the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game without operating the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

Further, in this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs the circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine B4. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it includes pseudo game notification means (auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the pseudo game is a pseudo game when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, even if the simulated game can be ended without the circular display of symbols stopping in a simulated manner, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the simulated game is a simulated game or a game related to the granting of benefits. This makes it possible to avoid confusion.

Game machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or gaming machine B4, if there is a plurality of circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game, the circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols is the circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) related to the timing to start display.

According to this gaming machine, when there is a plurality of circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols in a pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols is involved in the timing at which the circulation display of symbols starts. Timing information is set individually. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for the stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B6. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo game to the start of the circular display of the symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the stop result of a symbol in a pseudo game becomes an operational aid for a stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B7. In any of the game machines B3 to B6, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the circulation display of the symbols will be displayed for a predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized by being provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the speed.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are performing the circulation display of the symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is slowed down for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game ends through a decrease in the circulation display speed of the symbols.

Game machine B8. In any of the game machines B3 to B7, the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means and the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display speed of symbols in the pseudo game and the cyclic display speed of symbols in the game related to awarding benefits are equal. With this configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible.

Game machine B9. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means is configured to pseudo-stop all the circulating displays of the symbols when the specific operating means is operated in a situation where at least one of the stop operating means has been operated. The present invention is characterized by comprising a specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed through step S1003 of the main control device 101) that controls the circulation display means that performs the circulation display of pictures. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means has been operated, the circulation display means that performs the circulation display of the symbols so as to pseudo-stop all the circulation display of the symbols. controlled. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the simulated game without operating the stop operation means during the simulated game can complete the simulated game without operating the stop operation means by operating the specific operation means. It becomes possible to end the game.

Game machine B10. In the game machine B9, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stopping manner different from the case where the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means has been operated, the circulation display means that displays the symbols in circulation will be different from the one when the stop operation means is operated. The cyclic display of the pictures is pseudo-stopped using different stopping modes. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the pseudo game is ended by operating the specific operation means or the pseudo game is ended by operating the stop operation means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means clear, and it becomes possible to allow the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine B11. In the gaming machine B9 or gaming machine B10, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols in the pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of the symbols A gaming machine characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) related to the timing to start display.

According to this gaming machine, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of symbols in a pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols is involved in the timing for starting the circulation display of symbols. Timing information is set individually. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for the stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B12. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo game to the start of the circular display of the symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for a stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B13. In any of the gaming machines B2 to B12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will operate the specific operation means unintentionally. For example, it is possible to set the start operation means to be a specific operation means, but if a player hits the start operation means repeatedly when starting a game, the pseudo game ends even though he/she wanted to enjoy it. This is because an event may occur where the

Gaming machine C1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
After the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols and the circular display of the symbols reaches a constant speed, a stop operation determining means (main controller) determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated. 101 stop command confirmation function S1008),
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a second stop control means (stop control in the main control device 101 in the main game) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circulation display of the symbols. Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
The benefit granting means is configured to grant the benefit based on a control result by the second stop control means,
The second stop control means is configured to operate the stop operation means in a specified operation method (operation order that allows a bell to be won) when the lottery result of the winning combination is a prescribed result (push order bell winning). Then, a specified winning (bell winning) is established, and if the stop operation means is operated by an operation method other than the specified operating method, controlling the plurality of circulation display means so that the specified winning is not established;
If the lottery result of the combination is the stipulated result, an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of notifying the stipulated operation method is provided;
When notifying the prescribed operating method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operating method informing means informs the prescribed operating method before the stopping operation determining means determines whether or not the stopping operation means has been operated. In the case where the prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which the pseudo game is executed, the pseudo stop control means pseudo stops all the circular display of the symbols of the circulation display means in the pseudo game. The gaming machine is characterized in that the prescribed operating method is notified before the second start control means starts the control for starting the circular display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the prescribed operation method is notified before the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. did. With this configuration, in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, it becomes possible to have the player understand the prescribed operation method and then operate the stop operation means.

Furthermore, in the case of notifying the prescribed operating method in a game round in which a pseudo game is executed, the second start is performed after the pseudo stop control means pseudo stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means in the pseudo game. The prescribed operating method is notified before the control means starts the control for starting the circular display of the pictures. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop operation means in a prescribed operation method in a pseudo game, and to avoid operating the stop operation means in a different operation method from the prescribed operation method in a game related to awarding of benefits after a pseudo game. This makes it possible to avoid the situation where the player is unable to receive benefits associated with winning the specified prize due to manipulation.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine C2. In the game machine C1, when the operation method notifying means notifies the prescribed operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operation method notifying means is configured to notify the prescribed operating method after the cyclical display of all the symbols on the cyclic displaying means reaches a constant speed. A gaming machine characterized by notifying a prescribed operating method.

According to this gaming machine, when notifying the prescribed operation method in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the stop operation determining means The specified operating method is notified before determining whether or not the stop operating means has been operated. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in a game related to bonus awarding different between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the specified operating method is announced before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, the timing of notification of the specified operating method for games related to awarding benefits is varied depending on whether or not a pseudo game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Gaming machine C3. In the gaming machine C1 or gaming machine C2, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols of all the circulation display means, it is determined whether the lottery result of the combination is the prescribed result or not. If the prescribed determination means (winning combination confirmation function S603 of the main control device 101) and the prescribed determination means determine that the lottery result of the combination is the prescribed result, the prescribed operating method is notified to the operation method notification means. a notification execution means (instruction monitor display function S604 of the main controller 101); and a time information setting means (main a delay time acquisition function S605) of the control device 101, and the second start control means controls the time information setting when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the pictures of all the circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to start circulating display of the symbols after a time period corresponding to time information set by the means has elapsed.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols of all the cyclical display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning combination is a prescribed result, and the lottery result of the winning combination is determined as follows. If it is determined that the result is a prescribed operating method, the operating method notifying means is made to notify the prescribed operating method, and when the operating method notifying means is made to notify the prescribed operating method, time information is set. When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols of all the circulation display means, the second start control means performs control to start the circular display of the symbols after a period of time corresponding to the time information has elapsed. conduct. With this configuration, when the prescribed operating method is notified after all the circulating display means have pseudo-stopped the circular display of symbols in a pseudo game, the prescribed operating method is notified before the circulating display of symbols starts. It becomes possible to execute it.

Gaming machine C4. Any of the gaming machines C1 to C3 includes at least the pseudo game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, and controls the game. A main control means (main control device 101) for managing, and a slave control means (display control device 81) for performing various controls under the main control means, and the main control means controls the operation method notification means. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which:

According to this gaming machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means that centrally manages the game. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event in which it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated before the operation method notification means notifies the prescribed operation method.

Gaming machine C5. In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. is performed, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping of the circulating display of the symbols on the circulating display means, and before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that said operation method notification means is configured to notify said specified operation method.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, the pseudo game can be ended. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who finds it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a simulated game from decreasing his or her desire to play when the simulated game is started.

In addition, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game ends without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means pseudo stopping, and The operating method notification means is configured to notify the prescribed operating method before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly transition from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits, while reducing the chance of operating the stop operation means with an operation method different from the prescribed operating method in a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine D1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
a stop information setting means (pseudo-gaming stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means performs control;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) that sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means performs control based on the lottery result of the winning combination. ) and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means is configured to provide the benefit when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set during the execution of the game.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding the bonus is set during the execution of the pseudo game. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine D2. In the gaming machine D1, a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) determines whether the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols. ), wherein the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determining means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, even if the second stop information is set during the execution of a pseudo game, the time required for the stop operation determining means to judge the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo game can be reduced. It becomes possible to shorten the time.

Game machine D3. In the gaming machine D2, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a pattern attached to one predetermined position to pseudo-stop at a predetermined position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a pattern attached to one predetermined specific position to pseudo-stop at a predetermined position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. do. In this way, by configuring the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-gaming to be independent of the operation timing of the stop operation means, even if the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, It is possible to suppress the delay from when the stop operation means is operated until the cyclical display of the pictures on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped.

Game machine D4. In the game machine D2 or the game machine D3, the second stop control means is controlled to stop the circular display of the symbols from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined period of time elapses. The apparatus is characterized in that the pseudo-stop control means is configured to perform control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the patterns after the specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, in a game related to bonus awarding, control is performed to stop the circular display of symbols from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, it is possible to perform control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the symbols after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. With this configuration, it is possible to secure time for setting stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, time for determining the stop position of the circulation display means based on the stop information, etc. becomes possible.

Game machine D5. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the second stop information setting means is configured such that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits is obtained after the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, and the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols. This is set before the control is performed. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine D6. In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a stop operation determination means (main controller 101 When the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the second stop information setting means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set before the determination is made.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in a game related to awarding of benefits is set before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine D7. In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (accounting switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means, and it becomes possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. .

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine D9. In any of the game machines D1 to D8, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is displaying the symbols in circulation.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Gaming machine E1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
The pseudo game execution means is
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the patterns;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a pseudo stop control means (stop in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) controls the corresponding circulation display means to pseudo stop the circulation display of the symbols. position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) Preparation processing function S412)
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (stop information for pseudo game) used when the pseudo stop control means performs control;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) that sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means performs control based on the lottery result of the winning combination. ) and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means determines that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means Before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not an operation has been performed, the stop information is set in a first storage area, and the second stop information setting means is configured to cause the pseudo game execution means to execute the pseudo game. If so, the second stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the stop information used in the game related to the awarding of benefits is set in the first storage area. 2. The stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine E2. In the gaming machine E1, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. With this configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding benefits, and reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Gaming machine E3. In the game machine E1 or the game machine E2, the stop information setting means is configured to stop the stop information setting means after the start control means starts controlling the plurality of circulation display means when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that information is set in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area after starting the circular display of symbols in the pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly start the circular display of symbols when executing a pseudo game.

Game machine E4. In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (accounting switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means, and it becomes possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. .

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Gaming machine E5. In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to control the display of the picture when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means pseudo-stops the circulation display of the picture. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols of the cyclical display means that is performing the cyclical display.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine F1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game, a start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the plurality of circulation display means to start circulating display of the symbols. )and,
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) Preparation processing function S412),
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (stop information for pseudo game) used when the pseudo stop control means performs control;
a second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
A stop operation determining means (pseudo stop command confirmation function and stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is executing the circular display of the patterns is operated. and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means determines that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means Before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not an operation has been performed, the stop information is set in a first storage area, and the second stop information setting means is configured to cause the pseudo game execution means to execute the pseudo game. In this case, the second stop information is stored in the first storage area between the end of the pseudo game and before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized by a setting.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the stop information used in the game related to the awarding of benefits is set in the first storage area. 2. The stop information is set in the first storage area between the end of the pseudo game and the time before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, in a pseudo game, it is possible to pseudo-stop the circular display of symbols using the stop information, and in a game related to bonus awarding, it is possible to pseudo-stop the circular display of symbols using the second stop information. It becomes possible to stop it.

Further, by setting the second stop information in the first storage area where the stop information is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity prepared in advance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine F2. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first storage area into the second stop information.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo game ends, the stop information set in the first storage area is rewritten to the second stop information. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase in the first storage area.

Game machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or gaming machine F2, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that the second stop information setting means sets when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result. A gaming machine characterized by being set.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. With this configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding benefits, and reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine F4. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the stop information setting means is configured such that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the start control means starts controlling the plurality of circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the stop information is later set in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area after starting the circular display of symbols in the pseudo game. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly start the circular display of symbols when executing a pseudo game.

Game machine F5. In any of the game machines F1 to F4, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without undergoing control by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for control by the pseudo-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even in the case where the second stop information is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine F6. In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is performing the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To end a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, at least the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation can be controlled by the second stop control means without being controlled by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. becomes. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information using the time required for control by the pseudo-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even in the case where the second stop information is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Note that the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine group C may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group D to gaming machine F group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group A to gaming machine C group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine G1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
a stop operation determining means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation is operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is performing the circular display of the pattern is operated, the stop operation means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means A stop position determining means (stop symbol number determining function S2305 of the main controller 101) that determines the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures when the circulation display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means; (stepping motor control process S106 of main controller 101),
The stop operation determining means is operated from the time when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in a cycle. The apparatus is configured such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing circulation display of the patterns is operated;
Based on the fact that the stop position determining means has determined all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, a standby processing execution means (100 msec of the main controller 101) performs a standby process of waiting for a predetermined time (100 msec). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a standby function (S2210).

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays symbols in circulation is operated, and when the stop operation means is operated, the corresponding circulation display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. When the circulation display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the circulation display of the pictures is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in circulation. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing a circulation display of pictures is operated. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the operability of the stop operation means.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation of other stop operation means is determined without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a situation where the cyclical display of symbols has not stopped. New problems may arise, such as Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to perform a standby process of waiting for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determining means having determined all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the circulation display of all the pictures is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine G2. The gaming machine G1 includes stop position determining means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main controller 101) for determining whether all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. A game characterized in that the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, the stop position determining means is provided for determining whether or not all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, and the standby processing execution means is provided with the stop position determining means. A standby process is performed after determining that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration is configured to perform the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Game machine G3. In the gaming machine G2, the stop position determining means can determine, as the stop position, a position different from the circulating display position of the circulating display means when the stop operation determining means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this gaming machine, the circular display of symbols may not be stopped immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, since the time from when the stop operation means is operated to when the circulation display of the images on the corresponding circulation display means stops, the standby process is performed in consideration of the time. In this case, there is a concern that it may take a long time until the next game round can be started. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine G2, it becomes possible to set the waiting time in the standby process without considering the time required for the circulation display means to reach the stop position. It becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine G4. In the gaming machine G2 or gaming machine G3, when the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, all of the stop operation means are operated. The standby processing execution means includes a stop operation second determination means (operation completion confirmation function S2206 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation has been completed. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that all the machines are not operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, it determines whether all of the stop operation means are not operated. A stop operation second determining means is provided, and the standby processing execution means performs the standby process after the stop operation second determining means determines that all of the stop operation means are not operated. With this configuration, even if the configuration performs standby processing, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started, and the next game round can be started. It becomes possible to improve the operability when For example, the standby process may be performed after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, without providing the second stop operation determining means. It is possible. However, in such a configuration, depending on whether the timing at which the player finishes operating all the stop operation means is after the end of the standby process or during the standby process, the next This is because the time required until it becomes possible to start a game round will change. If the time required to start the next game round changes, even if the player performs an operation to start the next game round, an event may occur in which the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability when starting the next game round is reduced.

Game machine G5. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the privilege granting means awards the privilege.

According to this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the bonus granting means grants a bonus. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which a privilege is given in a situation where the circular display of the symbols has not stopped.

Game machine G6. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, a winning determination means (payout determination processing function of the main control device 101 ), wherein the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the entered award determining means performs the entered award determination.

According to this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the winning determination means makes a winning determination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated and to create a situation where all the circular display of the patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine G7. In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines G1 to G6, if the lottery result of the combination is a specified result (push order bell winning), the stop operation means is activated by the specified operating method (operation that can establish a bell winning). the plurality of cyclic display means so that a specified winning (bell winning) is established when the stop operation means is operated in a manner other than the specified operating method; A stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of the main control device 101) to control, and an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, payout A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a number display section 62).

According to this gaming machine, when the winning combination result is a prescribed result, the prescribed operating method may be notified by the operation method notification means. At this time, if the stop operation means is operated in the specified operation method, a specified winning can be established. By applying the configuration of any of the game machines G1 to G6 in this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player unintentionally operates the stop operation means in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. It becomes possible.

Game machine G8. The gaming machine G7 is provided with a notification control means (main control device 101) that controls the operation method notification means, and when the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the specified operation method, the notification control means stops the operation method. After the position determining means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulation display means, the notification by the operation method notification means is terminated, and the standby processing execution means causes the notification control means to terminate the notification by the operation method notification means. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after the game is finished.

According to this gaming machine, when the operation method notification means reports the prescribed operation method, the notification by the operation method notification means ends after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, After that, standby processing is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly terminate the notification by the operation method notification means and shorten the waiting time in the standby process.

Game machine G9. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, there is a normal processing execution means (main controller 101) that starts up when the power is turned on and repeatedly performs a series of normal processing, and a normal processing execution means (main controller 101) that periodically interrupts the normal processing. Interrupt processing execution means (main controller 101) that performs interrupt processing, and the normal processing execution means includes the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby processing execution means. , the interrupt processing execution means has the stopping means, and the normal processing execution means is configured to stop a predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop position determining means has not determined the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is equipped with means for determining whether or not the predetermined circulation display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determining means when the stop position is determined.

According to this gaming machine, in the normal processing that is started and repeatedly performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the symbols in circulation is operated; When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is displaying the patterns in circulation is operated, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position of the circulation display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means. A process of determining is performed. On the other hand, in normal processing, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of a predetermined circulation display means in a situation where the stop positions of a plurality of circulation display means have not been determined, the stop position determination means It is not determined whether the stop position determined by is reached. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Game machine G10. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, the circulation display means includes a rotating body (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that rotates in a circumferential direction and has a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction; A gaming machine comprising: a driving means (stepping motor) for driving a rotating body.

According to this gaming machine, the circulating display means includes a rotating body that circulates in a circumferential direction and has a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction, and a driving means that drives the rotating body. In such a configuration, when the driving of the driving means is stopped, there is a possibility that the rotating body does not immediately complete its rotation and swings. However, if the configuration is such that a standby process is performed in which the device waits for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to end the swinging of the orbiting body while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine H1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the main control means,
The main control means is
a stop operation determining means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation is operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is performing the circular display of the pattern is operated, the stop operation means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means A stop position determining means (stop symbol number determining function S2305 of the main controller 101) that determines the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures when the circulation display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means; (stepping motor control process S106 of main controller 101),
The stop operation determining means is operated from the time when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in a cycle. The apparatus is configured such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing circulation display of the patterns is operated;
After the stop position determining means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulation display means, stopping for determining whether all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of main controller 101);
When the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, first information (all reels stopped complete) indicating the determination result of the stop position determining means a first transmitting means (all reel stop completion command transmitting function S2205 of the main controller 101) for transmitting a command) to the slave control means;
Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means. and,
When the second stop operation determining means determines that none of the stop operation means is operated, it sends second information (operation end command) indicating the determination result of the second stop operation determining means to the slave control means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transmitting means (operation end command transmitting function S2207 of main control device 101).

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays symbols in circulation is operated, and when the stop operation means is operated, the corresponding circulation display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. When the circulation display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the circulation display of the pictures is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in circulation. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing a circulation display of pictures is operated. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the operability of the stop operation means.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation of other stop operation means is determined without waiting for the cyclical display of the symbols to stop, for example, when the operations of all the stop operation means are completed, for example, the operation of the second stop operation means is The cyclical display of the pictures of the cyclic display means that determined the stop position has not been completed, or the cyclic display of the pictures of all the cyclic display means has been completed, but the operation of at least one stop operation means has not been completed. New problems such as these may arise. If the above-mentioned problem occurs, a problem will arise in the control performed by the slave control means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, on the main control means side, after the stop position determining means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, all of the plurality of circulation display means are set to the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. If it is determined that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, first information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. . Further, on the main control means side, after the stop position determining means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means is operated, and if none of the stop operation means is operated. When the determination is made, the configuration is such that second information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. With this configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the circulation display status of the symbols by receiving the first information, and can control the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. It becomes possible to perform control according to the As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine H2. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the second transmitting means transmits the second information after the first transmitting means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted. With this configuration, the slave control means performs control in accordance with the fact that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and then all operations of the stop operation means are completed. It becomes possible to perform control according to what has happened. Furthermore, since the main control means is equipped with the stop position determining means, the maximum time required from when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until the circulation display means actually reaches the stop position is It can be grasped or predicted by the means. On the other hand, the time required until all of the stop operation means are not operated depends on the player's operations, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the second information is transmitted after transmitting the first information, for example, the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying the picture, and the slave control means receives the first information. It becomes possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on .

Game machine H3. In the gaming machine H2, the stop operation second determining means performs the stop operation after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. A gaming machine characterized by determining whether or not a means is operated.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. Determine. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine H4. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the stop operation second determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmitting means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the stop operation second determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmitting means transmits the first information. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the slave control means to quickly grasp that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, and all of the plurality of circulation display means It is possible to reduce the gap that occurs between the timing at which the circular display of the pictures ends and the timing at which the slave control means performs control based on reception of the first information.

Game machine H5. In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the slave control means controls whether, when a specific condition (additional lottery winning) is satisfied, or when all of the plurality of circulating display means have finished circulating the symbols. , a performance control means (display control device 81) that controls the auxiliary performance means (speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65) to perform a different auxiliary performance (additional notification performance) when all operations of the stop operation means are completed; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an additional notification processing function (additional notification processing function).

According to this gaming machine, the slave control means determines when a specific condition is satisfied, when all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished circulating the symbols, and when all operations of the stop operation means have finished. The auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute different auxiliary performances. In such a configuration, depending on which occurs first: when all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished circulating the patterns, or when all the operations of the stop operation means have finished, for example, the assistance that has been prepared may be activated. Problems may arise, such as one of the performances becoming impossible to execute, or the processing configuration of the performance control means becoming complicated and the storage capacity increasing. However, the main control means transmits first information indicating that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and also indicates that all of the stop operation means are not operated. By transmitting the second information indicating that the slave control means has received the first information, the slave control means can grasp that all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished the circulation display of the symbols, By receiving this, it is possible to know that all operations of the stop operation means have been completed. Moreover, since the main control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the slave control means performs control to execute a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then transmits the second information. Based on the reception, control may be performed to execute an auxiliary performance different from the predetermined auxiliary performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

Game machine H6. In the gaming machine H5, the performance control means controls the auxiliary performance means to execute a first auxiliary performance (third notification sound) when the specific condition is satisfied and when the first information is received. The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute a second auxiliary performance (notification of the number of additional coins) when the second information is received.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first auxiliary performance is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary performance is executed when the second information is received. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which one of the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance that has been prepared cannot be performed.

Game machine H7. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance are executed by different devices.

According to this gaming machine, the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance are executed by different devices. With this configuration, even if the interval between receiving the first information and receiving the second information is short, it is possible to reliably execute the first auxiliary performance. .

Game machine H8. In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the main control means may be configured to control the main control means for a predetermined period of time ( 100msec) standby processing execution means (100msec standby function S2210 of the main controller 101), the standby processing execution means is configured such that the stop position determination means indicates that all of the plurality of circulation display means are stopped. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that the stop position determined by the position determining means has been reached.

According to this gaming machine, based on the stop position determining means determining all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, a standby process is performed in which the stop position determining means waits for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which all the cyclic display of symbols is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and for example, it is possible to start the next game even when the cyclic display of symbols has not stopped. This makes it possible to avoid new problems such as

Further, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration is configured to perform the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Game machine H9. In the gaming machine H8, the standby processing execution means transmits the second information to the slave control means after the first transmission means transmits the first information to the slave control means. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after transmitting the data to the means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby processing execution means, after the first transmission means transmits the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means transmits the second information to the slave control means, Perform standby processing. With such a configuration, there is no difference between the timing when all of the plurality of circulation display means finish circulating the patterns and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on reception of the first information. It is possible to reduce the gap that occurs between the timing at which the player finishes operating the stop operation means and the timing at which the slave control means performs control based on reception of the second information. Further, since the time to wait in the standby process can be set in consideration of the time required for transmitting the first information, etc., it is possible to shorten the time to wait in the standby process.

Note that the game machine G group and the game machine H group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group A to gaming machine F group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group G and the gaming machine H group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine I1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
Specific information storage means (ROM 105) that stores specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) in advance;
a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) that stores different information depending on whether it is a specific game (pseudo game) or not the specific game;
a command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) that transmits a command to the slave control means;
A command creation means (header creation function S3002, body creation function S3005, footer creation function S3006, etc.) for creating the command,
The command creation means may include a prescribed command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates a prescribed command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, a prescribed command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a storage area where different information is stored depending on whether or not it is a specific game. . With this configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether or not it is a specific game through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the slave control means to perform control depending on whether or not it is a specific game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a configuration, there is no need to store in advance commands to be sent for a specific game and commands to be sent for a non-specific game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. becomes.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be sent when the game is a specific game and a command to be sent when the game is not a specific game are stored in advance, it is possible to determine whether the game is a specific game or not when sending a command. It becomes necessary to perform determination processing, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether or not it is a specific game, so the above processing is unnecessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine I2. In the above gaming machine I1, the specified command creation means generates the specified information and the information stored in the storage area, both in the case of the specific game and in the case of not the specific game. A game machine characterized in that a prescribed command is created by calculating.

According to this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area, both in the case of a specific game and in the case of a non-specific game. . With such a configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need for processing to determine whether or not it is a specific game, and by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data.

Game machine I3. The gaming machine I1 or I2, wherein the specified command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, it becomes possible to include information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in the header. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine I4. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is contained in one byte, so that when receiving the header, the slave control means collects more information. It becomes possible to understand the

Game machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or gaming machine I4, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and whether or not the game is the specific game. and a specific game storage bit for storing information indicating the type of game, and the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and information that indicates whether or not it is a specific game. A specific game storage bit is provided, and the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in bits that were conventionally considered unused, and the command sent from the main control means to the slave control means can be It becomes possible to suitably suppress redundancy.

Game machine I6. The above-mentioned gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, when a header is created by calculating specific information and information stored in the storage area, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc. .

Game machine I7. In any of the gaming machines I3 to I6, the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether or not it is a specific game is created by calculating header information including information indicating the command type and information stored in the storage area. Ru. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance the header of the command to be sent when the game is a specific game, and the header of the command to be sent when the game is not a specific game, so the amount of data can be reduced. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine I8. In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, a first execution means ( Pseudo game flag set function S504) and when a second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage area is changed to second information (00H). A second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611), a confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and a confirmation means for confirming the first information in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) that executes the specific game when it is confirmed that the specific game is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is met, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is is changed to the second information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for creating a prescribed command but also for determining whether or not to execute a specific game, thereby suppressing the increase in storage capacity. becomes possible.

Game machine I9. In any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, when information indicating the specific game is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the specific game is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that, when information indicating that the game is not played is stored, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when information indicating that the game is a specific game is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and information indicating that the game is not a specific game is stored in the storage area. In this case, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine. With this configuration, the information stored in the storage area has a function as information used when creating a prescribed command and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. , it becomes possible to grant. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine I10. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo game through a prescribed command.

Game machine I11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a game in a specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state through the prescribed command.

Game machine J1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
If the first specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied, the first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) stores the first information (40H) in the storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) and,
If the second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second execution means (pseudo game flag clear) changes the information stored in the storage area to second information (00H). Function S611) and
Confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.);
Different controls are performed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. A control execution means (pseudo game execution function) to execute,
A gaming machine comprising: setting means for setting correspondence information (rotation start header) using at least part of the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is met, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is is changed to the second information. Different controls are executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. . Furthermore, correspondence information is set using at least part of the information stored in the storage area. In this way, by using a configuration in which the information stored in the storage area is used not only for judgment when executing control but also for setting correspondence information, it is possible to suppress the increase in storage capacity. Become.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine J2. In the gaming machine J1, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area; A gaming machine characterized in that when it is confirmed that the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is not executed.

According to this gaming machine, when it is confirmed that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed. game is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific game based on the information stored in the storage area, and it is also possible to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not to execute a specific game. .

Game machine J3. In the gaming machine J1 or gaming machine J2, a specific information storage means (ROM 105) that stores specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) in advance, and a command transmission means (command transmission processing) that transmits a command to the slave control means. 3, etc.), and the setting means includes a prescribed command creation means (header creation) that creates a prescribed command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by having a function S3002, etc.).

According to this gaming machine, the prescribed command is executed by calculating the specific information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area where different information is stored depending on whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied. is created. With this configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether each specific condition is satisfied through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the slave control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a configuration, there is no need to store in advance a command to be sent when the first information is stored and a command to be sent when the second information is stored, so the amount of data This makes it possible to reduce the

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and a command to be transmitted when the second information is stored are stored in advance, a confirmation means is provided when transmitting the command. It becomes necessary to perform confirmation processing using the method, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether the first information or the second information is stored, so the above-mentioned confirmation process is not necessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine J4. In the above gaming machine J3, the prescribed command creation means is configured to: A gaming machine characterized in that a prescribed command is created by calculating the specific information and information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, in both the case where the first information is stored in the storage area and the case where the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific information and the information stored in the storage area are A prescribed command is created by calculating the information. With this configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need to process to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the storage area, and by simplifying the processing configuration, the amount of data can be reduced. It becomes possible to aim at reduction.

Game machine J5. The gaming machine J3 or J4, wherein the specified command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied in the header. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine J6. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, since the header includes information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied and is contained in one byte, the slave control means, when receiving the header, It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or gaming machine J6, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, the first specific condition and the first specific condition. 2. A specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether or not a specific condition is met, and the specific condition storage bit is located at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, and whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met. The specific condition storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether each specific condition is met in bits that were conventionally considered unused, and the commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means become redundant. This makes it possible to suitably suppress this.

Game machine J8. The gaming machine J7 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, when a header is created by calculating specific information and information stored in the storage area, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc. .

Game machine J9. In any of the gaming machines J5 to J8, the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether each specific condition is satisfied is created by calculating header information including information indicating the command type and information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance a header to be sent when the first information is stored and a header to be sent when the second information is stored, so the amount of data can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the

Game machine J10. In any of the gaming machines J1 to J9, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the first information is stored in the storage area, and outputs the first signal to the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that when information is stored, the first signal is not outputted to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine. It will no longer be output. With this configuration, the information stored in the storage area is given the function of information used when executing control and the function of information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
a command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) that transmits a command to the slave control means;
Information storage means (ROM 105) that stores in advance first command information (stop header information, etc.) transmitted to the slave control means in the case of a first game (main game);
When executing a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game, a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H);
If it is the second game, a command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, the first command information to be sent to the slave control means in the case of the first game is stored in advance, and when the second game different from the first game is executed, the first command information is stored in the memory. Second game information is stored in the area. In the case of the second game, second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to transmit the second command information to the slave control means in the case of the second game, and the second command information can be transmitted depending on whether it is the first game or the second game. It becomes possible to cause the slave control means to perform the control according to the present invention.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in such a configuration, since it is not necessary to previously store the second command information in the main control means, it is possible to reduce the amount of data and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K2. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that when the first game is executed, first game information (00H) is stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when executing the first game, the first game information is stored in the storage area. With this configuration, there is no need to separately provide a storage area for storing the first game information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K3. In the gaming machine K2, when a first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, a first execution means (pseudo game flag setting function S504) for storing the second gaming information in the storage area; , if a second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, a second execution means (pseudo game flag clear) that changes the information stored in the storage area to the first game information function S611), a confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area. In this case, when the first game execution means (main game execution function) that executes the first game and the confirmation means confirm that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area. The information is changed to first game information. When the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area, the first game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first game information is stored in the storage area. 2 games are executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the storage area to be used not only for creating the second command information but also for determining whether to execute the first game or the second game, the storage capacity can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in .

Game machine K4. In the game machine K2 or K3, the command creation means stores the first command information and the storage area in both the first game and the second game. A game machine that creates command information by calculating stored game information.

According to this gaming machine, in both the first game and the second game, the command is executed by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the storage area. Create information. By adopting such a configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need for processing to determine whether it is the first game or the second game, and the amount of data can be reduced by simplifying the processing configuration. It becomes possible.

Game machine K5. In the game machine K4, when the command creation means calculates the first game information, the first command information, and the first game information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information. A gaming machine characterized by having the following configuration.

According to this gaming machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the result of the calculation remains the first command information. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine K6. A gaming machine characterized in that the first command information is a header in any of the gaming machines K1 to K5.

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as a header, and the header includes the first game and the second game information. It becomes possible to include information indicating which one. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine K7. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game, and the header is contained in one byte, so that when the slave control means receives the header, It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or gaming machine K7, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, the first game and the second game machine. A game storage bit that stores information indicating which game it is, and the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and whether it is the first game or the second game. The game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether the game is a first game or a second game in a bit that would have been unused in the past, and information indicating whether the game is a first game or a second game can be stored in a bit that would have been unused in the past. It becomes possible to suitably suppress redundancy of transmitted commands.

Game machine K9. The above-mentioned gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area. With this configuration, when creating a header by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc.

Game machine K10. In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, when the second gaming information is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the second gaming information is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that the first signal is not outputted to the outside of the gaming machine if the gaming machine is not operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and when the second game information is not stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the game machine. 1 signal is no longer output. With this configuration, the second game information has a function as information used when creating the second command information, a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine, It becomes possible to grant. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second game is a pseudo game, and the first game is a game that is not the pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo game through the first command information and the second command information.

Game machine K12. In any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second game is a game in a specific gaming state, and the first game is a game in a gaming state different from the specific gaming state. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state through the first command information and the second command information.

Note that the gaming machine group I to the gaming machine group K may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group I to gaming machine K group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group A to gaming machine H group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine L1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific performance execution unit (display control device 81, auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a specific performance (result display) when the first operation unit is operated after execution of the first performance;
Comprising a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that displays predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67),
When the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is satisfied after the start of the specific performance; A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation may be valid even if a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will feel irritated.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid if a specific condition is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that there are certain cases, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine L2. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) has elapsed since the specific effect was started.

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, there are cases in which the predetermined operation becomes valid after a specific time has elapsed after the start of the specific performance, and cases in which the predetermined operation is activated before the specific time has elapsed after the start of the specific performance. There are cases where it is valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

Game machine L3. The above-mentioned gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific performance is configured such that a specific result (presence or absence of a top-up) is announced until a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) shorter than the specific time elapses. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the specific performance, the specific result is announced until the second specific time period, which is shorter than the specific time period, has elapsed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a predetermined operation becomes effective before notifying a specific result.

Game machine L4. In the gaming machine L3, if a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. , wherein the second specific condition includes that the second specific time period elapses after starting the specific effect.

According to this gaming machine, if the second specific condition including elapse of the second specific time after starting the specific performance is satisfied, the predetermined operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, the specific result can be notified regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation is valid or the second specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation is valid. After that, it becomes possible to make the predetermined operation valid.

Game machine L5. The gaming machine L3 or L4, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first performance is executed but also when displaying predetermined information. In a configuration in which a specific performance is started based on the operation of the first operating means, there is a possibility that the player operates the first operating means again after notification of the specific result in hopes of further development of the performance. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to notify the specific result until the second specific time period, which is shorter than the specific time period, has elapsed, the chances of displaying specific information in a situation that the player did not intend to occur are reduced. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine L6. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the specific time is twice or more the second specific time.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific time is set to be more than twice the second specific time, if the player operates the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the performance after notification of the specific result, etc. This makes it possible to avoid displaying predetermined information.

Game machine L7. When the first effect is executed in any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the elapsed time after the specified condition (operation end command reception) is established is the first specified time (approximately 10 seconds). If the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time (approximately 2 seconds) after the specified effect has been reached, the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect is longer than the second specified time. The predetermined operation becomes effective when a long third predetermined time (approximately 5 seconds) is reached, and the predetermined condition is satisfied after the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches the second predetermined time. The predetermined operation is characterized in that the predetermined operation becomes effective when the elapsed time since the predetermined condition is met becomes the first predetermined time, and the elapsed time since the predetermined condition is met becomes the first predetermined time. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, after the elapsed time since the specified condition is established reaches the first specified time, the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time. When the specified time has elapsed, the predetermined operation becomes valid when the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the third specified time, which is longer than the second specified time, and the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect becomes effective. If after becoming the second specified time, the elapsed time since the specified condition was met becomes the first specified time, and if the elapsed time after the specified condition was satisfied becomes the first specified time, The predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches the second specified time.

Game machine L8. The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the specified condition is satisfied when the first effect is started.

According to this gaming machine, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective is determined by the relationship between the elapsed time from the start of the first performance and the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance becomes the second specified time. changes. Since the specific performance is started when the first operation means is operated, this configuration reduces the time required from the start of the first performance until the player operates the first operation means. It becomes possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing.

Game machine LL1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state),
When the first performance is executed, if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, the state shifts to the customer waiting state; A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine may shift to the customer waiting state even if a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the state shifts to the customer waiting state if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the state shifts to the customer wait state even if the specific condition is not satisfied after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that the timing of transition to the customer waiting state can be changed depending on, for example, the start timing of a specific performance, etc.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the configurations described in gaming machines L2 to L8 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state", and when combined, Even if there is, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine M1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means includes a specific command transmitting means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means is
a first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) that performs control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
a predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) that performs control to display predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, an enabling means for validating the subsequent predetermined operation (ends the press effect process and performs S3603) 1. A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player feels irritated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid, so the timing when the predetermined operation becomes valid can be defined by the reception timing of a specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine M2. In the gaming machine M1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is performed after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a second enabling means (a function of ending the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603).

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid after the specific performance has been executed. Become. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect.

Gaming machine M3. In the gaming machine M1 or gaming machine M2, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the predetermined effect is executed after the specific effect has been executed. A second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) is provided for validating the subsequent predetermined operation after a specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent performance will be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the specific performance has been executed. The predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect. In addition, by providing a grace period called a specified time between when the specific performance has been executed and when the predetermined operation becomes effective, the timing when the specific performance has been executed, that is, the timing when the first operation means is operated, can be adjusted. It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing at which the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M4. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first performance is executed but also when displaying predetermined information. In a configuration in which a specific performance is started using the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, there is a possibility that the player operates the first operating means again after the specific performance has been executed in hopes of further development of the performance. Conceivable. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid, such as when a specific command is received or after a specified time has elapsed, rather than the timing when a specific effect has been executed, the specified information can be made available in situations that the player did not intend. It is possible to reduce the chances of display.

Gaming machine M5. The gaming machine M4 includes a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols), and a start operation means (start lever) that is operated to start the cyclic display of the symbols. 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58), a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery of winning combinations, and a plurality of controllers that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the symbols. The stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) and the winning symbols corresponding to the winning combinations won in the lottery of the above-mentioned combinations form a predetermined combination (combination of minor combination symbols, etc.) at the valid position (valid line). The predetermined information control means includes at least a reward giving means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101) that gives a reward to the player as a winning result based on the stoppage, and the predetermined information control means at least controls the circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display the predetermined information when all of the symbols have stopped circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the above-described effects can be achieved in a slot machine that can display predetermined information even when a game has not started.

Gaming machine M6. In the game machine M5, the main control means sends an operation end command to the slave control means when all operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols are completed. A gaming machine comprising a transmitting means (operation end command transmitting function S3307), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on receiving the operation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the circular display of symbols are completed. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases where control is performed to execute a specific effect and cases where control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is enabled, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions. becomes possible.

Game machine M7. In the gaming machine M6, the specific command transmitting means, when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed after all operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols, A gaming machine characterized by transmitting the specific command.

According to this gaming machine, a specific command is transmitted when a predetermined specific time has elapsed after all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the circular display of symbols are completed. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the elapsed time after all the operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols are completed, and the timing when the specific effect has been executed, that is, when the first operation means was operated. It is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing.

Game machine M8. In the above-mentioned gaming machine M5, the main control means includes a circulation end command transmitting means (all A gaming machine comprising a reel stop completion command sending function (S3305), wherein the first performance control means performs control to execute the first performance based on receiving the circulation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all the circular displays of symbols have stopped. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases where control is performed to execute a specific effect and cases where control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is enabled, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions. becomes possible.

Game machine M9. In the gaming machine M8, the specific command transmitting means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all of the circulating display means stopped circulating display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, a specific command is transmitted when a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the cyclical display of all the symbols stopped. With such a configuration, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective is determined by the elapsed time after the circular display of all the symbols is completed and the timing at which the specific effect is completed, that is, the timing at which the first operating means is operated. It becomes possible to change the

Gaming machine MM1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means includes a specific command transmitting means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means is
a first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) that performs control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
Transition control means (standby processing function S3607) that performs control to transition to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, a transition enabling means (press effect processing) that enables the transition to the customer waiting state thereafter. (a function of terminating the process and proceeding to S3603).

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has been executed when a specific command is received, it is possible to transition to the customer waiting state after that, so the transition to the customer waiting state is possible. It is possible to define the timing of the command based on the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

Game machine MM2. In the gaming machine MM1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the process returns to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second transition enabling means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that enables the transition.

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state after the specific performance has been executed. Become something. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect.

In addition, in the configurations described in gaming machines M3 to M9 above, the statement "The subsequent predetermined operation is made valid" has been changed to "The transition to the customer waiting state is then possible." They may be changed and combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Game machine N1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
Comprising a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that displays predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67),
When the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid.

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player feels irritated.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that there are times when an operation is valid, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes valid, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine N2. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes an operating means (first timer operating function S3505) that operates the first timer when the first effect is started.

According to this gaming machine, the first timer is activated when the first performance is started. With this configuration, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is valid based on the time elapsed since the start of the first performance, and the predetermined operation is valid based on the time elapsed since the start of the specific performance. It is possible to create a configuration in which there are cases where a predetermined operation is valid based on the above information.

Game machine N3. In the gaming machine N1 or gaming machine N2, a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0), and the specific performance has been executed. an execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether or not the specified effect has been executed, and when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific effect has been executed, the predetermined A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which operations are effective.

According to this gaming machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific performance has been executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. , it is possible to reduce the chances of a delay between the first performance and the specific performance.

Game machine N4. In the gaming machine N3, if the specific performance has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, or if the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value (0) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the predetermined operation is enabled.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific performance has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the predetermined value, the predetermined operation is determined to be valid when the value of the second timer reaches the second predetermined value. Become. With such a configuration, if the first operating means is operated so that the specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific effect is executed depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. The first operating means is operated such that the specific effect is completed after the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, while having a configuration in which the length of time from when the specified operation becomes effective after the execution has been completed is changed. In this case, it becomes possible to make the length of time from when the specific performance has been executed until the predetermined operation becomes valid to be constant.

Game machine N5. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine N4 is provided with a second operating means (second timer operating function S4212) that operates the second timer when the specific performance has been executed.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer is configured to operate when a specific performance has been executed, the length of time from when the specific performance has been executed to when the predetermined operation becomes valid is constant. It becomes possible to do this.

Game machine N6. In the gaming machine N5, the second operating means does not operate the second timer if the specific performance is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer is not activated, and the specified performance is executed after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. When the performance has been executed, a second timer is activated. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. This makes it possible to configure a configuration in which the system does not operate, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Game machine N7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines N3 to N6, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. may be configured such that it does not operate.

Game machine N8. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer operates.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer does not operate when the first timer operates, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective. .

Game machine N9. In the gaming machine N8, a confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific performance has been executed; A gaming machine comprising: second operating means for operating the second timer when the confirmation means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific performance has been executed, it is checked whether the value of the first timer is the specified value, and if the value of the first timer is the specified value, the second timer is is activated. With this configuration, the first timer is operated until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific performance is completed. It becomes possible to operate the second timer at the appropriate timing.

Game machine N10. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. may be configured such that it does not operate.

Game machine NN1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state),
When the first performance is executed, the transition to the customer waiting state is based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the case where the transition to the customer waiting state is based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a case where the gaming machine shifts to the customer waiting state.

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there is a case where the customer waits state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and a case where the customer waits for the customer based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. Since there is a configuration in which there are cases in which the system shifts to the waiting state, it is possible to change the timing of shifting to the customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the configurations described in gaming machines N2 to N10 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state", and when combined, Even if there is, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Note that the gaming machine L group to the gaming machine N group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine A group to the gaming machine K group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine L group to the gaming machine N group, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine O1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
a first ending means (advantageous section end function S1703 to S1705 of the main controller 101) that ends the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first end condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is satisfied;
If a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, a second termination means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state. (advantageous section end function S4505 to S4507 of main controller 101);
comprising a control means (display control device 81) that performs control to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state;
The control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends; A gaming machine characterized in that, when an end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in a game round in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine O2. In the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied when the difference in the number of coins from the base point reaches the upper limit number (2400 coins) based on the time when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the difference in the number of coins from the base point when the number of game media decreases the most in an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number, the game ends at the next game round of the game round in which the difference number reaches the upper limit number. The screen will be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, but in such a configuration, the first end screen may be displayed depending on the lottery result of the combination, the operation method of the stop operation means, etc. This is because the game round in which the condition is satisfied may be shifted, and an event may occur in which the end screen is displayed over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended.

Game machine O3. The gaming machine O2 is provided with a difference number confirmation means (difference number confirmation function S4511 of the main controller 101) for checking the difference number, and when the difference number confirmation means reaches a prescribed number (2200 pieces) smaller than the upper limit number. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the player has played the game, the first ending condition is satisfied in a subsequent game round and the advantageous state ends.

According to this gaming machine, when the differential number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of medals is smaller than the upper limit number, the first end condition is satisfied in the subsequent game round and the advantageous state ends. With this configuration, the player can play a game in an advantageous state with the goal of making the difference in the number of coins reach the specified number. As a result, even in the case of a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of differential sheets in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play. In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to know in advance that the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, so the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of sheets has been reached, and then the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. It becomes possible to diversify the auxiliary effects until the first termination condition is satisfied.

Game machine O4. In the gaming machine O3, when the differential number of coins confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number of coins has been reached, control is performed to execute a continuous auxiliary effect (ending video) that continues until the game round in which the first ending condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a continuation auxiliary performance control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of the display control device 81).

According to this gaming machine, when the differential number confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number of medals has been reached, a continuous auxiliary performance is executed that continues until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player by continuous auxiliary performance that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, and the player can be informed that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. It becomes possible to let the player play the game while feeling a sense of superiority. Further, since the end screen is displayed in the next game round after the first end condition has been met, the player can play the next game round while immersing himself in the afterglow of the game. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine O5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the ending condition of the second gaming mode is satisfied, the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed in the game round where the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied. With this configuration, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting that the second game mode will continue, etc., and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Game machine O6. In the gaming machine O5, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the game round ends; however, in such a configuration, if the player immediately operates the start operation means to start the next game round, the end screen will be displayed. This is because it will not be possible to secure enough time to display the information.

Game machine O7. In the gaming machine O5 or the gaming machine O6, when the second ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one cyclic display means of the game round in which the second ending condition is satisfied displays the symbols cyclically. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is displayed in a situation where the game machine is not stopped.

According to the present gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, under a situation where at least one circulation display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied does not stop the circulation display of symbols. The end screen will be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of symbols, but in such a configuration, the player can immediately start the next game round. This is because when the operating means is operated, it becomes impossible to secure enough time to display the end screen.

Game machine O8. Any of the gaming machines O5 to O7 is provided with a number information storage means (transfer game number counter) for storing number information related to the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, and corresponds to the number of games information. A gaming machine characterized in that a condition for ending the second gaming mode is satisfied when a certain number of games have been played.

According to this gaming machine, when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, the condition for ending the second game mode is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the second game mode and the advantageous state have not ended.

Game machine O9. In the gaming machine O8, an increase lottery means (addition lottery processing function S4403 of the main control device 101) that performs an increase lottery (addition lottery) to determine whether to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode; A gaming machine characterized by comprising: winning notification means (resurrection effect on an auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery.

Game machine O10. In any of the gaming machines O1 to O9, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (combination of minor symbol symbols, etc.) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
A game characterized in that, when transitioning from the second game mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed to notify that the advantageous state has ended in the first game of the normal state. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P2. The gaming machine P1 is provided with a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether to transition from the normal state to the first game mode, and the transition determination means A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the end screen is continuously displayed until a gaming cycle is determined to be shifted to a mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game round in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P3. The above-mentioned gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is provided with a number-of-games notification means (a function for displaying the number of consecutive games of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of games played under the first gaming mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played will not be the same as the number of games played under the first gaming mode, so it is not possible to notify or update the number of games played under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, there is a possibility that players may think that playing under normal conditions is meaningless and reduce their desire to play. . However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played in the first game mode, which reduces the visual discomfort. It becomes possible to reduce the amount. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine P4. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P3 is provided with a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, The determining means is characterized in that the percentage of determining that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is determined is higher than the percentage of determining that the transition is not to be transitioned from the normal state to the first gaming mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game stays in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen during the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary performances executed under the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the chances that the end screen will be displayed continuously for a long period of time, and the player will not end the game while the end screen is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the chances of this happening.

Game machine P5. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of coins from when the number of game media in the advantageous state is reduced to the end until the end of the advantageous state, and the end screen A gaming machine characterized in that the difference number of coins displayed in the game machine is configured such that the game result in the normal state is not reflected.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference number of coins displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game result in the normal state. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to accurately notify the number of gaming media acquired by the player under advantageous conditions. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P6. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode; advantageous information reporting means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying advantageous information advantageous to the player when the means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first gaming mode; A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, if the normal state does not change to the first gaming mode, advantageous information advantageous to the player is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from shying away from playing games under normal conditions.

Game machine P7. In the gaming machine P6, the advantageous information notifying means is configured to cause all of the plurality of circulation display means to display the symbols in a cycle in a game round in which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first game mode is not to be performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is obtained before all of the plurality of circulation display means stop circulating display of symbols in the game round in which the transition determination means has determined not to make the transition from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the picture, the notification is no longer made. With this configuration, it is possible to allow a player who wants to check advantageous information to play a game under normal conditions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing due to the normal state.

Game machine P8. The gaming machine P6 or P7 is characterized in that the advantageous information notifying means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play when the normal state is not shifted to the first gaming mode. Further, when this configuration is applied to the configuration related to the gaming machine P2, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous under the normal state. If the end screen is continuously displayed over multiple game rounds, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. This is because it becomes possible to make the player's attention focus on advantageous information.

Game machine P9. Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 is characterized by comprising an end screen control means (display control device 81) that performs control to display the end screen at a game round in which the second game mode ends. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round when the second gaming mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the normal state is present. .

Gaming machine P10. In the above-mentioned gaming machine P9, an additional lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) that performs an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. processing function S4403), and a winning notification means (resurrection effect on the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increased lottery was won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration that displays an end screen under normal conditions, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, when a predetermined player ends a game with the end screen displayed, the other players operate the start operation means to start the next game while expecting the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to do so.

Gaming machine P11. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, if the first ending condition (difference number of coins is 2400) is satisfied, first ending means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end function (S1703 to S1705), if a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, the advantageous state is ended. a second ending means for transitioning to the normal state (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101); and a control means (display control device) for controlling to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state. 81), and the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended. and when the second termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the gaming machine is characterized in that control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
A transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode;
If the transition determining means determines that the normal state should not be transitioned to the first game mode, advantageous information reporting means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display section 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, if the normal state does not change to the first gaming mode, advantageous information advantageous to the player is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from shying away from playing games under normal conditions, and it is possible to improve their interest in playing games.

Gaming machine Q2. In the above-mentioned gaming machine Q1, the advantageous information informing means is configured to display a pattern in which all of the plurality of circulation display means rotate the symbols in a game round in which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first game mode is not to be performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is obtained before all of the plurality of circulation display means stop circulating display of symbols in the game round in which the transition determination means has determined not to make the transition from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the picture, the notification is no longer made. With this configuration, it is possible to allow a player who wants to check advantageous information to play a game under normal conditions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing due to the normal state.

Gaming machine Q3. The gaming machine Q1 or Q2 is characterized in that the advantageous information notifying means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play when the normal state is not shifted to the first gaming mode.

Gaming machine Q4. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state to notify that the advantageous state has ended. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q5. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until the game round in which the transition determining means determines to transition to the first gaming mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game round in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, if the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game under the normal state may become monotonous. However, in a configuration in which advantageous information is reported when the normal state continues, it is possible to make the player have expectations that, for example, the next game round will be informed of advantageous information different from this time. It becomes possible to direct the player's attention to advantageous information. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine Q6. The above-mentioned gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a number-of-games notification means (a function for displaying the number of consecutive games of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of games played under the first gaming mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played will not be the same as the number of games played under the first gaming mode, so it is not possible to notify or update the number of games played under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, there is a possibility that players may think that playing under normal conditions is meaningless and reduce their desire to play. . However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played in the first game mode, which reduces the visual discomfort. It becomes possible to reduce the amount. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Gaming machine Q7. In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of game media from the time when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state, and the end screen A gaming machine characterized in that the difference number of coins displayed in the game machine is configured such that the game result in the normal state is not reflected.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference number of coins displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game result in the normal state. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to accurately notify the number of gaming media acquired by the player under advantageous conditions. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine Q8. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the ratio at which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is determined is higher than the rate at which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the ratio is higher than the ratio to be determined.

According to this gaming machine, the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game stays in the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games in the normal state. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the above-mentioned gaming machine Q5, it becomes possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is displayed continuously for a long period of time, and the chance that the player ends the game while the end screen remains is reduced. It is possible to reduce the

Game machine Q9. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above is characterized in that it includes an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls displaying the end screen in the game round in which the second game mode ends. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round when the second gaming mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the normal state is present. .

Gaming machine Q10. In the above-mentioned gaming machine Q9, an additional lottery means (an additional lottery of the main controller 101) that performs an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. processing function S4403), and a winning notification means (resurrection effect on the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increased lottery was won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration that displays an end screen under normal conditions, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, when a predetermined player ends a game with the end screen displayed, the other players operate the start operation means to start the next game while expecting the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to do so.

Gaming machine Q11. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, if the first ending condition (difference number of coins is 2400) is satisfied, first ending means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end function (S1703 to S1705), if a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, the advantageous state is ended. a second ending means for transitioning to the normal state (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101); and a control means (display control device) for controlling to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state. 81), and the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended. and when the second termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the gaming machine is characterized in that control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the gaming machine group O to the gaming machine Q group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group O to the gaming machine Q group may be combined with the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine N group as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

Game machine R1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
As a judgment target determined in the lottery of the above-mentioned role,
When the plurality of stop operation means are operated with a first operation method (middle left and right), a winning in which a first number (8) of game media is awarded is established, and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with a different operation method than the first operation method, a first determination target (middle left and right bells 1) for which a winning can be established in which a second number (1) of game media smaller than the first number is awarded when the stop operation means is operated;
When the plurality of stop operation means are operated with the first operation method, a winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, and the plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the first operation method. comprising at least a second determination object (a first special bell) that can lead to a winning in which the second number of game media is awarded when operated;
The first determination target and another predetermined determination target (left middle right bell 1) form a first group, and the second determination target and another predetermined determination target different from the first group (second special A gaming machine characterized in that a second group is formed by (Bell).

According to this gaming machine, as a determination target to be determined in the winning combination lottery, when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with the first operation method, a winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, and the first number of game media is awarded. A first determination target for which a winning can be established in which a second number of game media smaller than the first number is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the operation method; A winning is established in which a first number of game media is awarded when a stop operation means is operated, and a second number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the first operation method. At least a second determination target is provided for which a winning prize can be established. With such a configuration, a plurality of lottery results of the lottery means are generated for one event in which a winning prize is established in which a first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with the first operation method. It becomes possible to make a correspondence.

Further, the first determination target forms a first group with another predetermined determination target, and the second determination target forms a second group with another predetermined determination target different from the first group. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform control according to the group.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine R2. In the gaming machine R1, the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation method (right, left, center) as a determination target determined in the lottery of the winning combination. is established, and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the second operation method, a third determination target (right-left center bell 1 ), a winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with the second operation method, and the plurality of stop operation means are operated with the operation method different from the second operation method. The first group includes at least a fourth determination target (third special bell) that can lead to a winning award in which the second number of game media is awarded when the operating means is operated, and the first group includes at least the first determination target (third special bell). A gaming machine including a target and the third determination target, wherein the second group includes at least the second determination target and the fourth determination target.

According to this gaming machine, as a determination target to be determined in the winning combination lottery, when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with the second operation method, a winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, and the second number of game media is awarded. A third determination target that can lead to a winning in which a second number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method different from the operation method, and a third determination target that can be established to win a prize in which a second number of game media is awarded, and a plurality of stop operation means are operated with the second operation method. When the first number of game media is awarded, a winning is established, and when the plurality of stop operation means is operated with an operating method different from the second operating method, a winning is established where the second number of gaming media is awarded. At least a possible fourth determination target is provided. With such a configuration, a plurality of lottery results of the lottery means are generated for one event in which a winning prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with the second operation method. It becomes possible to make a correspondence.

Further, the first group includes at least the first determination target and the third determination target, and the second group includes at least the second determination target and the fourth determination target. With such a configuration, even if it is detected which group the winning target belongs to, the operation method for establishing the winning prize for which the first number of game media will be awarded will be fixed. It is possible to avoid being caught.

Game machine R3. The gaming machine R2 is characterized in that the first operating method and the second operating method differ in the order in which the plurality of stop operating means are operated.

According to this gaming machine, the first operating method and the second operating method differ in the operating order of the plurality of stop operating means. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a unique correspondence between which group the winning target belongs to and the order of operations for establishing a winning prize in which the first number of game media is awarded. becomes possible.

Game machine R4. The gaming machine R2 or R3 is characterized in that the probability of winning the first determination target and the probability of winning the third determination target are equal.

According to this gaming machine, the probability of winning the first determination target is equal to the probability of winning the third determination target, so when performing control according to the first group, the first operation method The probability of winning a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded is different depending on whether a plurality of stop operation means are operated and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated using the second operation method. It is possible to avoid this.

Game machine R5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target.

According to this gaming machine, the probability of winning the second determination target is equal to the probability of winning the fourth determination target, so when performing control according to the second group, the first operating method The probability of winning a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded is different depending on whether a plurality of stop operation means are operated and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated using the second operation method. It is possible to avoid this.

Game machine R6. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines R2 to R5, a plurality of determination targets having equal winning probabilities are grouped into one group.

According to this gaming machine, since a plurality of determination targets with equal winning probabilities are grouped into one group, when performing control according to the group, the probability of winning a prize in which the first number of gaming media is awarded is determined by the operating method. This makes it possible to avoid different results depending on the situation.

Game machine R7. In any of the game machines R1 to R6, a plurality of determination targets for which a prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded only when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operation method. A gaming machine characterized by combining the following into one group.

According to the present gaming machine, a plurality of determination targets are grouped into one group for which a prize is awarded in which the first number of game media is awarded only when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in a predetermined operation method. When performing control according to the group, it is possible to avoid the probability of winning a prize awarded with the first number of game media differing depending on the operating method.

Game machine R8. In any of the game machines R1 to R7, the first group is provided with the first number of game media when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a specific operation method (center left, right). A determination target in which a prize is awarded and the second number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means is operated with an operation method different from the specific operation method (left middle right bell 1) , and the second group is a player who wins a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means is operated with the specific operating method, and where the second group is a player who wins a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operating means is operated with the specific operating method, and with an operating method different from the specific operating method. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine does not include a determination target that can lead to a winning in which the second number of gaming media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated.

According to this gaming machine, in the first group, a prize is established in which a first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with a specific operation method, and a plurality of prizes are awarded with a first number of game media when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with a specific operation method. The second group includes judgment targets for which a winning of a second number of game media can be established when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in a specific operation method. includes a determination target in which a prize in which a second number of game media is awarded is established and a prize in which a second number of game media is awarded is established when a plurality of stop operation means is operated with an operation method different from the specific operation method. do not have. With such a configuration, the first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with a specific operation method and when a plurality of stop operation means are operated with an operation method other than the specific operation method. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the probability of winning a prize differs with a relatively simple configuration.

Game machine R9. In any of the game machines R1 to R8, an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display section 65) that informs of an operation method that can establish a winning prize in which the first number of game media is awarded; , a notification determining means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation method, and the notification determining means is configured to determine whether or not to notify the user of the operation method. The gaming machine is characterized in that the frequency at which the operation method is determined to be notified is different depending on whether the determination target belonging to the second group is won.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to establish a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded in the case where the judgment object belonging to the first group is won and when the judgment object belonging to the second group is won. The frequency with which the available operating methods are determined differs. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether to notify the operating method.

Game machine R10. The gaming machine R9 has a main control means (main control device 101) that includes at least the lottery means and the notification determination means and controls the progress of the game, and a subordinate control means (main control device 101) that controls the progress of the game, and sub-control means (display control device 81) that performs control, and the main control means controls the notification determining means to perform the operation method in a situation where the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is selected. When it is decided to notify, information indicating which judgment target has been won is transmitted to the sub-control means, and in a situation where the judgment target belonging to the first group or the second group has been won, the notification determining means If it is determined not to notify the operating method, information indicating the group to which the winning determination target belongs is transmitted to the sub-control means, while information indicating which determination target has been won is not transmitted to the sub-control means. A gaming machine featuring:

According to the present gaming machine, the main control means includes at least the lottery means and the notification determination means and controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control means performs subordinate control based on information transmitted from the main control means. It is equipped with Then, when the notification determining means determines to notify the operation method in a situation where a candidate for determination belonging to the first group or the second group has won, the main control means controls information indicating which determination target has been won. means to send. If the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation method in a situation where a judgment object belonging to the first group or the second group is selected, the information indicating the group to which the selected judgment object belongs is transmitted to the sub-control means; , does not transmit information indicating which judgment target has been won to the sub-control means. With such a configuration, when the notification determining means decides not to notify the operating method in a situation where a candidate for determination belonging to the first group or the second group has been selected, the sub-control means determines which determination target has been selected. It becomes possible to create a configuration that is unknown to the user. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraud in which the winning determination target is acquired from the sub-control means side.

Game machine S1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
As a determination target to be determined in the lottery for the winning combination, a specific determination target in which a prize is established in which a first number (8) of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation order (middle left and right). (center left/right bell 1, first special bell), and a predetermined determination target for which winning is achieved in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order (left center right). (Left middle right bell 1), and at least a plurality of the specific determination targets are provided,
A first group includes the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target, and a first group includes the specific determination target and the predetermined determination target. and a second group that includes the predetermined determination target but does not include the predetermined determination target,
an operation order notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display section 65) for notifying an operation order that can establish a winning prize in which the first number of game media is awarded;
comprising a notification determining means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation order,
The operation order notification means determines the operation order in a specific gaming state (notification mode A) when a determination target belonging to the first group is won and when a determination target belonging to the second group is won. A gaming machine characterized by different notification frequencies.

According to this gaming machine, as a determination target to be determined in the winning combination lottery, a specific determination target for which a winning is established in which a first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation order; A predetermined determination target is provided, and at least a plurality of specific determination targets are provided, in which a prize is established in which a first number of game media are awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation order. With this configuration, the first number of game media is provided when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. It is possible to vary the frequency at which prizes are won.

In addition, the determination targets for which a winning in which a first number of game media is awarded are established according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including a specific determination target and a predetermined determination target, and a first group including a specific determination target. and a second group that does not include the predetermined determination target, and in a specific gaming state, the operation order is determined based on the case where the determination target belonging to the first group is won and the case where the determination target belonging to the second group is won. The frequency of notification is different. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order in a specific gaming state. As a result, when a player is selected to win a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the order of operation of the plurality of stop operation means, the operation order is notified, and the operation order is not notified. It becomes possible to realize a certain specific gaming state with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration including, for example, three types of operation orders that can establish a winning prize in which the first number of game media are awarded, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation order (right, left, center), the A third determination target (right, left, middle bell 1) is provided for which a winning prize for which one number of game media is awarded is established, and a first group including the specific determination target, the predetermined determination target, and the third determination target, and the specific The above-described effects can be achieved by categorizing the objects into a determination target and a second group that includes the third determination target but does not include the predetermined determination target. The same applies to a configuration including four or more types of the above-mentioned operation orders.

Game machine S2. The gaming machine S1 is characterized in that the probability of winning one of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning one of the predetermined determination targets.

According to this gaming machine, the probability of winning any of the specific determination targets is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined determination target. With this configuration, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, the first number of game media are awarded more than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of winnings.

Game machine S3. In the gaming machine S1 or gaming machine S2, the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order with a predetermined probability when a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and A gaming machine characterized in that, when a determination target belonging to a group is won, it is determined that the operation order is always notified.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, it is determined that the operation order will be notified with a predetermined probability, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is always notified. Decide to notify. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded between a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is There will be a difference. However, in a configuration in which it is determined that the operation order is always notified when a judgment object belonging to the second group is won, the probability of winning a specific judgment object in a situation where the operation order is not announced is different from the winning probability of a predetermined judgment object. This is because it becomes possible to reduce the difference, and it becomes possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded.

Game machine S4. The gaming machine S3 is characterized in that the winning probabilities of the determination targets belonging to the first group are made equal.

According to this gaming machine, the winning probabilities of the determination targets belonging to the first group are equal. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified under a specific gaming state. becomes.

Game machine S5. Any of the gaming machines S1 to S4 is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the frequency in which the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order is higher than the specific gaming state, and the notification determining means The determining means determines that when a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation order will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and A gaming machine characterized in that, when a determination target is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the notification determining means determines that when a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation order will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state; When a determination target belonging to a group is won, it is determined that the operation order will be notified with equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded between a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is There will be a difference. However, in a configuration in which the frequency at which the operation order is determined to be announced in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state does not change when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, in a situation where the operation order is not announced, This is because it becomes possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the specific judgment target and the winning probability of the predetermined judgment target, and it becomes possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded. be.

Game machine S6. In the gaming machine S5, based on the fact that the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, 2. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main controller 101) for determining whether to transition to a specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a player wins a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group under a specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, the second specific gaming state is entered. It is determined whether or not to migrate. With this configuration, even if the order of operations is not notified under the specific gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to move to the second specific gaming state, thereby improving the interest in the game. becomes possible.

Game machine S7. In the gaming machine S6, the transition determining means determines whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning in which the first number of game media is awarded is established. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a winning prize is established in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state. In such a configuration, a player who knows that the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the fact, can enter the second specific gaming state. This will result in a difference in the transition probability. This may lead not only to a difference in profits among the players, but also to a decrease in the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S5, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, and thus the above concerns can be suitably resolved. becomes possible.

Game machine S8. In any of the gaming machines S1 to S7, a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific gaming state, and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a grant determining means for determining whether or not to grant a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state, based on the above.

According to the present gaming machine, based on the fact that a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under a specific gaming condition and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, the game is executed under the specific gaming condition. It is determined whether or not to provide a benefit related to the possible number of games. By adopting such a configuration, even if the order of operations is not notified under the specific gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state will be awarded. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine S9. In the gaming machine S8, the award determining means determines whether or not to award a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning is established in which the first number of game media are awarded. A gaming machine characterized by making a determination.

According to this gaming machine, when a winning prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, it is determined whether or not to award a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under a specific gaming state. In such a configuration, there is a difference in the probability of awarding the benefit between a player who knows that the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded differs depending on the order of operations, and a player who does not know the above fact. will occur. This may lead not only to a difference in profits among the players, but also to a decrease in the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine S8, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded, so the above concerns can be suitably resolved. becomes possible.

Game machine S10. In any of the gaming machines S1 to S9, a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the frequency in which the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order is lower than the specific gaming state; a specific transition means (game section processing function of the main controller 101) that causes the transition to a specific gaming state; When operated in the first operation order, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operating order. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order in a situation where the first operation order has not been notified, the processing speed is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. The frequency of transition from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state becomes lower. With this configuration, it is possible to differentiate the increase and decrease of game media between a predetermined game state and a specific game state while urging the player to operate the plurality of stop operation means in the second operation order. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine T1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
A first determination in which a first number (8) of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a first operation order (middle left and right) as a determination target determined in the winning combination lottery. A second prize in which the first number of game media is awarded when the target (center left and right bells 1, first special bell) and the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation order (left center right). Set up a judgment target (left middle right bell 1),
an operation order notification means (instruction monitor, auxiliary display section 65) for notifying an operation order that can establish a winning prize in which the first number of game media is awarded;
comprising a notification determining means (navigation determination processing function S5708 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to notify the operation order,
The probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target,
The operation order notification means is configured such that, in a specific gaming state (notification mode A), the frequency with which the operation order is notified when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency with which the operation order is notified when the second determination target is won. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the frequency of notification is higher than the frequency of notification.

According to this gaming machine, the first determination target determined in the lottery of winning combinations is the first determination target in which a winning is established in which the first number of game media is awarded when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order. and a second determination target in which a winning prize is established in which a first number of game media is awarded when a plurality of stop operation means are operated in a second operation order. The probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target. With this configuration, the first number of game media is provided when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. It is possible to vary the frequency at which prizes are won.

Further, in a specific game state, the frequency of notifying the operation order when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency of notifying the operation order when the second determination target is won. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of profit disparities among players in a specific gaming state depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the present gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded between a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is There will be a difference. However, in a specific gaming state, in a configuration where the frequency of notifying the operation order when the first determination target is won is higher than the frequency of notifying the operation order when the second determination target is won, the operation order is It is possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first determination target and the winning probability of the second determination target in a situation where notification is not made, and the difference in the frequency of winnings for which the first number of game media is awarded is reduced. This is because it becomes possible to do so.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine T2. In the gaming machine T1, when the operation order is not notified under the specific gaming state, there is a case where the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, and a case where the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order. The winning probabilities of the first determination target and the second determination target, and the notification determining means so that the probability of winning a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded is the same as when the operations are performed in two operation orders. A gaming machine characterized in that the frequency at which the controller determines to notify the operation order is determined.

According to this gaming machine, when the operation order is not notified under a specific gaming state, there are cases in which the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order, and cases in which the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. The winning probability of the first determination target and the second determination target, and the frequency with which the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order so that the probability of winning a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded is equal to the case where the and is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference in profits between players in a specific gaming state depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine.

Game machine T3. In the gaming machine T1 or gaming machine T2, based on the fact that the first determination target or the second determination target is won under the specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, A gaming machine characterized by comprising a grant determining means for determining whether to grant a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, based on the fact that the first determination target or the second determination target is won under the specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, it is possible to play the game under the specific gaming state. It is determined whether or not to provide a benefit related to the number of games played. By adopting such a configuration, even if the order of operations is not notified under the specific gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state will be awarded. This makes it possible to improve the game's interest.

Game machine T4. In the gaming machine T3, the award determining means determines whether or not to award a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under the specific gaming state when a winning is established in which the first number of game media are awarded. A gaming machine characterized by making a determination.

According to this gaming machine, when a winning prize is established in which the first number of game media is awarded, it is determined whether or not to award a benefit related to the number of games that can be played under a specific gaming state. In such a configuration, there is a difference in the probability of awarding the benefit between a player who knows that the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded differs depending on the order of operations, and a player who does not know the above fact. will occur. This may lead not only to a difference in profits among the players, but also to a decrease in the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T3, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, so the above concerns can be suitably resolved. becomes possible.

Game machine T5. In any of the gaming machines T1 to T4, a predetermined gaming state (chance mode) in which the frequency in which the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order is lower than the specific gaming state; a specific transition means (game section processing function of the main controller 101) that causes the transition to a specific gaming state; When operated in the first operation order, the frequency of transition from the predetermined gaming state to the specific gaming state is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operating order. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order in a situation where the first operation order has not been notified, the processing speed is lower than when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. The frequency of transition from a predetermined gaming state to a specific gaming state becomes lower. With this configuration, it is possible to differentiate the increase and decrease of game media between a predetermined game state and a specific game state while urging the player to operate the plurality of stop operation means in the second operation order. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine T6. In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, a plurality of the first determination targets are provided, and the determination targets are determined to determine whether a winning in which the first number of game media is awarded is established depending on the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means. , a first group including the first determination target and the second determination target, and a second group including the first determination target but not including the second determination target, and the notification determining means In the specific gaming state, the frequency at which it is decided to notify the operation order is different depending on whether the determination target belonging to the first group is won or the determination target belonging to the second group is won. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, since a plurality of first determination targets are provided, it is possible to relatively easily realize a configuration in which the probability of winning the first determination target is higher than the probability of winning the second determination target. becomes.

In addition, the determination targets for which a winning in which a first number of game media is awarded are established according to the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means are classified into a first group including a first determination target and a second determination target, and a first determination target. and a second group that does not include the second determination target, and a second group that does not include the second determination target, and a case in which a determination target belonging to the first group is won in a specific gaming state, and a case in which a determination target belonging to the second group is won. , the frequency at which it is decided to notify the operation order is different. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control according to the group when determining whether or not to notify the operation order in a specific gaming state. As a result, when a player is selected to win a prize in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the order of operation of the plurality of stop operation means, the operation order is notified, and the operation order is not notified. It becomes possible to realize a certain specific gaming state with a relatively simple configuration.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration including, for example, three types of operation orders that can establish a winning prize in which the first number of game media are awarded, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation order (right, left, center), the A third determination target (center bell 1 on the right and left) is provided for which a winning prize for which one number of game media is awarded is provided, and a first group includes the first determination target, the second determination target, and the third determination target; If the configuration is such that the classification is performed into a second group that includes the first determination target and the third determination target but does not include the second determination target, the above-described effects can be achieved. The same applies to a configuration including four or more types of the above-mentioned operation orders.

Game machine T7. In the gaming machine T6, the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order with a predetermined probability when a determination target belonging to the first group is won in the specific gaming state, and determines that the operation order is determined to belong to the second group. A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined to always notify the operation order when a target is won.

According to this gaming machine, in a specific gaming state, if a determination target belonging to the first group is won, it is determined that the operation order will be notified with a predetermined probability, and if a determination target belonging to the second group is won, the operation order is always notified. Decide to notify. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded between a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is There will be a difference. However, in a configuration in which it is determined that the operation order is always notified when a judgment object belonging to the second group is won, the winning probability of the first judgment object and the winning probability of the second judgment object in a situation where the operation order is not notified. This is because it becomes possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded.

Game machine T8. The gaming machine T7 is characterized in that the winning probabilities of the determination targets belonging to the first group are made equal.

According to this gaming machine, the winning probabilities of the determination targets belonging to the first group are equal. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded depending on the operation order when the operation order is not notified under a specific gaming state. becomes.

Game machine T9. Any of the gaming machines T6 to T8 is provided with a second specific gaming state (notification mode B) in which the notification determining means determines to notify the operation order with a higher frequency than the specific gaming state, The determining means determines that when a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation order will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state, and A gaming machine characterized in that, when a determination target is won, it is determined that the operation order is notified with equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the notification determining means determines that when a determination target belonging to the first group is won, the operation order will be notified more frequently in the second specific gaming state than in the specific gaming state; When a determination target belonging to a group is won, it is determined that the operation order will be notified with equal frequency in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a difference in profits among players depending on the amount of knowledge regarding the gaming machine. In other words, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded is higher when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation order and when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation order. In a different configuration, in a situation where the order of operations is not notified, the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded between a player who knows the above fact and a player who does not know the above fact is There will be a difference. However, in a configuration in which the frequency at which the operation order is determined to be announced in the specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state does not change when a determination target belonging to the second group is won, in a situation where the operation order is not announced, It becomes possible to reduce the difference between the winning probability of the first judgment target and the winning probability of the second judgment target, and it becomes possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded. It is from.

Game machine T10. In the gaming machine T9, based on the fact that the determination target belonging to the first group or the second group is won under the specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, 2. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a transition determination means (promotion lottery function S6007 of the main controller 101) for determining whether to transition to a specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when a player wins a determination target belonging to the first group or the second group under a specific gaming state and the notification determining means determines not to notify the operation order, the second specific gaming state is entered. It is determined whether or not to migrate. With this configuration, even if the order of operations is not notified under the specific gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting to move to the second specific gaming state, thereby improving the interest in the game. becomes possible.

Gaming machine T11. In the gaming machine T10, the transition determining means determines whether or not to transition to the second specific gaming state when a winning in which the first number of game media is awarded is established. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a winning prize is established in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second specific gaming state. In such a configuration, a player who knows that the frequency of winnings in which the first number of game media is awarded differs depending on the order of operations and a player who does not know the fact, can enter the second specific gaming state. This will result in a difference in the transition probability. This may lead not only to a difference in profits among the players, but also to a decrease in the latter player's desire to play. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine T10, it is possible to reduce the difference in the frequency of winnings in which the first number of gaming media is awarded, so the above concerns can be suitably resolved. becomes possible.

Note that the gaming machine group R to the gaming machine T group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group A to Q group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group R to gaming machine T group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine U1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
As a gaming state, the operating frequency of a first gaming state (chance mode) and an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operating method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) is higher than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state (notification mode),
A grant determination means for determining whether to grant advantageous benefits (transition to notification mode, additional number of games);
Advantageous benefit granting means (notification mode transition function S6307 of main controller 101, add-on game number addition function S7010) that grants the advantageous benefit when the granting determination means determines to grant the advantageous benefit;
A production execution means (auxiliary display unit 65) that executes a suggestive production (confrontation production) that suggests whether or not the advantageous benefit is granted;
Execution determining means for determining whether to execute the suggestive effect;
and a period setting means for setting a plurality of game times as a performance period in which the suggestive performance can be executed when it is determined to execute the suggestive performance,
The execution determining means includes:
A first execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery of the display control device 81) that determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect in a situation where the award determining means does not determine that the advantageous benefit will be imparted under the first gaming state. function S6702) and
A second execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery of the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect in a situation where the award determining means does not determine that the advantageous benefit will be imparted under the second gaming state. Equipped with function S6901),
The period setting means includes:
a first period setting means (confrontation game number setting function S6705 of the display control device 81) that sets the effect period when the first execution determining means determines to execute the suggested effect;
a second period setting means (confrontation game number setting function S6904 of the main control device 101) for setting the effect period when the second execution determining means determines to execute the suggested effect;
The second execution determining means and the second period setting means are provided in the main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game, and the first execution determining means and the first period setting means are provided in the main control means (main control device 101) that collectively manages the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided in a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the control means.

According to this gaming machine, when executing a suggestive performance that suggests whether or not an advantageous benefit will be provided, a plurality of game times are set as a performance period in which the suggestive performance can be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for being given an advantageous benefit over a plurality of gaming sessions, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in gaming.

In addition, whether or not to execute the suggestion performance in a situation where the grant determining means does not determine that an advantageous benefit will be granted under the first gaming state is determined by the slave control means, and the granting determination is determined under the second gaming state. The configuration is such that the main control means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance in a situation where the means has not determined that an advantageous benefit will be given. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control means, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine U2. In the gaming machine U1, the main control means manages the gaming state, and includes the awarding determination means and the advantageous privilege granting means, and the granting determination means is configured to manage the gaming state in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by determining whether to provide an advantageous benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under a second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the grant determining means determines whether or not to grant an advantageous benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. In such a configuration, in a situation where the grant determination means has not determined to grant an advantageous benefit under the second gaming state, if the subordinate control means determines whether or not to execute the suggestion effect, the suggestion There is a possibility that the processing configuration related to determining whether or not to perform the performance becomes complicated, or that there are restrictions on the performance that can be executed. This is because, depending on the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state, there is a possibility that there will be restrictions on the number of games that can be played during the set performance period, or that the suggested performance itself will not be able to be executed. On the other hand, in a situation where the grant determining means has not determined to grant an advantageous benefit under the second gaming state, if the main control means determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance, each of the above-mentioned It becomes possible to appropriately eliminate concerns.

Game machine U3. The gaming machine U2 is characterized in that, when the second period setting means sets the performance period, the second gaming state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this gaming machine, since the second gaming state is configured such that it does not end until the performance period set by the second period setting means ends, for example, it is determined that the suggested performance is to be executed in the last game round of the second gaming state. In this case, the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state increases by the number of games set as the performance period. As a result, even in the case where a suggestive effect suggesting that an increased benefit is not provided is executed, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment.

Game machine U4. In the gaming machine U3, when the second execution determining means determines to execute the suggestion effect, the number of games set by the second period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. , and the number of games set by the second period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. In this case, changing means for changing the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state becomes the number of games that can be played under the second period setting means ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a missing game number adding function S6906) of the main control device 101.

According to this gaming machine, when the second execution determining means decides to execute the suggested effect, the number of games set by the second period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state are compared. be done. If the number of games set by the second period setting means is larger than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is set in the second period. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is changed so that the number of games that can be played is the number of games set by the means. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the second gaming state to not end until the performance period ends.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effect indicating whether or not an increased benefit will be provided. For example, if the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is also possible to configure the system so that the suggestion effect is not executed. However, in such a configuration, although it is necessary to have a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games, there is a possibility that the games after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games will become monotonous. There are concerns. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which, in each game after the remaining number of games is less than the maximum number of games, another effect indicating whether or not an additional benefit will be granted is executed in one game. . However, in the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to store the other effects mentioned above in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also limits the effects that can be executed depending on the number of remaining games. There is also the issue of receiving it. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state can be changed so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state becomes the number of games set by the period setting means, It becomes possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

Game machine U5. In the above gaming machine U3 or gaming machine U4, the changing means controls whether the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state; If the number of games set by the setting means is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is not changed. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, and when the number of games set by the second period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, If it is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase due to the execution of the suggestion effect to a situation where the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation where the end of the second game state is near. As a result, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay in a situation where the end of the second gaming state is near, and it becomes possible to improve gaming interest.

Game machine U6. In any of the gaming machines U3 to U5, the grant determining means grants the advantageous benefit in a game round from when the second period setting means sets the presentation period until the end of the presentation period. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the performance period does not change when it is determined that the performance period does not change.

According to this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an advantageous benefit is to be given during the performance period, the length of the performance period does not change. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and avoid unnecessary lengthening of the performance period.

Game machine U7. In the gaming machine U6, when the grant determining means determines to grant the advantageous benefit in a game round from the time when the second period setting means sets the performance period to the end of the performance period, the performance A gaming machine characterized in that the execution means executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the advantageous benefit will be provided.

According to this gaming machine, the second period setting means sets the performance period in a situation where the grant determination means does not determine that an advantageous benefit will be granted, and the grant determination means is advantageous in the game rounds until the performance period ends. If it is determined that a benefit will be awarded, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests that an advantageous benefit will be awarded. With this configuration, even if the length of the presentation period is not changed, it is possible to execute the suggestion presentation according to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Game machine U8. In any of the gaming machines U1 to U7, the second execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive performance.

Game machine U9. In any of the gaming machines U1 to U8, the main control means manages the gaming state, and includes the awarding determination means and the advantageous privilege granting means, and the granting determination means A gaming machine characterized in that, in a first gaming state, it is determined whether or not to provide an advantageous benefit that causes a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, the award determining means determines whether or not to award an advantageous benefit that causes a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state in the first gaming state. In such a configuration, if the grant determining means does not determine that an advantageous benefit will be granted under the first gaming state, the first gaming state continues, and therefore the subordinate control means executes the suggestive effect. Even if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not to perform a suggestive performance, there is no possibility that the processing configuration related to determining whether or not to perform a suggestive performance will be complicated or that restrictions will arise on executable performances. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of processing programs stored in advance in the main control means, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine U10. In the gaming machine U9, the main control means includes a standby period setting means (main control The device 101 includes a transfer game number changing function S6207), and when the grant determining means determines to grant the advantageous benefit in the first gaming state, the advantageous benefit granting means changes the gaming state after the waiting period has elapsed. Transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and the performance execution means suggests that the advantageous benefit will be given during the waiting period when the waiting period setting means sets the waiting period. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive performance.

According to this gaming machine, when the award determining means determines that an advantageous benefit is to be provided in the first gaming state, a plurality of gaming times are set as the waiting period. After the waiting period has elapsed, the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. At this time, the performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests that an advantageous benefit will be provided during the waiting period. With this configuration, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state after executing a suggestive effect that suggests shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Become.

Game machine U11. In the gaming machine U10, the main control means includes an information transmitting means (confrontation command transmission function S6210 of the main control device 101) for transmitting information related to the setting result of the standby period to the slave control means, and The means is configured to determine that when the first period setting means receives the information from the information transmitting means in a game round from when the first period setting means sets the performance period until the end of the performance period, it is a game round in which the waiting period ends. The game is characterized by comprising a performance period changing means (announced game number changing function S6404 of the display control device 81) that changes the length of the performance period so that the game times in which the performance period ends match. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, in a situation where it is not determined that the first gaming state is to be shifted to the second gaming state, the slave control means determines to execute the suggested performance, sets a performance period, and midway through the performance period. If the main control means determines that the first gaming state should be shifted to the second gaming state, the slave control means controls the control means so that the game time in which the standby period ends and the game time in which the production period ends coincide. Change the length of the performance period. With this configuration, even if the sub-control means side decides to execute the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect that suggests that an advantageous benefit will be given during the effect period.

The above game machine U12. In any of the gaming machines U2 to U11, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestion performance in a situation where the granting determining means determines to grant the advantageous benefit under the first gaming state. A third execution determining means (transition lottery function S6204 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to execute the suggestion performance in a situation where the grant determining means determines to grant the advantageous benefit under the second gaming state. a fourth execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery function S7002 of the main control device 101) for determining whether or not the main control means is provided, and the third execution determining means and the fourth execution determining means are provided in the main control means. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, in a situation where it is decided to give an advantageous benefit, the main control means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance, regardless of whether the first gaming state or the second gaming state is in the first gaming state. do. With this configuration, when it is decided to provide an advantageous benefit, it becomes possible to execute the suggestion performance at an appropriate timing.

Game machine V1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
As a gaming state, the operating frequency of a first gaming state (chance mode) and an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operating method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) is higher than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state (notification mode),
Grant determining means (additional lottery function S6803 of the main controller 101) that determines whether to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state;
an increased benefit granting unit (additional game number addition function S7010 of the main controller 101) that grants the increased benefit when the granting determination unit determines to grant the increased benefit;
A gaming machine characterized in that the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state may be increased even when the granting determination means determines not to grant the increased benefit.

According to this gaming machine, in the second gaming state, a determination may be made as to whether or not to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. Even if it is determined not to grant the bonus, the number of games that can be played under the second game state may increase. With this configuration, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment when it is determined not to grant the increased benefit.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine V2. In the gaming machine V1, a performance execution means (auxiliary display section 65) that executes a suggestive performance (confrontation performance) that suggests whether or not the increased benefit is provided, and an execution determining means that determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance. (confrontation effect lottery functions S6901, S7002 of the main control device 101), and a period setting means (main control A gaming machine comprising: a number-of-confrontation game setting function (S6904, S7005) of the device 101, and configured such that the second gaming state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this gaming machine, a suggestive performance that suggests whether or not an increased benefit will be granted may be executed, and when the suggestive performance is executed, a plurality of game times are set as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be executed. . With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to receive increased benefits over a plurality of games while playing the game. In addition, since the second game state does not end until the performance period ends, for example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion performance in the last game of the second game state, the number of games set as the performance period will be The number of games that can be played under the second gaming state increases by this amount. As a result, even if a suggestive performance suggesting that an increased benefit is not provided is executed, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment.

Game machine V3. In the gaming machine V2, when the execution determining means decides to execute the suggested effect, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. If the number of games set by the comparing means (insufficient number of games deriving functions S6905, S7006 of the main control device 101) and the period setting means is larger than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the number of games remaining that can be played under the second gaming state is Changing means for changing the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state becomes the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state (deficiency of the main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game number addition function S6906, S7007).

According to this gaming machine, when the execution determining means decides to execute the suggested performance, the number of games set by the period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state are compared. If the number of games set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state, the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state is greater than the number of remaining games set by the period setting means. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of games can be played. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the second gaming state to not end until the performance period ends.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the effect indicating whether or not an increased benefit will be provided. For example, if the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is also possible to configure the system so that the suggestion effect is not executed. However, in such a configuration, although it is necessary to have a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games, there is a possibility that the games after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games will become monotonous. There are concerns. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which, in each game after the remaining number of games is less than the maximum number of games, another effect indicating whether or not an additional benefit will be granted is executed in one game. . However, in the case of such a configuration, it is necessary to store the other effects mentioned above in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also limits the effects that can be executed depending on the number of remaining games. There is also the issue of receiving it. On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state can be changed so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state becomes the number of games set by the period setting means, It becomes possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

Game machine V4. In the gaming machine V3, the comparing means determines that if the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestion performance in a situation where the grant determining means determines to grant the increased benefit, the game is possible under the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that, as the remaining number of games to be played, the number of remaining games before the increased benefit granting means is granted is obtained by the increased benefit granting means.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of games set by the period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the increased benefit granted by the increased benefit granting means is not taken into account. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid using up a part of the increased benefits granted by the increased benefits granting means during the presentation period.

Game machine V5. In the above gaming machine V3 or gaming machine V4, the changing means changes the setting of the period setting means when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is not changed when the number of games that can be played is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, and when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state, If it is smaller than the possible remaining number of games, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase due to the execution of the suggestion effect to a situation where the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation where the end of the second game state is near. As a result, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay in a situation where the end of the second gaming state is near, and it becomes possible to improve gaming interest.

Game machine V6. In any of the gaming machines V2 to V5, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggested effect regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive performance.

Game machine V7. Any of the above gaming machines V2 to V6 is provided with a means for changing the length of the performance period after the period setting means sets the performance period until the end of the performance period. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the length of the production period is not changed midway through. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which the second gaming state does not end as a result of the extension of the performance period.

Game machine V8. In any of the gaming machines V2 to V7, the grant determining means determines that the increased benefit is granted in a game round from when the period setting means sets the performance period until the end of the performance period. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the performance period does not change when the performance period occurs.

According to this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an increased benefit is to be provided during the performance period, the length of the performance period does not change. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and avoid unnecessary lengthening of the performance period.

Game machine V9. In the game machine V7 or the game machine V8, the period setting means sets the performance period under the situation where the grant determination means determines that the increased benefit is not granted, and in the game round until the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the grant determining means determines to grant the increased benefit, the performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests that the increased benefit is granted.

According to this gaming machine, the period setting means sets the performance period in a situation where the grant determination means determines not to grant the increased benefit, and the grant determination means grants the increased benefit in the game rounds until the performance period ends. If it is determined that this is the case, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests that an increased benefit will be granted. With this configuration, even if the length of the presentation period is not changed, it is possible to execute the suggestion presentation according to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Game machine V10. In any of the gaming machines V2 to V9, the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect regardless of the determination result of the provision determining means.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to perform the suggestion performance regardless of the determination result as to whether or not to provide an increased benefit. With this configuration, even if it is determined not to grant an increased benefit, it is possible to create an opportunity to increase the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, and the determination not to grant an increased benefit can be made. It becomes possible to alleviate the player's disappointment in the case where the game is performed.

Gaming machine W1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A benefit award that grants a benefit to the player when the winning symbols corresponding to the winning symbols that have been won in the lottery of the aforementioned roles form a predetermined combination (such as a combination of minor symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stop. In a gaming machine equipped with means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.),
As a gaming state, the operating frequency of a first gaming state (chance mode) and an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operating method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) is higher than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state (notification mode),
Grant determining means (additional lottery function S6803 of the main controller 101) that determines whether to grant an increased benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state;
increased benefit granting means (additional game number adding function S7010 of the main controller 101) that grants the increased benefit when the granting determination means determines to grant the increased benefit;
A production execution means (auxiliary display section 65) that executes a suggestion production (confrontation production) suggesting whether or not the increased benefit is granted;
Execution determining means (confrontation effect lottery functions S6901, S7002 of the main control device 101) for determining whether to execute the suggested effect;
comprising a period setting means (number of confrontation games setting functions S6904 and S7005 of the main control device 101) for setting a plurality of game times as a performance period in which the suggestive performance can be executed when it is determined to execute the suggestive performance;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with means for changing the length of the performance period set by the period setting means.

According to this gaming machine, a suggestive performance that suggests whether or not an increased benefit will be granted may be executed, and when the suggestive performance is executed, a plurality of game times are set as a performance period during which the suggestive performance can be executed. . With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to receive increased benefits over a plurality of games while playing the game.

Furthermore, when a performance period is set, the length of the performance period is not changed midway through. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and avoid unnecessary lengthening of the performance period.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine W2. The gaming machine W1 is characterized in that the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggested performance regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest while simplifying the processing configuration related to the suggestive performance. For example, if the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state becomes less than the maximum number of games that can be set by the period setting means, it is also possible to configure the system so that the suggestion effect is not executed. However, in such a configuration, although it is necessary to have a processing configuration for checking the number of remaining games, there is a possibility that the games after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games will become monotonous. There are concerns. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which, in each game after the remaining number of games becomes less than the maximum number of games, another effect indicating whether or not an additional benefit will be granted is executed in one game. . However, with such a configuration, it is necessary to store the other effects mentioned above in advance, which not only creates a new problem of increased storage capacity, but also limits the effects that can be executed depending on the number of remaining games. There is also the issue of receiving it. On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which it is determined whether or not to execute the suggestion performance regardless of the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, each of the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine W3. The above-mentioned gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the execution determining means determines whether or not to execute the suggestive performance regardless of the determination result of the provision determining means.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to perform the suggestion performance regardless of the determination result as to whether or not to provide an increased benefit. With this configuration, in a situation where the remaining number of games is small, that is, in a situation where the end of the second gaming state is near, it becomes possible to execute the suggestion effect even if it is determined not to grant an increased benefit. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in a situation where the end of the second game state is near.

Game machine W4. In any of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the grant determining means determines that the increased benefit is granted in a game round from when the period setting means sets the performance period until the end of the performance period. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the performance period does not change when the performance period occurs.

According to this gaming machine, even if it is determined that an increased benefit is to be provided during the performance period, the length of the performance period does not change. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and avoid unnecessary lengthening of the performance period.

Game machine W5. In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines W1 to W4, the period setting means sets the performance period under a situation in which the provision determination means determines that the increased benefit is not granted, and the period setting means sets the performance period until the performance period ends. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the grant determining means determines to grant the increased benefit in a game round, the performance execution means executes a suggestive performance that suggests that the increased benefit will be awarded.

According to this gaming machine, the period setting means sets the performance period in a situation where the grant determination means determines not to grant the increased benefit, and the grant determination means grants the increased benefit in the game rounds until the performance period ends. If it is determined that this is the case, a suggestion effect is performed that suggests that an increased benefit will be granted. With this configuration, even if the length of the presentation period is not changed, it is possible to execute the suggestion presentation according to the determination result of the provision determination means.

Game machine W6. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines W1 to W5, the second gaming state does not end until the performance period ends.

According to this gaming machine, since the second game state is configured so that it does not end until the performance period ends, for example, when it is decided to execute the suggested performance in the last game of the second game state, it is set as the performance period. The number of games that can be played under the second game state increases by the number of games that have been played. As a result, even if a suggestive performance suggesting that an increased benefit is not provided is executed, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment.

Game machine W7. In the gaming machine W6, when the execution determining means determines to execute the suggested performance, the number of games set by the period setting means is compared with the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. If the number of games set by the comparing means (insufficient number of games deriving functions S6905, S7006 of the main control device 101) and the period setting means is larger than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the number of games remaining that can be played under the second gaming state is Changing means for changing the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state so that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state becomes the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state (deficiency of the main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a game number addition function S6906, S7007).

According to this gaming machine, when the execution determining means decides to execute the suggested performance, the number of games set by the period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state are compared. If the number of games set by the period setting means is greater than the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state, the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state is greater than the number of remaining games set by the period setting means. The remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is changed so that the remaining number of games can be played. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the second gaming state to not end until the performance period ends.

Game machine W8. In the gaming machine W7, the comparing means determines that if the execution determining means determines to execute the suggestion performance in a situation where the grant determining means determines to grant the increased benefit, the game is possible under the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that, as the remaining number of games to be played, the number of remaining games before the increased benefit granting means is granted is obtained by the increased benefit granting means.

According to this gaming machine, when comparing the number of games set by the period setting means and the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, the increased benefit granted by the increased benefit granting means is not taken into consideration. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid using up a part of the increased benefits granted by the increased benefits granting means during the presentation period.

Game machine W9. In the above gaming machine W7 or gaming machine W8, the changing means changes the setting of the period setting means when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state. The gaming machine is characterized in that the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state is not changed when the number of games that can be played is smaller than the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming state, and when the number of games set by the period setting means is equal to the remaining number of games possible under the second gaming state, If it is smaller than the possible remaining number of games, the remaining number of games that can be played under the second game state is not changed. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the opportunity for the number of remaining games to increase due to the execution of the suggestion effect to a situation where the number of remaining games is small, that is, a situation where the end of the second game state is near. As a result, it becomes possible to provide new gameplay in a situation where the end of the second gaming state is near, and it becomes possible to improve gaming interest.

Game machine W10. In any of the gaming machines W1 to W9, even if the grant determining means determines not to grant the increased benefit, the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state may be increased. A gaming machine characterized by certain things.

According to this gaming machine, even if it is determined not to provide an increased benefit, the number of games that can be played under the second gaming state may be increased. With this configuration, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment when it is determined not to grant the increased benefit.

Note that the gaming machines U group to gaming machine W group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine T group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine U group to the gaming machine W group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine X1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to a player when a prize is established for a winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the combination,
As a gaming state, the operating frequency of a first gaming state (chance mode) and an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operating method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) is higher than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state (notification mode A),
The benefit awarding means is configured to award gaming media equal to or more than the number of bets required for one game when the specific winning is achieved;
The second gaming state is configured such that when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result (push order bell winning), there are cases where the instruction function is activated and cases where the instruction function is not activated,
In the first game round in which the winning combination result is the specific result in the second gaming state, the frequency at which the instruction function operates is higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination becomes a specific result in the second gaming state, the frequency at which the instruction function operates is higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate. With this configuration, even if the instruction function may not operate if the winning combination result is a specific result under the second gaming condition, the game cannot be played under the second gaming condition. It becomes possible to reduce the chance that the game media owned by the person will run out, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game. This is because, if the game media owned by the player run out under the second gaming state, the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced.

Game machine X2. In the gaming machine X1, in the first game in which the lottery result of the winning combination became the specific result in the second gaming state, the second gaming game in which the lottery result of the winning combination became the specific result in the second gaming state A game machine characterized in that the instruction function is activated more frequently than the number of times the game is played.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the winning combination result became a specific result in the second gaming state, the number of winning combinations in the first gaming round in the second gaming state was higher than in the second gaming round in which the winning combination result became a specific result in the second gaming state. The indication function is activated frequently. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from transition to the second gaming state until the instruction function is activated for the first time.

Game machine X3. The above-mentioned gaming machine X1 or gaming machine The expected value of the number of game media given per game round is smaller than the number of game media required for one game, and the second gaming state is set such that the expected value of the number of game media given per game round is 1. A game machine characterized in that the number of game media is larger than that required for one game.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, it is expected that the gaming media owned by the player decreases each time the player plays a game, and in the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to decrease each time the player plays a game. expected to increase each year. In such a configuration, if the instruction function may not operate when the lottery result of a winning combination becomes a specific result under the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player under the second gaming state may There is a possibility that it will run out. If the game media owned by the player run out under the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player's desire to play may decrease significantly. However, if the configuration is such that the frequency at which the instruction function operates is higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate in the first game round in which the winning combination result becomes a specific result in the second gaming state, the above-mentioned concerns arise. This makes it possible to suitably eliminate the problem.

Game machine X4. In any of the gaming machines X1 to X3, if the lottery result of the combination becomes the specific result under the second gaming state, a predetermined lottery is performed to activate the instruction function or not. If the lottery result of the combination becomes the specific result under the second gaming state, the first determination means (navigation lottery function S80402 of the main control device 101) determines if the specific condition (the value of the navigation counter is less than 7) a second determination means (navigation counter confirmation function S80404 of the main controller 101) that determines whether the condition (large) has been established; a case where the first determination means determines to activate the instruction function; When the determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the game system is characterized by comprising: a specific notification device (instruction monitor, auxiliary display section 65) that notifies the operating method for establishing the specific winning prize. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, when the lottery result of a combination becomes a specific result under the second gaming state, the instruction function is activated based on the result of a predetermined lottery, and when the specific condition is satisfied. In some cases, the instruction function operates based on the above. With such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the first determination means, while suppressing the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means from becoming wider than necessary. It becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine X5. In the gaming machine X4, in the first game round in which the lottery result of the combination becomes the specific result in the second gaming state, the frequency with which the specific condition is met is higher than the frequency with which the specific condition is not met. A gaming machine characterized by having the following configuration.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the winning combination result is a specific result in the second gaming state, the frequency with which the specific condition is met is higher than the frequency with which the specific condition is not met. With this configuration, it is possible to make the frequency at which the instruction function operates higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate in the first game round in which the winning combination result becomes a specific result in the second gaming state. Become.

Game machine X6. In the game machine X4 or the game machine , the second determining means is configured to determine that the specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information (a value of 8 or more). A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information, the specific condition is satisfied and the instruction function is activated. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to define the operation interval of the instruction function depending on the update mode of the update means, and the relatively simple processing configuration prevents the operation interval of the instruction function from becoming wider than necessary. becomes possible.

Game machine X7. The above-mentioned gaming machine A gaming machine characterized in that when a game (3-coin game) is played, predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the first gaming state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency that the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination becomes the specific result in the second gaming state. Become. As a result, in the first game round in which the winning combination result is a specific result in the second game state, the frequency at which the instruction function operates can be made higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate.

Game machine X8. The gaming machine X7 is characterized in that the predetermined game is a game played using a maximum number of bets (3) of gaming media that can be used in one game.

According to this gaming machine, when a game is played using the maximum number of game media that can be bet in one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency that the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes the specific information in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination becomes the specific result in the second gaming state. Become. For example, when the lottery result of a combination becomes a specific result under the first gaming state, it is also possible to configure the predetermined information stored in the storage means to be updated. However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, an event may occur in which the winning combination result shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state before the winning combination result becomes a specific result. This is because the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is specific information becomes low in the first game round in which the specified result is obtained.

Game machine X9. In any of the gaming machines X6 to X8, the updating means stores information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (two-coin game, three-coin game) is played in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by updating predetermined information.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the second gaming state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. With this configuration, even if the first determination means repeatedly determines that the instruction function is not activated, the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the second determination means is suppressed from becoming unnecessarily wide. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine X10. The gaming machine X9 is characterized in that the second predetermined game is played once.

According to this gaming machine, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated every time one game is played. By adopting such a configuration, for example, if the interval at which the instruction function is activated becomes wider based on the fact that the winning combination result did not result in a specific result, the next game in which the winning combination result became a specific result. It becomes possible to operate the instruction function regardless of the judgment result of the first judgment means. As a result, even in the case where the instruction function may not operate if the winning combination result is a specific result under the second gaming state, even if the instruction function does not operate in the second gaming state, the It is possible to reduce the chances of running out of game media.

Game machine X11. In any of the gaming machines X6 to X10, when the instruction function is activated, changing means changes the predetermined information stored in the storage means to initial information (navigation counter reset function S80205 of main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this gaming machine, when the instruction function is activated, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is changed to the initial information. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means, and also to prevent the operation interval of the instruction function from becoming unnecessarily wide due to the relatively simple processing configuration. Become.

Gaming machine Y1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to a player when a prize is established for a winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the combination,
As a gaming state, the operating frequency of a first gaming state (chance mode) and an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies an operating method for establishing a specific winning (bell winning) is higher than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state (notification mode A),
The benefit awarding means is configured to award gaming media equal to or more than the number of bets required for one game when the specific winning is achieved;
The second gaming state is configured such that when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result (push order bell winning), there are cases where the instruction function is activated and cases where the instruction function is not activated,
A transition means (notification mode A transition function S80109 of the main control device 101) for transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state;
a storage means (navigation counter) for storing predetermined information;
an updating unit (navigation counter update function S80201 of the main controller 101) that updates the predetermined information stored in the storage unit;
When the lottery result of the combination becomes the specific result under the second gaming state, specific determination means (main controller 101 navigation counter confirmation function S80404),
and a specific notification unit (instruction monitor, auxiliary display unit 65) that notifies an operating method for establishing the specific winning when the specific determination unit determines that the specific condition is satisfied,
The specific determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information (a value of 8 or more);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the updating means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a predetermined game (three-copy game) is played at least in the first gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, when the predetermined information stored in the storage means becomes specific information, the specific condition is satisfied and the instruction function is activated. The predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated when a predetermined game is played at least in the first game state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency that the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination becomes the specific result in the second gaming state. Become. As a result, in the first game round in which the winning combination result is a specific result in the second game state, the frequency at which the instruction function operates can be made higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate.

As a result of the above, even if the instruction function is configured to not operate when the lottery result of a winning combination becomes a specific result under the second gaming state, even if the It becomes possible to reduce the chances of running out of game media to play, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. This is because, if the game media owned by the player run out under the second gaming state, the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced.

Gaming machine Y2. The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the predetermined game is a game played using a maximum number of bets (3) of gaming media that can be used in one game.

According to this gaming machine, when a game is played using the maximum number of game media that can be bet in one game, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency that the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the specific information in the first game round in which the lottery result of the winning combination becomes the specific result in the second gaming state. Become. For example, when the lottery result of a combination becomes a specific result under the first gaming state, it is also possible to configure the predetermined information stored in the storage means to be updated. However, in the case of such a configuration, for example, an event may occur in which the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state before the winning combination result becomes a specific result. This is because the frequency with which the predetermined information stored in the storage means is specific information becomes low in the first game round in which the specified result is obtained.

Game machine Y3. In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, when the lottery result of the combination becomes the specific result under the second gaming state, a predetermined lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate the instruction function. A determining means (navigation lottery function S80402 of the main controller 101) is provided, and when the predetermined determining means determines to activate the instruction function, the specific informing means notifies an operation method for establishing the specific winning prize. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the lottery result of a combination becomes a specific result under the second gaming state, the instruction function is activated based on the result of a predetermined lottery, and when the specific condition is satisfied. In some cases, the instruction function operates based on the above. With such a configuration, it is possible to randomize the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the predetermined determination means, and to prevent the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the specific determination means from becoming wider than necessary. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine Y4. In the gaming machine Y3, the updating means updates the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a second predetermined game (two-coin game, three-coin game) is played in the second gaming state. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, when a predetermined game is played in the second gaming state, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated. With this configuration, even if the predetermined determination means repeatedly determines that the instruction function is not activated, the interval at which the instruction function is activated by the specific determination means can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily wide. becomes possible.

Game machine Y5. The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second predetermined game is played once.

According to this gaming machine, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is updated every time one game is played. By adopting such a configuration, for example, if the interval at which the instruction function is activated becomes wider based on the fact that the winning combination result did not result in a specific result, the next game in which the winning combination result became a specific result. It becomes possible to operate the instruction function regardless of the determination result of the predetermined determination means. As a result, even in the case where the instruction function may not operate if the winning combination result is a specific result under the second gaming state, even if the instruction function does not operate in the second gaming state, the It is possible to reduce the chances of running out of game media.

Game machine Y6. In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y5, when the instruction function is activated, changing means changes the predetermined information stored in the storage means to initial information (navigation counter reset function S80205 of the main controller 101) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this gaming machine, when the instruction function is activated, the predetermined information stored in the storage means is changed to the initial information. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the storage means, and also to prevent the operation interval of the instruction function from becoming unnecessarily wide due to the relatively simple processing configuration. Become.

Game machine Y7. In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y6, in the first game in which the lottery result of the combination in the second gaming state becomes the specified result, the lottery result of the combination in the second gaming state becomes the specific result. A gaming machine characterized in that the instruction function operates more frequently than in the second game round that resulted in a specific result.

According to this gaming machine, in the first game round in which the winning combination result became a specific result in the second gaming state, the number of winning combinations in the first gaming round in the second gaming state was higher than in the second gaming round in which the winning combination result became a specific result in the second gaming state. The indication function is activated frequently. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of games required from transition to the second gaming state until the instruction function is activated for the first time.

Game machine Y8. In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y7, the first gaming state is configured such that the expected value of the number of gaming media given per gaming round is smaller than the number of gaming media required for one gaming round, and A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state is configured such that the expected value of the number of game media given per game is larger than the number of game media required for one game.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming state, it is expected that the gaming media owned by the player decreases each time the player plays a game, and in the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player is expected to decrease each time the player plays a game. expected to increase each year. In such a configuration, if the instruction function may not operate when the lottery result of a winning combination becomes a specific result under the second gaming state, the gaming media owned by the player under the second gaming state may There is a possibility that it will run out. If the game media owned by the player run out under the second gaming state, there is a concern that the player's desire to play may decrease significantly. However, if the configuration is such that the frequency at which the instruction function operates is higher than the frequency at which the instruction function does not operate in the first game round in which the winning combination result becomes a specific result in the second gaming state, the above-mentioned concerns arise. This makes it possible to suitably eliminate the problem.

Game machine Y9. In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y8, when the lottery result of the combination becomes the specified result as the gaming state, the instruction function operates at a higher frequency than the second gaming state. A gaming state (notification mode B) is provided, and a transition determination means (promotion lottery function S80305 of the main control device 101) is provided for determining whether to transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, the second gaming state can be shifted to the third gaming state in which the instruction function operates more frequently than in the second gaming state when the winning combination result is a specific result. With this configuration, it becomes possible to make the player play the game under the second gaming state while expecting the player to move to the third gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Note that the gaming machine group X to the gaming machine Y group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved. Furthermore, the above gaming machine group A to gaming machine W group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group X to gaming machine Y group, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine 9A1. A specific determination means (main controller 101) that determines whether a specific condition (rare combination winning is established) is satisfied;
a specific sound output control means (VDP253) that performs control to output a specific sound (rare combination winning sound) from specific channels (CH2, CH3) when the specific condition is satisfied;
If the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound (usually BGM, etc.) is output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is set to the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume reduction control means (VDP253) that performs control to reduce the volume from the volume to a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB).

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 9A2. The gaming machine 9A1 is characterized in that the volume reduction control means performs control to reduce the volume to a volume smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. With this configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player misses the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met. Become.

Game machine 9A3. In the gaming machine 9A1 or the gaming machine 9A2, the specific sound output control means controls to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is satisfied. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Game machine 9A4. In any of the gaming machines 9A1 to 9A3, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols), and a system for stopping the cyclic display of the symbols individually. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for a winning combination, and a prize winning of the winning combination won in the lottery for the winning combination are established. and a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to the player when the winning combination is selected, and the specific determination means determines whether the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific winning combination (rare winning combination). A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific winning is achieved, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific winning is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since whether or not a specific winning is achieved is based on the operation of a plurality of stop operation means by the player, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment in achieving a specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of a specific winning. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and the like by outputting a specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9A5. In any of the game machines 9A1 to 9A4, when the output of the specific sound is finished, fade-in control is performed to control the volume of the predetermined sound to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means (VDP253).

According to this gaming machine, when the output of the specific sound is finished, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound ends, the player can be immersed in the lingering sound of the specific sound. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9A6. In the gaming machine 9A5, the fade-in control means causes the volume of the predetermined sound to be the same as the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound ends and when the output of the second specific sound ends. A game machine characterized by varying the time required for the game to become complete.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs depending on whether the output of the first specific sound is finished or the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the aftertaste different when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 9A7. The gaming machine 9A6 is provided with a specific benefit granting means (main control device 101) for granting a specific benefit (transition to notification mode, additional number of games), and when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of being granted the specific benefit is different depending on when the specific benefit is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation of being given a specific benefit differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if the user does not notice that a specific sound has been output, or is unable to grasp which specific sound has been output, this may lead to a loss of expectations for the provision of specific benefits. , there is a concern that interest in gaming may decline. However, when outputting a specific sound from a specific channel, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume, and when the output of the specific sound is finished, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the second predetermined volume. In the configuration in which the volume is faded in to the first predetermined volume, each of the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Game machine 9A8. In the gaming machine 9A7, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of being given the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific sound is When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation level of being given a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it becomes possible to correlate the level of expectation for the granting of a specific benefit with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

Game machine 9A9. In any of the game machines 9A5 to 9A8, a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) that is operated to start a game round, and a start operation means that is operated A gaming machine comprising: a volume recovery control means (VDP 253) that performs control to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the volume of the predetermined sound is exceeded.

According to this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Game machine 9A10. A game characterized in that, in any of the game machines 9A1 to 9A9, a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before the change and the volume information related to the volume after the change are stored separately. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9A11. In the gaming machine 9A10, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area is changed, and the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) is changed. When a second change condition (rare combination winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, the information is stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) that is different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of the VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been set.

According to this gaming machine, when the first change condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to understand whether the first change condition is met or not and whether the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9A12. The gaming machine 9A11 is provided with a comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the volume information that the comparison and determination means has compared and determined with the minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using the predetermined channel.

According to this gaming machine, volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and determined, and sound is output from a predetermined channel using the volume information that has been compared and determined with the minimum value. By configuring the system to compare and determine volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from a predetermined channel. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration to output sound from a predetermined channel using the volume information determined by comparing it with the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, for example, in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9A13. In any of the gaming machines 9A10 to 9A12, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area is transferred to the specific volume information (6th layer). ), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. A game machine that is characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. When sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to be lowered from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9A14. In the gaming machine 9A13, when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the specific change means uses volume information different from the specific volume information to make a sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that may output.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. With this configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel can be changed from the first predetermined volume while ensuring a processing configuration in which the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met. It becomes possible to perform controls such as lowering the volume to a second predetermined volume or not lowering the volume of a predetermined channel.

Game machine 9B1. A specific determination means (main controller 101) that determines whether a specific condition (rare combination winning is established) is satisfied;
a specific sound output control means (VDP253) that performs control to output a specific sound (rare combination winning sound) from specific channels (CH2, CH3) when the specific condition is satisfied;
If the output of the specific sound ends in a situation where a predetermined sound (usually BGM, etc.) is being output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is changed to the second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB). A gaming machine comprising: fade-in control means (VDP253) that performs fade-in control from a second predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB).

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. Then, when the output of the specific sound ends in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, control is performed to fade the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. . With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound ends, the player can be immersed in the lingering sound of the specific sound. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9B2. In the gaming machine 9B1, the fade-in control means causes the volume of the predetermined sound to be the same as the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound ends and when the output of the second specific sound ends. A game machine characterized by varying the time required for the game to become complete.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs depending on whether the output of the first specific sound is finished or the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the aftertaste different when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 9B3. The gaming machine 9B2 is provided with a specific benefit granting means (main control device 101) for granting a specific benefit (transfer to notification mode, additional number of games), and when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of being granted the specific benefit is different depending on when the specific benefit is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation of being given a specific benefit differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if a user does not notice that a specific sound has been output, or is unable to grasp which specific sound has been output, this may lead to a loss of expectations for the provision of specific benefits. , there is a concern that interest in gaming may decline. However, in a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is faded in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume when the output of the specific sound is finished, it is possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns, and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to aim for.

Game machine 9B4. In the gaming machine 9B3, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of being given the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific sound is When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation level of being given a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it becomes possible to correlate the level of expectation for the granting of a specific benefit with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

Game machine 9B5. In any of the game machines 9B1 to 9B4, a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game round, and a start operation means operated by the start operation means A gaming machine comprising: a volume recovery control means (VDP 253) that performs control to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the volume of the predetermined sound is exceeded.

According to this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Game machine 9B6. In any of the game machines 9B1 to 9B5, if the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is changed to the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume reduction control means (VDP253) that performs control to reduce the predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. It will be done. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 9B7. In the gaming machine 9B6, the volume reduction control means performs control to reduce the volume to a volume smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. With this configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player misses the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met. Become.

Game machine 9B8. In the gaming machine 9B6 or the gaming machine 9B7, the specific sound output control means controls to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is satisfied. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Game machine 9B9. In any of the gaming machines 9B6 to 9B8, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols), and a system for stopping the cyclic display of the symbols individually. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for a winning combination, and a prize winning of the winning combination won in the lottery for the winning combination are established. and a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to the player when the winning combination is selected, and the specific determination means determines whether the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific winning combination (rare winning combination). A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific winning is achieved, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific winning is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since whether or not a specific winning is achieved is based on the operation of a plurality of stop operation means by the player, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment in achieving a specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of a specific winning. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and the like by outputting a specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9B10. A game characterized in that a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel are provided in any of the gaming machines 9B1 to 9B9. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before the change and the volume information related to the volume after the change are stored separately. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9B11. In the gaming machine 9B10, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) is changed. When a second change condition (rare combination winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, the information is stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) that is different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume information changing means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been set.

According to this gaming machine, when the first change condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to understand whether the first change condition is met or not and whether the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9B12. The gaming machine 9B11 is provided with a comparison and determination means (a volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the volume information that the comparison and determination means has compared and determined with the minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using the predetermined channel.

According to this gaming machine, volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and determined, and sound is output from a predetermined channel using the volume information that has been compared and determined with the minimum value. By configuring the system to compare and determine volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from a predetermined channel. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration to output sound from a predetermined channel using the volume information determined by comparing it with the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, for example, in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9B13. In any of the gaming machines 9B10 to 9B12, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area is transferred to the specific volume information (6th layer). ), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. When sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to be lowered from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9B14. In the gaming machine 9B13, when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the specific change means uses volume information different from the specific volume information to make a sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that may output.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. With this configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel can be changed from the first predetermined volume while ensuring a processing configuration in which the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met. It becomes possible to perform controls such as lowering the volume to a second predetermined volume or not lowering the volume of a predetermined channel.

Game machine 9C1. a predetermined sound output control means (VDP253) that performs control to output a predetermined sound (usually BGM, etc.) from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5);
comprising a volume information storage area (0th layer to 6th layer) for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel;
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of the volume information storage areas are provided.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before the change and the volume information related to the volume after the change are stored separately. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9C2. In the gaming machine 9C1, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) is changed. When a second change condition (rare combination winning sound output instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, the information is stored in a second volume information storage area (sixth layer) that is different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume information changing means (a volume value setting processing function of the VDP 253) for changing the volume information that has been set.

According to this gaming machine, when the first change condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to understand whether the first change condition is met or not and whether the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9C3. The gaming machine 9C2 is provided with a comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the volume information that the comparison and determination means has compared and determined with a minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using the predetermined channel.

According to this gaming machine, volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and determined, and sound is output from a predetermined channel using the volume information that has been compared and determined with the minimum value. By configuring the system to compare and determine volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from a predetermined channel. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration to output sound from a predetermined channel using the volume information determined by comparing it with the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, for example, in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9C4. In any of the gaming machines 9C1 to 9C3, a specific determining means (main control device 101) that determines whether a specific condition (rare combination prize winning establishment) is satisfied; a specific sound output control means (VDP253) that performs control to output a specific sound (rare combination winning sound) from channels (CH2, CH3); and outputting the predetermined sound from the predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB). volume reduction control means (VDP 253) that performs control to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB) when the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the specific condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will miss the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 9C5. In the gaming machine 9C4, when the specific condition is satisfied, specific changing means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area (sixth layer) of the volume information storage area to specific volume information (64). (Volume value changing function of VDP 253), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. When sound is output from a predetermined channel using the specific volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With such a configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a first predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to be lowered from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9C6. In the gaming machine 9C5, when the specific change means changes the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area to the specific volume information, the specific change means uses volume information different from the specific volume information to produce a sound from the predetermined channel. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that may output.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area of the volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information. At this time, sound may be output from a predetermined channel using volume information different from the specific volume information. With this configuration, the volume of the predetermined channel can be changed from the first predetermined volume while ensuring a processing configuration in which the volume information stored in the specific volume information storage area is changed to specific volume information when a specific condition is met. It becomes possible to perform controls such as lowering the volume to a second predetermined volume or not lowering the volume of a predetermined channel.

Game machine 9C7. In any of the game machines 9C4 to 9C6, the volume reduction control means performs control to lower the volume to a volume smaller than the volume at which the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is met, the predetermined sound is output at a volume lower than the volume of the specific sound. With this configuration, it is possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player misses the specific sound that is output when the specific condition is met. Become.

Game machine 9C8. In any of the gaming machines 9C4 to 9C7, the specific sound output control means controls to output the specific sound from the specific channel at the first predetermined volume when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel at a first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to switch the sound output at the first predetermined volume from the predetermined sound to the specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to make the specific sound easier to hear than the predetermined sound.

Game machine 9C9. In any of the gaming machines 9C4 to 9C8, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols), and a system for stopping the cyclic display of the symbols individually. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) to be operated, a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for a winning combination, and a prize winning of the winning combination won in the lottery for the winning combination are established. and a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to the player when the winning combination is selected, and the specific determination means determines whether the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific winning combination (rare winning combination). A gaming machine characterized in that when a specific winning is achieved, it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific winning is achieved, control is performed to output a specific sound from a specific channel. At this time, if the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the first predetermined volume, control is performed to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume. Since whether or not a specific winning is achieved is based on the operation of a plurality of stop operation means by the player, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to feel a sense of accomplishment in achieving a specific winning and to provide benefits based on the establishment of a specific winning. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and the like by outputting a specific sound. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9C10. In any of the game machines 9C4 to 9C9, when the output of the specific sound is finished, fade-in control is performed to control the volume of the predetermined sound to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means (VDP253).

According to this gaming machine, when the output of the specific sound is finished, control is performed to fade in the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the output of the specific sound ends, the player can be immersed in the lingering sound of the specific sound. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9C11. In the gaming machine 9C10, the fade-in control means causes the volume of the predetermined sound to be the same as the first predetermined volume when the output of the first specific sound ends and when the output of the second specific sound ends. A game machine characterized by varying the time required for the game to become complete.

According to this gaming machine, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume differs depending on whether the output of the first specific sound is finished or the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to make the time during which the player is immersed in the aftertaste different when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 9C12. The above gaming machine 9C11 is provided with a specific benefit granting means (main controller 101) that grants a specific benefit (transfer to notification mode, additional number of games), and when the first specific sound is output and when the second specific sound is output. A gaming machine characterized in that the degree of expectation of being granted the specific benefit is different depending on when the specific benefit is output.

According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation of being given a specific benefit differs depending on whether the first specific sound is output or the second specific sound is output. In such a configuration, for example, if a user does not notice that a specific sound has been output, or is unable to grasp which specific sound has been output, this may lead to a loss of expectations for the provision of specific benefits. , there is a concern that interest in gaming may decline. However, when outputting a specific sound from a specific channel, the volume of the predetermined sound is decreased from the first predetermined volume to the second predetermined volume, and when the output of the specific sound is finished, the volume of the predetermined sound is reduced from the second predetermined volume. In the configuration in which the volume is faded in to the first predetermined volume, each of the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Game machine 9C13. In the gaming machine 9C12, when the first specific sound is output, the degree of expectation of being given the specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output, and the first specific sound is When the output of the sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific sound is output, the expectation level of being given a specific benefit is higher than when the second specific sound is output. When the output of the first specific sound is finished, the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume is longer than when the output of the second specific sound is finished. With this configuration, it becomes possible to correlate the level of expectation for the granting of a specific benefit with the time required for the volume of the predetermined sound to reach the first predetermined volume, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

Game machine 9C14. In any of the game machines 9C10 to 9C13, a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game round, and a start operation means operated by the start operation means A gaming machine comprising: a volume recovery control means (VDP 253) that performs control to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume when the volume of the predetermined sound is exceeded.

According to this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated, control is performed to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the start operation means is operated to start the next game round, it becomes possible to output the predetermined sound at the first predetermined volume in the next game round.

Game machine 9D1. a prescribed determination means (main controller 101) that determines whether a prescribed condition (start operation execution) is satisfied;
If the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound (usually BGM, etc.) is output from a predetermined channel (CH4, CH5) at a second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB), the volume of the predetermined sound is changed to the second predetermined volume (-6.0 dB). A gaming machine comprising: fade-in control means (VDP253) that performs fade-in control from a predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume (0.0 dB).

According to this gaming machine, if the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where a predetermined sound is being output from a predetermined channel at a second predetermined volume, control is performed to fade the volume of the predetermined sound from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. will be held. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the volume of the predetermined sound is changed from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume at the timing when the specified condition is satisfied, the chance that the player is surprised by the output of the predetermined sound is reduced. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 9D2. In the gaming machine 9D1, a second predetermined volume control means performs control to reduce the volume at which the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel to the second predetermined volume when a predetermined time elapses without starting a game round. (VDP253) A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with (VDP253).

According to this gaming machine, if a prescribed time period elapses without starting a game round, control is performed to reduce the volume at which a predetermined sound is output from a predetermined channel to a second predetermined volume. With this configuration, when the game machine is not operating for a specified period of time, it is possible to reduce the volume of the predetermined sound output from the predetermined channel.

Game machine 9D3. The game machine 9D1 or the game machine 9D2 includes a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start a game round, and the prescribed determination means A gaming machine characterized in that when an operating means is operated, it is determined that the specified condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when the start operation means is operated to start a game round in a situation where the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is changed to the second predetermined volume. Control is performed to fade in the sound volume from the first predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who is trying to start a game round from being surprised by the output of a predetermined sound and losing his or her desire to play.

Game machine 9D4. In the gaming machine 9D3, the start operation means is a first start operation means (first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to set the number of bets, and a first start operation means (first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated after the number of bets is set. and a second start operation means (start lever 41), and the regulation determination means determines that the regulation condition is satisfied when the first start operation means is operated. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first start operation means is operated to set the number of bets in a situation where the predetermined sound is output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is changed to the second predetermined volume. Control is performed to fade in from a predetermined volume to a first predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to start the fade-in control before the start of the game round, and it is possible to return the volume of the predetermined sound to the first predetermined volume before the start of the game round.

Game machine 9D5. In the gaming machine 9D3 or the gaming machine 9D4, a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols) are operated to individually stop the cyclic display of the symbols. A plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44), a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery of winning combinations, and a lottery unit that performs a lottery of winning combinations (a lottery processing function of the main control device 101), a privilege awarding means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to a player, and when the start operation means is operated, the game round is started and the plurality of circulating display means The gaming machine is characterized in that the game round is ended when all of the symbols stop circulating or when the bonus awarding means grants the award.

According to this gaming machine, in a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine, it is possible to prevent a player who tries to start a new game from being surprised by the output of a predetermined sound and decreasing his or her desire to play. .

Game machine 9D6. A game characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines 9D1 to 9D5, a plurality of volume information storage areas (0th layer to 6th layer) are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from the predetermined channel. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, a plurality of volume information storage areas are provided for storing volume information related to the volume output from a predetermined channel. With this configuration, for example, when an opportunity arises to change the volume output from a predetermined channel, the volume information related to the volume before the change and the volume information related to the volume after the change are stored separately. It is possible to store it in the area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9D7. In the gaming machine 9D6, when the first change condition (mute instruction) is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) of the volume information storage area is changed, and the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area (fourth layer) is changed. When a second change condition (power saving instruction) different from the change condition is satisfied, the volume stored in a second volume information storage area (second layer) different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas A gaming machine characterized by comprising a volume information changing means (volume value setting processing function of VDP 253) for changing information.

According to this gaming machine, when the first change condition is satisfied, the volume information stored in the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed, and the second change condition different from the first change condition is established. In this case, the volume information stored in a second volume information storage area different from the first volume information storage area among the volume information storage areas is changed. With this configuration, it becomes possible to understand whether the first change condition is met or not and whether the second change condition is met through the volume information stored in the volume information storage area. As a result, it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration for outputting sound from a predetermined channel, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine 9D8. The gaming machine 9D7 is provided with a comparison and determination means (volume value comparison function of the VDP 253) for comparing and determining the volume information stored in the plurality of volume information storage areas, and the volume information that the comparison and determination means has compared and determined with the minimum value. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to output sound from the predetermined channel using the predetermined channel.

According to this gaming machine, volume information stored in a plurality of volume information storage areas is compared and determined, and sound is output from a predetermined channel using the volume information that has been compared and determined with the minimum value. By configuring the system to compare and determine volume information stored in multiple volume information storage areas and output sound from a predetermined channel, it is possible to eliminate the need for processing to check the volume being output from a predetermined channel. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration. Furthermore, by configuring the configuration to output sound from a predetermined channel using the volume information determined by comparing it with the minimum value, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, for example, in a situation where the volume of a predetermined channel is maintained in a muted state. It becomes possible.

Game machine 9D9. In any of the gaming machines 9D6 to 9D8, a predetermined changing means (64) for changing the volume information stored in a predetermined volume information storage area (second layer) of the volume information storage area to predetermined volume information (64). a volume value changing function of a VDP 253), and when sound is output from the predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. .

According to this gaming machine, the volume information stored in the predetermined volume information storage area of the volume information storage area may be changed to the predetermined volume information. When sound is output from a predetermined channel using the predetermined volume information, the volume of the predetermined channel becomes the second predetermined volume. With this configuration, it is possible to realize control for outputting the predetermined sound at the second predetermined volume with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Game machine 9D10. In the gaming machine 9D9, if the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined volume information is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area, the predetermined volume information is stored until the volume of the predetermined channel reaches the first predetermined volume. A gaming machine characterized by comprising second predetermined changing means (volume value changing function of VDP 253) for changing volume information stored in a storage area.

According to this gaming machine, if the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined volume information is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area, the predetermined volume information is stored in the predetermined volume information storage area until the volume of the predetermined channel reaches the first predetermined volume. volume information will be changed. With such a configuration, if the specified condition is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined sound is being output from the predetermined channel at the second predetermined volume, the volume of the predetermined sound is controlled to fade in from the second predetermined volume to the first predetermined volume. can be realized with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Note that the gaming machines 9A group to the gaming machine 9D group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Furthermore, the gaming machines 9A group to 9D group may be combined with the gaming machines A group to Y group as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine 10A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to a player when a prize is established for a winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the combination,
A specific performance start means (ending performance start function S100104 of the display control device 81) that starts a specific performance (ending performance) when a specific condition (completion condition) is satisfied;
a specific performance progressing means (ED processing function of the display control device 81) that advances the specific performance so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds;
interrupting means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific performance resuming means (resuming processing function S100307 of the display control device 81) for restarting the specific performance from the middle when the interrupting unit interrupts the display of the specific performance. .

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, a specific performance is started. The specific performance is progressed so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds. When the display of a specific effect is interrupted, the display starts from the middle of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid starting the specific effect from the beginning even if the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it is possible to avoid repeating the beginning of the specific performance, and it is possible to improve the game's interest.

Game machine 10A2. The gaming machine 10A1 includes a progress information storage means (RAM of the display control device 81) that stores progress information (file number) related to the degree of progress of the specific performance, and the specific performance restarting means includes the progress information storage means A game machine characterized in that said specific performance is started from a position corresponding to a storage result.

According to this gaming machine, the progress information storage means stores progress information related to the degree of progress of a specific performance. When the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect, the specific effect is started from a position according to the storage result of the progress information storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming complicated, and to restart the specific effect from a position corresponding to the interrupted position when the display of the specific effect is interrupted. It becomes possible.

Game machine 10A3. The gaming machine 10A2 has a configuration in which data used when executing the specific performance is divided into a plurality of files and stored, and the progress information storage means includes information indicating which of the plurality of files is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the progress information is stored as the progress information.

According to this gaming machine, data used when executing a specific performance is divided and stored in a plurality of files. The progress information storage means stores information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used as progress information. With this configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it becomes possible to restart the specific effect using the data of the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, it is possible to restart the specific performance from a position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific performance from becoming complicated.

Game machine 10A4. In the gaming machine 10A3, when all the data of a predetermined file (file numbers "1" to "7") is used, the specific performance progressing means uses the data of the next file without depending on the player's operation. A game machine characterized in that the specific performance is advanced by

According to this gaming machine, when all the data of a predetermined file is used, the specific performance is advanced using the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. With this configuration, even if the data used to execute a specific effect is divided into multiple files and stored, it is possible to proceed with the specific effect independently of the progress of the game. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 10A5. In the gaming machine 10A3 or 10A4, the specific performance resuming means starts the specific performance from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance is restarted from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to re-execute a part of the specific performance that was executed before the interruption, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10A6. In any of the gaming machines 10A1 to 10A5, the specific performance restart means starts the specific performance when a specific operation (resume operation) is performed by a player.

According to this gaming machine, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance is started when the player performs a specific operation. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to let the player decide the timing for restarting the specific performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10A7. The gaming machine 10A6 is characterized in that it includes specific operation notification means (auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the specific operation.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific operation is notified, it is possible to avoid the player from feeling uncomfortable about the fact that the specific performance is not started.

Game machine 10A8. In any of the gaming machines 10A1 to 10A7, the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific performance when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance is resumed from the middle. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which a specific performance must be terminated in the middle of the performance as a result of, for example, a specific abnormality occurring, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 10A9. In any of the gaming machines 10A1 to 10A8, when the difference in the number of coins in a specific state (advantageous section) becomes a specific number (2400 coins), a specific state ending means for ending the specific state; If the specific state ends during execution, the specific performance ending means ends the specific performance at the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific performance. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, the specific state ends when the difference in the number of coins in the specific state reaches the specific number. If the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, the number of games in which a specific performance can be executed changes depending on the winning combination results, etc., so if the display of a specific performance is interrupted and the specific performance is restarted from the beginning, the specific performance will not be executed until the end. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in this configuration where display of a specific effect is restarted from the middle when it is interrupted, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine 10A10. In the gaming machine 10A9, the specific states include a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the expected value of the gaming value given per game is higher than in the first gaming mode. and determining whether the difference in the number of coins in the specific state under the second gaming mode is the specific number based on information related to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when the determining device determines that the difference in the number of coins in the specific state under the second game mode is the specific number.

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the difference in the number of coins in a specific state under the second gaming mode is a specific number based on information related to the remaining number of games that can be played under the second gaming mode. When it is determined that the number of sheets is reached, the specific performance is started. In such a configuration, the number of games in which a specific performance can be executed changes depending on the winning combination results, etc., so if the display of a specific performance is interrupted and the specific performance is restarted from the beginning, the specific performance will not be executed until the end. There is a possibility that it will not be possible. However, in this configuration where display of a specific effect is restarted from the middle when it is interrupted, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine 10B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
In a gaming machine equipped with a privilege granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) for awarding a privilege to a player when a prize is established for a winning combination that has been won in the lottery for the combination,
A specific performance start means (ending performance start function S100104 of the display control device 81) that starts a specific performance (ending performance) when a specific condition (completion condition) is satisfied;
a specific performance progressing means (ED processing function of the display control device 81) that advances the specific performance so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds;
interrupting means (error notification function S100303 of the display control device 81) for interrupting the display of the specific effect;
comprising a specific performance resuming means (resuming processing function S100307 of the display control device 81) that restarts the specific performance when the interrupting unit interrupts the display of the specific performance;
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific performance restarting means is configured to be able to restart the specific performance by omitting a part of the specific performance.

According to this gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied, a specific performance is started. The specific performance is progressed so as to be executed over a plurality of game rounds. If the display of a specific effect is interrupted, it may be restarted with a part of the specific effect omitted. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10B2. In the gaming machine 10B1, a specific state ending means ends the specific state (advantageous section) when a specific ending condition (difference number of coins 2400) is satisfied, and the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed. In this case, regardless of the progress level of the specific performance, the specific performance ending means ends the specific performance at the game round in which the specific state ends, and when the specific performance restarting means restarts the specific performance, the specific performance A specific determination means for determining whether or not to omit a part of the specific performance based on progress information related to the progress of the production and a specific corresponding condition corresponding to the specific end condition. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, the specific state ends when the specific ending condition is satisfied. If the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, if the display of the specific effect is interrupted, there is a possibility that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end. However, when restarting a specific performance, it is determined whether or not to omit a part of the specific performance based on progress information related to the progress of the specific performance and specific corresponding conditions corresponding to the specific end condition. In the configuration, it is possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine 10B3. In the gaming machine 10B1 or the gaming machine 10B2, when the difference in the number of coins in a specific state (advantageous section) becomes a specific number (2400 coins), a specific state ending means for ending the specific state, and a specific state ending means for executing the specific effect. When the specific state ends while the specific state is in progress, the specific performance ending means ends the specific performance in the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific performance, and the specific performance restarting means When restarting the specific performance, a specific determination means determines whether or not to omit a part of the specific performance based on progress information related to the progress of the specific performance and the difference number of sheets in the specific state. A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

According to this gaming machine, the specific state ends when the difference in the number of coins in the specific state reaches the specific number. If the specific state ends while the specific performance is being executed, the specific performance also ends in the game round in which the specific state ends, regardless of the progress of the specific performance. In such a configuration, the number of games in which a specific performance can be executed changes depending on the winning combination results, etc., so if the display of a specific performance is interrupted, for example, if the specific performance is restarted from the beginning, the specific performance cannot be played until the end. There is a possibility that it may become impossible to execute. However, in a configuration in which, when restarting a specific performance, it is determined whether or not to omit a part of the specific performance based on progress information related to the progress of the specific performance and the difference in the number of sheets in the specific state, It becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine 10B4. In the gaming machine 10B2 or the gaming machine 10B3, when the number of times the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific performance exceeds a prescribed number of times, the specific performance resuming means resumes the display by omitting a part of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the number of times the display of the specific performance is interrupted exceeds the specified number of times, the specific performance is restarted with a part of the specific performance omitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of not being able to execute a specific performance to the end.

Game machine 10B5. Any of the gaming machines 10B1 to 10B4 is provided with progress information storage means (RAM of the display control device 81) for storing progress information (file number) related to the degree of progress of the specific performance, and the specific performance restarting means The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance is started from a position according to the storage result of the progress information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the progress information storage means stores progress information related to the degree of progress of a specific performance. When the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific effect, the specific effect is started from a position according to the storage result of the progress information storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect from becoming complicated, and to restart the specific effect from a position corresponding to the interrupted position when the display of the specific effect is interrupted. It becomes possible.

Game machine 10B6. The gaming machine 10B5 has a configuration in which data used when executing the specific performance is divided into a plurality of files and stored, and the progress information storage means includes information indicating which of the plurality of files is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the progress information is stored as the progress information.

According to this gaming machine, data used when executing a specific performance is divided and stored in a plurality of files. The progress information storage means stores information indicating which of the plurality of files is to be used as progress information. With this configuration, when the display of the specific effect is interrupted, it becomes possible to restart the specific effect using the data of the file corresponding to the information stored in the progress information storage means. Therefore, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, it is possible to restart the specific performance from a position corresponding to the interrupted position while suppressing the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific performance from becoming complicated.

Game machine 10B7. In the gaming machine 10B6, when all the data of a predetermined file (file numbers "1" to "7") is used, the specific performance progressing means uses the data of the next file without depending on the player's operation. A game machine characterized in that the specific performance is advanced by

According to this gaming machine, when all the data of a predetermined file is used, the specific performance is advanced using the data of the next file without being based on the player's operation. With this configuration, even if the data used to execute a specific effect is divided into multiple files and stored, it is possible to proceed with the specific effect independently of the progress of the game. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine 10B8. In the gaming machine 10B6 or the gaming machine 10B7, the specific performance resuming means omits a part of the specific performance by not using data of a file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, a part of the specific performance is omitted by not using the data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing configuration related to the execution of the specific effect, and to restart the display of the specific effect by omitting part of the specific effect when the display of the specific effect is interrupted. becomes.

Game machine 10B9. In any of the gaming machines 10B6 to 10B8, if the specific performance is not omitted, the specific performance restarting means starts the specific performance from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted and the specific performance is not omitted, the specific performance is restarted from the first data of the file corresponding to the storage result of the progress information storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to re-execute a part of the specific performance that was executed before the interruption, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10B10. In any of the gaming machines 10B1 to 10B9, the specific performance restart means starts the specific performance when a specific operation (resume operation) is performed by a player.

According to this gaming machine, when the display of the specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance is started when the player performs a specific operation. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to let the player decide the timing for restarting the specific performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 10B11. In any of the gaming machines 10B1 to 10B10, the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific performance when a specific abnormality (hopper empty error) occurs in the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if a specific abnormality occurs in the gaming machine and the display of a specific performance is interrupted, the specific performance may be restarted with a part of the specific performance omitted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which a specific performance must be terminated in the middle of the performance as a result of, for example, a specific abnormality occurring, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. becomes possible.

Game machine 10B12. In any of the gaming machines 10B1 to 10B11, when the interrupting means interrupts the display of the specific performance, the location after the location where the specific performance was interrupted (the beginning of the next file) The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to restart the game by omitting part of the specific performance by restarting the game from the start.

According to this gaming machine, when the display of a specific effect is interrupted, it is possible to restart the specific effect by omitting a part of it by restarting the specific effect from a point after the point where it was interrupted. It becomes. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the specific effect cannot be executed to the end when the display of the specific effect is interrupted.

Note that the gaming machine 10A group and the gaming machine 10B group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machines 10A group and the gaming machines 10B group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machines A group to the gaming machine Y group, and the gaming machines 9A group to the gaming machine 9D group, and in the case where they are combined. It is also possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Game machine 11A1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
Win/fail determining means (lottery processing function S209 of main controller 101) for determining win/fail based on the winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that grants a benefit based on winning the winning determination,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
A configuration capable of executing different notifications depending on when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7) and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

According to this gaming machine, the configuration is such that different notifications can be executed when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It becomes. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the user to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 11A2. The gaming machine 11A1 is provided with specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) that executes specific notification, and is in a changeable state in which the specific operation can be changed to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. a first specific operation (ON operation of the setting key) to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means (ON operation of the reset switch 72); and a second specific operation (ON operation of the reset switch 72) to terminate the changeable state. 3 specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after ON operation of the start lever 41), and the specific notification execution means is configured to perform the third specific operation in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is put into a changeable state by the first specific operation, It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and to terminate the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, if the third specific operation is performed in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, the third specific operation to the third specific operation can be performed. 1. It is possible to reduce the effort required when returning to a specific operation.

Game machine 11A3. The gaming machine 11A2 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is not performed from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid executing specific notification every time a specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it becomes possible for the operator who performs the work of changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the above-mentioned work without making him feel annoyed.

Game machine 11A4. A gaming machine 11A2 or 11A3, characterized in that the gaming machine 11A2 or 11A3 is equipped with means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, since the means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage device through the specific notification. It becomes possible to notify.

Game machine 11A5. In any of the gaming machines 11A2 to 11A4, there is a first state (front door 12 open state) in which it is easy to perform the specific operation, and a second state (front door 12 open state) in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a switching member (front door 12) capable of switching between a closed state and a closed state.

According to this gaming machine, a switching member is provided that can switch between a first state in which it is easy to perform a specific operation and a second state in which it is difficult to perform a specific operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress unauthorized attempts to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the configuration related to the gaming machine 11A2, it is possible to notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means before switching from the first state to the second state. Become. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, reducing the effort required when returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine 11A6. The gaming machine 11A5 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when it is determined that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state, specific notification is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means before performing a specific operation, and it is possible to notify whether or not a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. Confirmation can be easily performed.

Game machine 11A7. The gaming machine 11A5 or the gaming machine 11A6 includes a first state notifying means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for notifying the first state, and the first state notifying means includes the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that different notifications are performed depending on when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value.

According to this gaming machine, when the first state is notified, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. Different notifications are performed depending on whether the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated due to notifying that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to keep the processing configuration in the first state and the numerical information storage. It becomes possible to notify both whether the numerical information stored in the means is a specific value or not.

Game machine 11A8. In any of the gaming machines 11A5 to 10A7, when switching from the first state to the second state, confirmation means (setting of display control device 81) for confirming the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means A gaming machine comprising a value confirmation function (S110606) and configured to perform processing according to the confirmation result of the confirmation means.

According to this gaming machine, when switching from the first state to the second state, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is confirmed, and processing is performed according to the result of the confirmation. With this configuration, even after switching to the second state, it is possible to perform processing for understanding the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 11A9. In the gaming machine 11A8, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification (change in lighting mode) is issued at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined notification execution means (display control device 81, upper lamp 63).

According to this gaming machine, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the predetermined notification is executed at the timing when the first state is switched to the second state. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing when the first state is switched to the second state.

Game machine 11A10. A gaming machine 11A8 or 11A9, characterized in that the gaming machine 11A8 or 11A9 is equipped with means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, since the means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through the predetermined notification. It becomes possible to notify.

Game machine 11A11. In the gaming machine 11A9 or the gaming machine 11A10, the predetermined notification executing means is configured to set, as the predetermined notification, a notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) that is visible from the front of the gaming machine under the second state. A gaming machine characterized by changing from a notification mode (lit state) to a second notification mode (lights out state).

According to this gaming machine, as the predetermined notification, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means that is visible from the front of the gaming machine under the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. With this configuration, when a specific operation is performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the switching member switches from the first state to the second state, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined notification as a final means of confirming whether or not the person is present.

Gaming machine 11A12. In the gaming machine 11A11, when the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification device from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the predetermined notification execution means changes from the second notification mode to the second notification mode. A gaming machine characterized by changing to one notification mode.

According to this gaming machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed to the first notification mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. With this configuration, it is possible to return the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the second notification mode to the first notification mode without any operation by the manager of the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of effort required when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Game machine 11A13. In any of the gaming machines 11A2 to 11A12, the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is executed by outputting predetermined sound data. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed to easily understand that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. Certainly, it is also possible to perform a specific notification by displaying at a predetermined position that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. However, in the case of such a configuration, it becomes necessary for the administrator, etc. to move to a place where the predetermined position can be seen and then check the displayed content, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. This is because the task of figuring out whether or not there is one becomes complicated.

Game machine 11B1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
Win/fail determining means (lottery processing function S209 of main controller 101) for determining win/fail based on the winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that grants a benefit based on winning the winning determination,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
A switching member (front door 12 closed state) that can switch between a first state (front door 12 open state) in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and a second state (front door 12 closed state) in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation. door 12) and
and confirmation means (set value confirmation function S110606 of display control device 81) for confirming the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means when switching from the first state to the second state,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to perform processing according to the confirmation result of the confirmation means.

According to this gaming machine, a switching member is provided that can switch between a first state in which it is easy to perform a specific operation and a second state in which it is difficult to perform a specific operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress unauthorized attempts to change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. Further, when switching from the first state to the second state, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is confirmed, and processing is performed according to the confirmation result. With this configuration, even after switching to the second state, it is possible to perform processing for understanding the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine 11B2. In the gaming machine 11B1, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value (7) is stored in the numerical information storage means, a predetermined notification (lighting up) occurs at the timing of switching from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a predetermined notification execution means (a display control device 81, an upper lamp 63) for executing a mode change).

According to this gaming machine, when the confirmation means confirms that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the predetermined notification is executed at the timing when the first state is switched to the second state. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means at the timing when the first state is switched to the second state. As a result, it becomes possible to prompt the user to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means at a relatively early stage.

Game machine 11B3. The gaming machine 11B2 is characterized in that the gaming machine 11B2 is equipped with means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, since the means for executing the predetermined notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means through the predetermined notification. It becomes possible to notify.

Game machine 11B4. In the gaming machine 11B2 or the gaming machine 11B3, the predetermined notification executing means is configured to set, as the predetermined notification, a notification mode of the predetermined notification means (upper lamp 63) that is visible from the front of the gaming machine under the second state. A gaming machine characterized by changing from a notification mode (lit state) to a second notification mode (lights out state).

According to this gaming machine, as the predetermined notification, the notification mode of the predetermined notification means that is visible from the front of the gaming machine under the second state is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. With this configuration, when a specific operation is performed to store numerical information in the numerical information storage means, and the switching member switches from the first state to the second state, the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined notification as a final means of confirming whether or not the person is present.

Game machine 11B5. In the gaming machine 11B4, when the predetermined notification execution means changes the notification mode of the predetermined notification device from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the predetermined notification execution means changes from the second notification mode to the second notification mode. A gaming machine characterized by changing to one notification mode.

According to this gaming machine, when the notification mode of the predetermined notification means is changed from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the second notification mode is changed to the first notification mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. With this configuration, it is possible to return the notification mode of the predetermined notification means from the second notification mode to the first notification mode without any operation by the manager of the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of effort required when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means.

Game machine 11B6. In any of the gaming machines 11B2 to 11B5, a case where the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value, and a case where the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that allows different notifications to be executed in and.

According to this gaming machine, the configuration is such that different notifications can be executed when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It becomes. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the user to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 11B7. The gaming machine 11B6 is provided with specific notification execution means (display control device 81, speaker 64) that executes specific notification, and is in a changeable state in which the specific operation can be changed to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. a first specific operation (ON operation of the setting key) to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means (ON operation of the reset switch 72); and a second specific operation (ON operation of the reset switch 72) to terminate the changeable state. 3 specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after ON operation of the start lever 41), and the specific notification execution means is configured to perform the third specific operation in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when an operation is performed, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is put into a changeable state by the first specific operation, It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and to terminate the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, if the third specific operation is performed in a situation where the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, the specific notification is executed at the timing when the third specific operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to immediately notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means, and to change the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, the third specific operation to the third specific operation can be performed. 1. It is possible to reduce the effort required when returning to a specific operation.

Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value has been stored in the numerical information storage means before switching from the first state to the second state. As a result, when changing the specific value stored in the numerical information storage means, there is no need to switch from the second state to the first state, reducing the effort required when returning from the third specific operation to the first specific operation. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine 11B8. The gaming machine 11B7 is characterized in that the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is not performed from when the first specific operation is performed until when the third specific operation is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid executing specific notification every time a specific value is selected by the second specific operation. As a result, it becomes possible for the operator who performs the work of changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means to perform the above-mentioned work without making him feel annoyed.

Game machine 11B9. A gaming machine 11B7 or 11B8, characterized in that the gaming machine 11B7 or 11B8 is equipped with means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, since the means for executing the specific notification in a situation where the specific value is not stored in the numerical information storage means is defective, it is possible to notify that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage device through the specific notification. It becomes possible to notify.

Game machine 11B10. In any of the gaming machines 11B7 to 11B9, when the specific notification execution means determines that the specific value is stored in the numerical information storage device under the first state, executes the specific notification. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which:

According to this gaming machine, when it is determined that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means under the first state, specific notification is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means before performing a specific operation, and it is possible to notify whether or not a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means. Confirmation can be easily performed.

Game machine 11B11. In any of the gaming machines 11B7 to 11B10, the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification by outputting predetermined sound data.

According to this gaming machine, specific notification is executed by outputting predetermined sound data. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the manager of the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed to easily understand that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. Certainly, it is also possible to perform a specific notification by displaying at a predetermined position that the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. However, in the case of such a configuration, it becomes necessary for the administrator, etc. to move to a place where the predetermined position can be seen and then check the displayed content, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. This is because the task of figuring out whether or not there is one becomes complicated.

Gaming machine 11B12. Any of the gaming machines 11B2 to 11B11 is provided with a first state notifying means (display control device 81, speaker 64) for notifying that the first state is present, and the first state notifying means A gaming machine characterized in that different notifications are performed when the numerical information stored in the information storage means is the specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. .

According to this gaming machine, when the first state is notified, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value, and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value. Different notifications are performed depending on whether the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated due to notifying that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to keep the processing configuration in the first state and the numerical information storage. It becomes possible to notify both whether the numerical information stored in the means is a specific value or not.

Gaming machine 11C1. Numerical information storage means (setting value storage area of RAM 106) for storing numerical information (setting values);
Win/fail determining means (lottery processing function S209 of main controller 101) for determining win/fail based on the winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing function S213 of the main control device 101) that grants a benefit based on winning the winning determination,
When a specific operation (setting change operation) is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
The specific operation is a first specific operation (ON operation of a setting key) for changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, and selecting numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means. a second specific operation (ON operation of the reset switch 72) to do so, and a third specific operation (OFF operation of the setting key after the ON operation of the start lever 41) to end the changeable state;
The requirements for the third specific operation to be performed include:
A signal from a first detection means (start detection sensor 41a) that detects whether or not the first operation means (start lever 41) is operated is a first non-operation signal (OFF) indicating that the first operation means is not operated. detecting that the first operation signal (ON signal) is switched from the signal) to a first operation signal (ON signal) indicating that the first operation means has been operated;
After detecting that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal, a second detection means (setting key) detects whether or not the second operation means (setting key) is operated. The signal from the key detection sensor 73a) varies from a second operation signal (ON signal) indicating that the second operation means has been operated to a second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not operated. (OFF signal).

According to this gaming machine, when changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is put into a changeable state by the first specific operation, It is necessary to select numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means by a specific operation, and to terminate the changeable state by a third specific operation. Here, the signal from the first detecting means for detecting whether or not the first operating means is operated is a first non-operating signal indicating that the first operating means is not operated, indicating that the first operating means has been operated. Detecting that the signal has been switched to the first operation signal indicating that the second operation means has been operated, and after that, a signal from the second detection means that detects whether or not the second operation means has been operated is switched to the first operation signal indicating that the second operation means has been operated. The third specific operation is determined to have been performed based on detecting that the signal has been switched to the second non-operation signal indicating that the second operation means is not operated.

By configuring the configuration to include at least the operation of the first operation means and the operation of the second operation means as a requirement for the third specific operation, it becomes possible to make fraudulent acts difficult, and it is possible to reduce the noise, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the chance of erroneously determining that the third specific operation has been performed. Regarding the second operating means, the second operating means may be configured to detect that the signal from the second detecting means has been switched from the second operating signal to the second non-operating signal, for example, the second operating means may be configured to detect the second non-operating signal. Compared to this, it becomes possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to normally change the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine 11C2. The gaming machine 11C1 is characterized in that the requirement for the first specific operation to be performed includes detecting that the second operation signal is input from the second detection means. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, the requirements for performing the first specific operation include detecting that the second operation signal has been input. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform the first specific operation and the third specific operation using the second operation means, and it becomes possible to simplify the specific operation.

Furthermore, when the second operating means is operated so that the second non-operation signal is inputted from the second detecting means before operating the first operating means, that is, before the third specific operation, the first operating means After operating the operating means, the second operating means is operated so that the second operating signal is input again from the second detecting means, and the second operating means is operated so that the second non-operating signal is input from the second detecting means. It becomes necessary to operate. Therefore, it becomes possible to reliably detect the operation of the second operating means.

Game machine 11C3. In the gaming machine 11C2, the second operating means is configured to be able to hold the second operating signal in a state where the second detecting means outputs the second operating signal without operating the second operating means. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, the second operating means is configured to be able to hold the second operating signal in a situation where the second detecting means outputs the second operating signal without operating the second operating means. With this configuration, when the second operating means is operated when performing the first specific operation, the second non-operation signal is outputted from the second detecting means as the third specific operation. All you have to do is operate the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the specific operation.

Game machine 11C4. In any of the game machines 11C1 to 11C3, the third specific operation must be performed if the signal from the second detection means is switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to include detecting that the second non-operation signal has been inputted from the second detection means a prescribed number of times (10 times) after detecting that the second non-operation signal has been inputted from the second detection means.

According to this gaming machine, as a requirement for the third specific operation to be performed, the second detection means is performed after detecting that the signal from the second detection means has been switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. This includes detecting the input of the second non-operation signal from the means a predetermined number of times. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneously detecting switching of the signal from the second detection means due to noise or the like.

Game machine 11C5. In the gaming machine 11C4, before detecting the specified number of times that the second non-operation signal has been input from the second detection means, it is determined that the second operation signal has been input from the second detection means. A gaming machine characterized in that, when detected, it is configured to detect again that the signal from the second detection means has been switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal.

According to the gaming machine, if it is detected that the second operation signal is input from the second detection means before the input of the second non-operation signal is detected from the second detection means a prescribed number of times, It is again detected that the signal from the second detection means has been switched from the second operation signal to the second non-operation signal. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid erroneously detecting switching of the signal from the second detection means due to noise or the like.

Game machine 11C6. In any of the gaming machines 11C1 to 11C5, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information selected by the second specific operation is stored in the numerical information storage means. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid changing the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means without performing the third specifying operation.

Game machine 11C7. The gaming machine 11C6 includes an updating unit (setting value update function S110210 of the main controller 101) that updates numerical information when the second specific operation is performed, and a storage unit (RAM 106) that stores the update result of the updating unit. a display buffer) and a display means (a payout number display section 62) for displaying the numerical information stored in the storage means, and when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that information is stored in the numerical information storage means.

According to this gaming machine, the numerical information updated when the second specific operation is performed is stored in the storage means and displayed on the display means. Then, when the third specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the storage means is stored in the numerical information storage means. By having a configuration that displays updated numerical information when the second specific operation is performed, it is possible to have the worker performing the specific operation select the numerical information that is intended by the second specific operation relatively easily. becomes. Furthermore, by configuring the numerical information to be updated when the second specific operation is performed to be stored in a storage means different from the numerical information storage means, the numerical information can be stored in the numerical information storage means without the third specific operation being performed. This makes it possible to avoid changes to the numerical information provided.

Game machine 11C8. In any of the gaming machines 11C1 to 11C7, a periodic confirmation means (timer interrupt processing of the main controller 101) that periodically checks signals from the first detection means and the second detection means, and and a standby means (interrupt wait processing S110206, S110501 of the main controller 101) that waits until confirmation by the confirmation means is performed, and when determining whether or not the third specific operation has been performed, the standby means waits until the confirmation is performed by the confirmation means. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which standby is performed by a means.

According to this gaming machine, when determining whether or not the third specific operation has been performed, the process of waiting until the periodic confirmation means confirms the signals from the first detection means and the second detection means is performed. It will be done. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the third specific operation has been performed based on the latest status of the signals from the first detection means and the second detection means. As a result, for example, it is avoided to detect multiple times that the signal from the first detection means has switched from the first non-operation signal to the first operation signal in response to one operation of the first operation means. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine 11C9. In any of the gaming machines 11C1 to 11C8, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value (7), and the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is the specific value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute different notifications depending on whether the game is not or not.

According to this gaming machine, the configuration is such that different notifications can be executed when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not a specific value. It becomes. With this configuration, it is possible to notify that a specific value is stored in the numerical information storage means, and to prompt the user to perform a specific operation and store a value different from the specific value in the numerical information storage means. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the gaming machines 11A group to the gaming machine 11C group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the above gaming machine group A to gaming machine Y group, the gaming machine group 9, and the gaming machine 10 group may be combined as appropriate with the gaming machine 11 group, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. can play.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32...Reel constituting a circulating display means and as a rotating body, 41...Start lever as a start operation means or start operation means, 42-44...Stop switch as a stop operation means, 56...First credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57...Second credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58...Third credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means , 63...Upper lamp constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 64...Speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 65...Auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 81 ...Display control device constituting a sub-control board or specific effect execution means, 101... Main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

Numerical information storage means for storing numerical information;
A validity determination means for determining the success or failure based on the winning probability according to the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising a benefit granting means for granting a benefit based on winning the win/failure determination,
When a specific operation is performed, the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed,
a first specific operation that puts the specific operation into a changeable state in which the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means can be changed; and a second specific operation that selects numerical information to be stored in the numerical information storage means; a third specific operation for terminating the changeable state,
a switching means capable of switching between a first state in which it is easy to perform the specific operation and a second state in which it is difficult to perform the specific operation;
a first state notification means for notifying that the first state is present;
Equipped with
The first state notification means is configured to notify when the changeable state is not possible, when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is a specific value, and when the numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means is not the specific value. A gaming machine characterized by executing different notifications depending on the case.

Images